Nokia N82 User Manual
Nokia N82 User Guide Issue 1
DECLARATION O F CONFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares tha t this RM-313 product is in compliance with the es sential requirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/5 /EC. A copy o f the Decla ration of Conformity can be found at h ttp:// www.nokia.com/phon es/declaration_of_co nformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Noki a Origin al Enhancements logos, Nseries, N82, Navi, N-Gage, Vis ual Radi o, and No kia Care are trademark s or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporat ion. Nokia tune is a soun d mark of Nokia Corpo ration. Other product and company name s me ntio ned her ein may be tradema rks or trad enames of thei r respective owners . Reproducti on, transfer, d istribution, or st orage of part or al l of the contents in this docu ment in any form without the prior written permission of Nok ia is prohibited. This product includes so ftware licensed f r om Symbian So ftware Ltd é 1998- 2007. Symb ian and Symb ian OS are trademar ks of Symbia n Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input soft ware Copyright é 19 97-2007. Tegic Com munications, Inc. All rig h ts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of th e Nokia Maps softwa re are co pyright é 1996-2002 The FreeType Project. Al l rights reserved. This product is li censed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfo lio License (i) for personal and no ncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a person al and noncommercial activity a nd (ii) fo r use in connect ion with MPEG-4 video provid ed by a licensed video provid er. No license is grante d or shall be implied fo r any other use . Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional, in ternal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained fro m MPEG LA, LLC. See http://w ww.mpegla . com. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing develop ment. Nokia reserves th e right to make cha nges and improvemen ts to any of the product s describ ed in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAX IMUM EX TENT PE RMITTED BY APPLICA BLE LAW, U NDER NO CI RCUMSTAN CES SHALL NOKI A OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONS IBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME O R ANY SP ECIAL, I NCIDENT AL, CONSEQUENT IAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HO WSO EVER CAUSED. THE CO NTENTS OF THIS DOCUMEN T ARE PROV IDED "AS IS". E XCEPT A S REQUI RED BY APPLICA BLE LAW , NO WA RRANTI ES OF ANY KIND, E ITHE R EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL IED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AN D FITN ESS FOR A PARTICUL AR PURPOS E, ARE MAD E IN RELA TION TO TH E ACCUR ACY, R ELIABI LITY OR CONT ENTS OF THIS DO CUMEN T. NOKIA RESERV ES THE RIGH T TO REV ISE THIS DOCUM ENT OR WI THDRA W IT AT A NY TIME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTICE.
The third-party applications provided with your device may have been created an d may be owne d by pers ons or entiti es not affili ated with or related to Nokia. Nok ia does not own th e copyrights or intel lectual prop er ty rights to the third-pa rty applications. As s uch, Nokia doe s n ot take any respo nsibility for end-user support, functi onality of the applications, or the inf ormation in the applicat ions or these materia ls. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the third-party a pplications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS Y OU ACKNOW LEDGE THA T THE APPLICA TIONS ARE P ROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY K IND, EX PRESS OR IMP LIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTEN T PERMITTE D BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FUR THER ACKNO WLEDGE THAT NEIT HER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIAT ES MAKE ANY REPRESE N TAT IONS OR WARRANTI ES, EXPRES S OR IMPL IED, INC LUDING BUT NOT LIM ITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TITLE , MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNE SS FOR A P ARTICUL A R PURPOS E, OR THAT THE AP PLICATIONS W ILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY P ATENTS, COPYR IGHTS, TRAD EMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of particular product s an d applications and service s for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and a vailab ility of l anguage opt ions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities, technolo gy or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and oth er countr ies. Dive rsion contrary to law is prohib ited. /Issue 1
Contents For yo ur s afe ty ...... ......... ....... ......... ........ ...1 0 About your device............................................ .............11 Network services................................ ...........................12 Enh ance me nts , b att er ies , an d ch ar ge rs.....................12 Get c onne ct ed.. ........ ..... ...... ......... ...... ....... .14 Useful information.......... ...........................15 Help............ ............ ........... ........... ................ ............ .......15 Get started.................................................................... .15 Nok ia s up port an d co nta ct in form ati on ....... ......... ..... 15 Additional applica tions............ ........ ........... ......... ........15 Software updates...... ....................................................16 Settings......................................................................... .16 Access codes....................... .......................... .................16 Prolong battery life............................ ...........................17 Free memory................ .................. ............. ................. .18 Your device........... .......... ............. .......... .....19 Welcome.................................. ............................ ..........19 Switch............. .................. .................. ................. ...........19 Transfer content............................. ............................19 Syn ch roni se, re tri ev e, or se nd con te nt.................... 20 Display indicators. .............................. ....................... ....21 Fast downloading............................ ............. ................2 2 Lock the keypad................. ................ ................ ...........2 2 Shortcuts................................ ........................................23 Multimedia menu...... ....................................................23 Mobile Search.......................... ............... .................... ...24 Games........... ................... ................... ......................... ...24 Headset.......................................... ................................25 Volu me and lou dsp ea ker co ntro l... ....... ......... ...... ....... 26 Offline profile............... ............... .................... ............... 26 Camera.................. ................. .................. ..28 About the camera ........... ............ ......... ............ .............2 8 Image capture.............................................................. .28 Sti ll ima ge c am er a in di cat ors ....... ....... ....... ......... ..... 28 Active toolbar.................. ............ ............... ............... .29 Take pictures....................... ................ ............... ........30 After taking a pict ure.................................................31 Flash........ .............. ................. .............. .............. ..........32 Scenes.................... ........................ ....................... .......32 Take pictures in a sequence......................................3 2 You in the pictureâÂÂself-t imer...... ......... ....... ......... ...33 Tips on taking good photographs.................. ..........33 Video recording..................................... ........................34 Video capture indicators............ ........ ...... ......... ........3 4 Record videos................. ............ ................. ............ ...35 After recording a video..............................................36 Camera settings... .................. .............. ............ ..............36 Still image camera settin gs.......................................36 Se t u p s et t i ng s âÂÂa d ju s t c o lo u r a n d l ig h ti n g............37 Video settings.................................... .........................38 Gallery.......................................... ..............39 View and organi se files................. ................ ............ ...39 Images and video clips.................................................40 View images and vi deos............................................40 Organise images and videos....................... ..............4 0 Contents
Active toolbar.................... ........... ................ ............ ..41 Albums............. .............. .............. .................. ..............41 Print basket........ ................. ...................... ..................42 Slide show. .............................. ....................................42 Edit images....................................................................42 Image editor...............................................................42 Crop image............................ ......................................43 Reduce red-eye...........................................................43 Useful shortcuts............. ............................ .................43 Edit videos........................... ................. .................... .....43 TV-out mode..................................................................44 Presentations........................ ................ ............ ............44 Print images.......................... ................... ..................... 45 Image print.................................................................45 Printer selection................... ................ ............... ....45 Print preview................... ................. ................ .......45 Print settings. ............... ............ ............ ........... .........46 Print online................................................ .................46 Share images and videos online... .............. .................46 Home network............. ............... .................... .............. .47 About home network....................... .................... ......47 Important security informa tion................. ...............47 Settings for home network.............. .............. ...........48 Set sharing on an d define content.......... .......... .......48 View and share media files..................... .............. ....49 Copy media files...................... ................ ............ .......50 Positioning ( GPS)........... .......... .......... .........51 About GPS..... ............... .............. ............... ................... ...51 GPS receiver............................................. ......................52 About satellite si gnals.......................... ..................... ...52 Position requests........................... ............. ................. .53 Maps................................. ................................ ..............53 About Maps...................................... ................... ........53 Browse maps..................................... ..................... ....54 Download maps...... ................. ............ ............. ..........55 Find a place.................................................................56 Plan a route...... ................. ............. ............. ................57 Extra services for Maps.............. ...... ......... ....... ........ ..57 Navigation. ....................... ....................... .................58 Guides.......................................................................58 Landmarks........................................... ..........................59 GPS data.........................................................................59 Route guidance............... ......... ............. ......... ............60 Ret rie ve posi ti on i nfo rma ti on. ............ ....... ......... .....6 0 Trip meter............................................. ...................... 60 Web browser.... .......... ........... .......... ...........61 Browse the web.............................. .............. ................61 Browser toolbar...................... ........... .................. .........62 Navigate p ages........ .................. ....................... .............63 Web feeds and blogs.................... ......... ............. ..........63 Content search... ...................... ............. ................ .........64 Download and purcha se items........................ ............64 Bookmarks................................................. ....................64 Empty the cache............................................................65 End the connection.................................................. .....65 Connection security.................. ........ ............ ........ ........65 Web setti ngs........... ................... ......................... ...........66 Connections... ............ ............. ............... .....68 Wireless LAN.................................................................. 68 About WLAN................................................................68 WLAN connections. ................... .............. ............. .......68 WLAN wizard...... .............. ................. .............. ............69 WLAN internet access poi nts.....................................69 Operating modes... ......................... ................... .........70 Connection manager................. ........ .......... ........ .........70 Contents
Active data connect ions........... ............ ............. .........70 Available WLAN networks. .............. .................. .........70 Bluetooth connectivity....................... .............. ............71 About Bluetooth connectivity................ ......... ..........7 1 Settings.............................. ....................... ..................71 Security tips................................... ......................... ....72 Send data using Bluet ooth connectivi ty........ ...... ....72 Pair devices.................................................................73 Re c ei v e d a t a u s in g Bl u e to o th c on n ec t i vi t y........... ..7 3 Remote SIM mode................. ............... ................... ...74 USB............... ................ ............... ................ ....................74 PC connections................. ............... ........... ............... ....75 Nokia Video C entre........... ......... ......... ........76 Find and view videos....................................................76 Internet videos..............................................................77 Play downloaded videos............ ........... .......... ........... ..77 Transfer videos from your PC.......................................77 Settings......................................................................... .78 Music folder................... ......................... ....79 Music player........................................ ...........................79 Pla y a s ong or a p odca st epi so de... ........ ......... ......... 79 Music menu..................................... ............................80 Playlists.......................... ...................... .......................8 0 Podcasts................................... ...................................8 1 Hom e ne tw ork wit h mu si c p lay er ....... .......... ....... ....81 Transfer music to your device. ..................................82 Transfer music from PC.................................. .........82 Transfer with Windows Media Player....................82 Nokia Music S tore............................... ........................... 83 Radio.............................. ...................... ..........................84 Listen to the radio. .......................................... ...........84 View visual content. .............................................. .....85 Saved sta tions........... ............ .......... ............ ............ ....85 Settings................................... ........................ ............85 Nokia Podcasting......................... ................. ............. ...85 Settings................................... ........................ ............86 Search......................................................................... .87 Directories...................... .................................... .........87 Downloads............................................................ ......88 Play and manage p odcasts................. .................... ...88 Media folder.................................. .............90 RealPlayer .................................... ................................ .90 Play video clips.................................. .........................90 Stream content over th e air................. .................. ...90 RealPlayer settin gs........................... ......................... .90 Adobe Flash Player.............................................. ..........91 Nokia Lifeblog.................. ................ ............ ................ .91 Activation keys.................................. ........................... .91 Recorder................................. ........................................ 92 Per son al ise you r d evi ce ...... ....... ...... ........ ..9 4 Themes......... ........................ .................... ................... ...94 ProfilesâÂÂset tones... ......................... ................. ...........94 3-D tones.......... ..................... ...................... ...................95 Modify the standby mode............. ....... .......... ....... .......96 Modify the main menu ............ ........... ............. ........... ..96 Time management...... ............ ................ ...97 Clock ........................... ................. ........................... .......97 Alarm clock................. .............. ................ ...................97 World clock................ .............. .................. .............. ...97 Calendar............................................. ............................98 Create a calendar entry.... ................................ ..........98 Calendar views....... .................. .............. .............. .......98 Manage calenda r entries............... .......... .............. ....99 Contents
Messaging................ .......... ............. ........ .100 Messaging main view.................................................100 Write text. ....................... .................................. ...........101 Traditional text input........... .......... ............ ....... ......101 Predictive text input......................... .................. .....101 Tips on text inpu t....................................... ..............102 Change the writing language........... ........ ...... ........102 Edit text and lists.... ............ ............ ............... .......... .102 Write and send messa ges.............. .................. ..........102 Messaging inbox.......................... .................... ...........104 Receive messages................ ............ ......... ............ ...104 Multimedia messages..............................................104 Dat a, s et tin gs, an d w eb s erv ic e me ss age s............105 Mailbox... ............... ............... .................... ............... .....105 Define the e-mail settings.......................................105 Open the mailbox....... ................................ ..............106 Retrieve e-mail messages........... ........ ...... ......... .....106 Delete e-mail messages..... ................. .................... .107 Disconnect from the mailbox......................... .........107 View messages on a SIM card...................... ..............107 Messaging settin gs..................... ..................... ...........107 Text message set tings............................................ .107 Multimedia message set tings........................... ......108 E-mail settings.... .............................. ....................... .109 Manage mailboxes ............ .......... ............. ......... ....109 Connection settings.............. .......... ....... .......... .....109 User settings......................................................... .110 Retrieval settings.............. .......... ....... ........... ........110 Au toma ti c re tr iev al set ti ngs .......... ................... ...1 11 Web service mess age settings................................111 Cell broadcast settings. .................. .............. ............111 Other settings ...........................................................112 Make calls. .......................................... ......113 Voice calls..................... ................ .................... ...........113 Options during a call. ............ ................ ............. ......... 113 Voice and video mailboxes............ ......... .......... ........ .114 Answer or decline a call.......... ......... ....... ....... ......... ...114 Make a conference call............. ........... ............ ........ ...114 Speed dial a phone number.......... ............................. 115 Call waiting.......... ................................ ........................115 Voice dialling.................................... ...........................115 Make a video call............................... ..........................116 Options during a video call............................ ............117 Answer or decline a video call........................ ...........117 Video sharing...................... .................. .............. ........118 Requirements..................................... ......................118 Settings.......................................................... ...........118 Sha re l iv e v ide o o r vi deo cli ps ..... .......... ........ ...... ...1 19 Accept an invita tion.................................................120 Internet calls.... ................ ............ ............ ................ ....120 Create an internet call profile.............. ......... ......... .121 Connect to the internet call service........................ 121 Make internet calls ..................................................122 Service settings .............. ........... ............... ................122 Log................ ...................... ....................... ................... 123 Recent calls...................................... .........................123 Call duration......................... .................. ..................123 Packet data ...................................... .........................123 Moni tor al l c ommu ni ca tio n e ven ts........................ 123 Contacts (pho nebook)............... ...............125 Save and edi t names and numbers.......................... .125 Ma nag e na me s an d nu mb ers ..... ........ ......... ...... ....... .12 5 Default numbers and address es................................126 Add ringing tones for con tacts.................. ................126 Copy contacts...................... ........... .............. ...............126 SIM dire ct ory and o the r SI M ser vi ces ................... .....1 27 Contents
Manage contact groups..............................................127 Office folder. .......... ......... ............ ........ ......129 Quickoffice...................................................................129 Quickword............... .................... .............................. 129 Quicksheet........................ ................... ............... ......129 Quickpoint....... ............. ................... ............... ...........129 Quickmanager........................ ................... ...............130 Notes............................................................................130 Adobe PDF reader........... ............. ................ ............ ....130 Converter...................... ............... ..................... ...........130 Zip manager.................... ................. .................. .........131 Barcode reader................................... .........................131 Applications folder. .............. ................ ....133 Calculator.....................................................................133 Application mana ger........................... ...................... .133 Install applica tions and softw are ................. .........134 Remove applications and soft ware........................135 Settings.................................................. ...................135 Tools folder.................................. ............137 File manager....... ............ ................... ............... ...........137 Memory card tool........................................................137 Voice commands.........................................................137 Sync................................................ ..............................138 Device manager.................... ............. .............. .......... .138 Settings................................... .................140 General settin gs........................... ...............................140 Personalisation sett ings..........................................140 Enhancement set tings................................... ..........141 Security setting s.................................. .....................142 Phone and SIM............................................. ..........142 Certificate manageme nt...................................... .143 Security module......... .............. ................... ...........144 Restore original settings............................. ............144 Positioning settings .................................................144 Phone settings....................... ................ ................ .....145 Call settings.. ................. ............. .............. ................. 145 Call divert................................................ ..................146 Call barring..... .............. .................. .............. .............146 Network settings... ................... .................. ..............147 Connection settings ........................................... .........147 Dat a c onn ect io ns a nd acc ess po in ts......................147 Access points.................. ............... ............. ..............148 Create a new access point.................... ......... .......148 Packet data access poin ts..................................... 148 WLAN internet access poin ts................................149 Packet data setti ngs............ ........ .......... .......... ....... .150 Wireless LAN sett ings......... ......... ...... ......... ........ .....151 SIP settings................................. .......................... ....151 Internet call settings ................ ........................ ........151 Configurations..........................................................151 Access point name cont rol............ .............. ........... .152 Application setting s.................................................... 152 Troubleshooting............ ...... ....... ....... ......153 No ki a or i gi n al e nh a n ce m en ts .................15 6 Enhancements............. ................................................156 Battery......... ........... ................ ............. ............ .............156 Battery information................................ .157 Charging and disch arging........................... ...............157 Nok ia ba tt ery au the nti cat io n gui de li nes ......... ....... .15 8 Authenticate holog ram........ ........... ........ .......... ......158 What if your battery is not authentic?...................158 Contents
Car e a nd m ain tena nce ........... .......... ........1 60 Addi t ion al s af ety in for ma tio n............. ....16 2 Small children ................ ....................... ................. ......162 Operating envi ronment............... ..................... ..........162 Medical devices................. ............ ............. ................ .162 Implanted medical devices............. .......... ......... .....162 Hearing aids... .................. .................. ....................... 163 Vehicles........................................................................163 Pot ent ia ll y ex pl osi ve e nv iro nme nt s.........................16 4 Emergency calls............... ......................... ...................164 Certification information (SAR).. .............. .................. 165 Index................................................. .......166 Contents
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not fol lowing them may be dangerous or illegal. Re ad the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON S AFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Al ways keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFE RENCE All wireless dev ices may be sus ceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH O FF IN HOSPIT ALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRC RAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WH EN REFUELIN G Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENS IBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product docu mentation. Do n ot touch t he antenna areas un necessarily. QUALIFIED SE RVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BAT TERIES Use only approved enhancements and batterie s. Do not connect incompa tible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. 10 For your safety
BACK-UP COP IES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of a ll important information stored in your device. CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible product s. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone funct ion of the device is switched on and in serv ice. Press the end key as many times as needed to c lear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location . Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is ap proved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Conta ct your service provider for more information about networks. When using the featu res in this device, obey all laws and respect loca l customs, privacy a nd legitimate rights of others, in cluding copyrights. Copyright protection s may preven t some images, music (includi ng ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports inte rnet connections and other methods of connectivity. Li ke computers, your device may be expose d to viruses, malicious m essages and applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and open messag es, ac cept connectivity requests, download content, and acce pt installations only from trustworthy source s. To increase the security of your devices, consider installing, using, and regularly upda ting antiviru s software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To us e any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interfer ence or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 ). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. During extended operation, such as an active v ideo sharing session or high-sp eed data connection, the device may feel warm. In mo st cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working 11 For your safety
properly, take it to the nearest au thorized service facili ty. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party inte rnet sites. You ma y also acce ss other third-party sites through you r device. Th ird-party sites are not affiliated w ith Nokia, and No kia does not endorse or assume liabilit y for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should ta ke precautions for security or content. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the phone you must have s ervice from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These feat ures are not availa ble on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will apply . Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language-dependent cha racters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocol s. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always swit ch the dev ice off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This devi ce is intended for use when supplied with power from the DC-4, AC-4, or AC-5 charger and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with thi s device is BP-6MT. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any ap proval or warranty, and may be danger ous. For availability of a ppr oved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the 12 For your safety
power cord of any enhanc ement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. 13 For your safety
Get connected Nokia N82 supports the following connectivity methods: â 2G and 3G networks â Bluetooth connec tivity â to transfer files an d connect t o compatible enhan cements. See "Bluetooth connectivity," p. 71 . â Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) â to connect to compatible headsets, headphones, TVs, or home stereo sets. See "TV-out mode," p. 44 . â USB data cable â to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See "USB," p. 74 . â Wireless LAN (WLAN) â to co nnect to th e internet and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wireless LAN," p. 68 . â GPS â to co nnect to GPS satellite s to measure your location. See "Positioning (GPS)," p. 51 . 14 Get connected
Useful information Model number: Nokia N82-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N82. Help Your device has con text-sensitive he lp. When an application is open, select Optio ns > Help to access help for the current view. When you are re ading the instructions, to switch between he lp and the applica tion th at is open i n the background, press and hold . To open he lp from the main menu, select Tools > Util ities > Help . Sele ct the des i red application to view its hel p topics. Get started See the get st arted guide for k eys and parts information, instructions for setting up the devi ce and for other essential information. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nokia-asia.com/support or your local Nokia website for the latest gu ides, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. You may also download free configuration setting s su ch as MMS, GPRS, e-mail, and other services for your de vice mo del at www.nokia-asia.com/phonesetting s. If you need to c ontact custom er service, chec k the list of local Nok ia Car e contac t cent res at www.nokia-asia.com/contactus. For mainten ance servic es, check your neare st Nokia Care point at www.nokia-asia.com/repair. Additional applications There are various applica tions provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. Th ese applications are explained in the guides that are available on the pr oduct su pport pages of the No kia website. 15 Useful information
Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhan ced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through th e Nokia Software Updater PC applica tion. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Softwa re Updater application and a compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2 000, XP, or Vista operating system, br oadband internet access, and a compatible data cable to connect your devic e to the PC. To get more information an d to do wnload the No kia Software Updater applic ation, visit www.nokia- asia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia websit e. Tip: To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the st andb y mode . Settings Your device normal ly has MMS, GPRS, stream ing, and mobile internet se ttings automatic ally conf igured in the device, based upon your network service provider information. Yo u may ha ve settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receiv e or request th e settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can change th e general settings in your device, such as lang uage, stan dby mode, display, and keypad lock s ettin gs. See "General settings," p. 140 . Access codes If you fo rget any of th e access co des, contac t your service provider. â Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. Af ter three consecutiv e incorrect PI N code entrie s, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. â UPIN code â This code ma y be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM ca rd is an enha nced versio n of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. â PIN2 code â This code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, an d is required to access some functions in your device. â Lock code (also known as security code) â This code (5 digits) can be us ed to lock the device to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code i s 12345 . To avoid u nautho rised use of yo ur device , change t he lock code . Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate 16 Useful information
from your device. Try enter ing the code only once, if you forget the cod e. If the code y ou entered is not correct, co ntact a Nokia Care point or your service provider for f urther instructions. â Personal unblocking ke y (PUK) code and PUK 2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the code s are not supplied with the SIM ca rd, contact th e operator wh ose SIM card is in your device. â UPUK code â This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contac t the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery life Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, note the fo llowing: â Features that use Bluetooth tech nology, or allowing such features t o run in the background while using other fea tures, increase the demand on battery power. T urn Bluetoot h tech nology off when you do not need it. â Features that use wi reless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features t o run in the background while using other fea tures, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia d evice switches off wh en you are not t rying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not sca nning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background . See "Wireless LAN," p. 68 . When Scan for networks is set t o Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. Ho wever, you ca n still manually scan for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN netw orks as usual. â If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data c overage (GPRS), t he device perio dically tri es to establ ish a packet data connection. T o pr olong the op eratin g time of your device, select Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps application downloads new map information whe n you scroll to new areas on th e map, which increas es the deman d on batt ery power. You can preven t the automati c download of new maps. See "Maps," p. 53 . â If the signal strength of the ce llular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the ava ilable network repe atedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mod e is set to dual mode in th e network settings, th e device search es for the 17 Useful information
UMTS network. To only use the GSM network, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Network > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the display inc reases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the time-out after which the backlight is sw itched off, and adjust the light sensor that obse rves lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightn ess. Press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation > Display and Light time- out or Light sensor . â Leaving applicati ons running in the background increases the demand on battery p ower. To close the applications you do not use, press and hold , scroll to an applicatio n in the list, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from the list and Options > Exit . Free memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies y ou if the device memory or the memory card memory (if available) is low. To view how much memory different data types consume, press , and s elect Option s > Memory details . To free device memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compatible PC. To remove data you no longer need, u se File manager or go to the resp ective application. You can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messa ges from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .si sx) of applications you have installed. Back up th e installation files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Sui te. â Images and video clips in Gallery. Back up the files to a compatible PC usin g Nokia Nseries PC S uite. If you are deleting multiple items and Not enou gh memory to perf orm op eration. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some da ta from phon e memory. is show n, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest items. 18 Useful information
Your device Welcome When you switch on yo ur device, the Welc ome application is displayed. Select from the following: â Sett. wizard â to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For mo re information on the Settings wizard application, see the guides available at th e Nokia product sup port pages or your local Nokia website. â Switch â to transfer con tent, such as contac ts and calendar entries, from a compa tible Nokia device. See "Transfer content," p. 19 . There may also be a demonstration about your device available in th e Welcome appl ication. To access the Welcome ap plication later, press , and select Tools > Utiliti es > Welcome . You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. Switch Transf er con tent With the Switch application, you can transf er content, such as contac ts, betwee n two compat ible Nokia devices using Bl uetooth c onnecti vity. The type of content that can be transferre d depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content . If the other de vice supports synchronisation, you can al so synchronise data betwe en the o ther d evice an d your de vice. Your device notifies you i f the other de vice is not compatible. If the other dev ice cannot be powe red on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is sw itched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatica lly activated. Transfer content 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Switch in the Welcome applicat ion, or press , and select Tools > Utilities > Switch . 19 Your device
2. Select the conne ction type you want to use to transfer the data. Both de vices must suppo rt the selected connection type. 3. If you se lect Blue tooth conn ectivity : To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the devic e from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the othe r device, an d select OK . The devices are now paired. See "Pair devices," p. 73 . For some device models, the Switch applicatio n is sent to the other device as a message. To install the Switch app l ication on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4. From your device, select the content you want to transfer from the oth er device. Once the transfer has started, you can ca ncel it and continue later. Transferring time depends o n the am ount of data to be transferred. Content is transferred from th e memory of the other d e v i c e t o t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g l o c a t i o n i n y o u r d e v i c e . Synchronise , retrieve, or send content After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer, depe nding on th e model of the other device: to synchronise cont ent betwee n your device and the other d evic e, if the other devi ce supports synchronisation. The synchronisation i s two-way. If an item is deleted in one de vice, it is dele ted in both. You cannot restore deleted ite ms with synchronisation. to retrieve data from the ot her device to your device. With retrieval, data is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original data in th e other device, depending on th e device model. to send data from your device to your other device If Switch cannot transfer an item, depending on the type of the other device, you ca n add the item to the Nokia folder to C:\Data\Nokia or E:\Data\Nokia and transfer it from there. When y ou select th e folder to transfer, the items are syn chronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. 20 Your device
Use shortc uts to repe at a transfe r After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfe r settings to th e main view to repe at the same transfer later. To edit the shortc ut, sc roll to it, and select Option s > Shortcut settings . You ca n, for example, c reate or change the name of th e shortc ut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log o f a previous tr ansf er, scroll to a shortcut in the main view , and select Opti ons > Vi ew log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device att empts to merge the c hanges automatically. If this is no t possible, th ere is a transfer conflict . Select Check one by one , Priority to this ph one , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. For furthe r instructions, select Option s > Help . Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in th e Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received ne w e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages wait i ng to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ring ing ty pe is se t to silent, and the message alert tone and e-mail al ert ton e are set to off. The devi ce keyp ad is locke d. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls to the device are diverted to anoth er number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a numbe r indicates t he active l ine. A compatible headse t is connected to the device. A compatible TV ou t cable is con nected to the device . A compatible te xt phone is c onnected to the device . A data call is active (network service). A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k service). indicates the connect ion is on hold and that a connection is available. A p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e i n a p a r t o f t h e network that supports EG PRS (network service). 21 Your device
indicates the connection i s on hold and that a connection is available . The icons indicate t hat EGPRS is available in the ne t w o r k , b u t y o u r d e v i c e i s not necessa rily using EGPR S in the data tra nsfer. A UMTS packet dat a connection is acti ve (network service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connect i on is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates the connec tion is on hold and that a connection is available. See "Fast downloading," p. 22 . Y o u h a v e s e t t h e d e v i c e to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is ava ilable (network service). See "About WL AN," p. 68 . A wireless LAN connection is active in a network th at has enc ryption. A wireless LAN conn ection is active in a netw ork that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connecti vity is on. See "Bluetooth connectivity," p. 71 . Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the in dicator is blinking, your device is trying to conn e ct with anothe r device. A USB connec tion is active. Fast downloading High-speed downlin k packet ac cess (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that sup ports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser pages through the cell ular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connect ion is indicated by . See "Display indicators," p. 21 . You can acti vate or deactiv ate support f or HSDPA in the device settings. See "Packet data settings," p. 150 . For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the do wnload speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. Lock the keypad To lock the keys, p ress th e left select ion key, then * . To unlock the keys, press the left selection key, then * . 22 Your device
You can select t o lock the keypad au tomatically after a time-out. See "Security settings," p. 142 . Shortcuts When in th e menus, instea d of using the scrol l key, you can use the number ke ys, # , and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 2 t o o pe n M es s ag in g , or # to open th e application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. To switch between open applications, press and hold . Leaving applications running in the background increases th e demand on battery power and reduces the batter y life. To open Gallery , press once. To open the mu ltimedia menu to view th e multimed ia conten t you have use d most freque ntly in your device, press the mult imedia key. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to view the most used option items, press the scroll key. To change the p rofile, press the power key, and select a profile. To switch betw een the General and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and hold # . If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches betw een the two lines. To call your v oice mailbox (netw ork service), in th e standby mode, press and hold 1 . To open the last dialled numbers list, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in th e standby mode, pr ess and hold the right selection key. Multimedia menu With the multimedia menu , you can view your most frequently used multime dia content. The selected content is shown in th e appropriate application. 1. To open or close the multimedia menu, pre ss the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right. 23 Your device
The tiles are t he following: â Music â E n t e r M u s i c player and the Now playing view, browse your songs and play lists, or download and manage podcasts. â Galler y â View your last taken picture, start a slide show of your images, or view me dia files in albums. â Games â Tr y out N-Gage game s. â Maps â View your fa vourite lo cations in t he Maps applicat ion. â Interne t â View your favourite web links in the browser. â Contacts â Add your own contacts, send messages, or make voic e calls. To add a new contact to an empty positio n on the list, pre ss the scroll key, and select a contact. To se nd a message, in the multimedia menu, select a contact, and Send text me ssage or Send multimedia msg. . 3. To scroll up or down in a tile, press the scroll key up or down. To select items, press the scroll key. To change the ord er of the tiles, se lect Options > Arrange tile s . To return to the multimedia menu from an open applica tion, press the multimedia key. Mobile Search Press , and select Search . Use Mobile Search to get access to search engines and find and connect to local services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can also search content in your devi ce, such as cale ndar entries, e- mail, and other messages. Web se arch (network s ervice) 1. In the main vi ew, select Search the Internet . 2. Select a sear ch engine. 3. Enter your te xt to search. My content search To search content in your device, in the main view, enter your tex t into the search field. The search results are displayed on th e screen as you write. Games You can pl ay high-quali ty multiplayer N-Ga ge⢠game s with your de vice. 24 Your device
Your device inclu des either one of the follow ing applications in th e main menu: â Discover N-Gage application â W ith this preview application you can get information about the upcoming N-Gage gamin g experience, try out game demos, and downlo ad and install the full N-Gage applica tion when it becomes available. â N-Gage application â The full featured applica tion gives you ac cess to th e complete N- Gage experience replac ing the Discover N-Gage application in the menu. You can find new games, try and buy games, find other players, and access scores, events, chat, and more. Some features may not be av ailable at the time of software installation on your device, check www.n-gage.com for software u pdates. For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, ei ther through the ce llular network or wireless LAN. Contact your service provider for more information on data services. For more information, visit www.n-gage.com . Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need to sel ect the cabl e mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to he ar outside sou nds may be aff ected. Do not use the headset where it can enda nger your safety. S o m e h e a d s e t s c o m e i n t w o p a r t s , a remote control unit and headphones. A remote control unit has a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. T o use the headph ones with a remote control unit, connect th e unit to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) in t he device, then connect the headphones to the unit. If a headset does not inclu de a microphone, for handsfree phone ca lls, use such a headset with a compatible remote cont rol unit or the microphone of the de vice. When using certain headset enh ancements, t o adjust the volume during a call, use the vol ume key in the device. Some headset e nhancements have multimedia volume cont rols that are used to adjust the volume only for mu sic or video playback. You can also connect a co mpatible TV-out cable to the Nokia AV Connector (3 .5 mm) of your device. 25 Your device
Do not conn ect products that c reate an ou tput signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connec tor. When connec ting any ex ternal dev ice or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device , to the Nokia AV Conn ector, pay special attent ion to v olume l evels. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decre ase the volume lev el when you have an active call or are listeni ng to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning : Do not hold t he device near your ear when the loud speaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker d uring a call, sele ct Options > Ac tivate loudspeaker . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activ ate h andse t . Offline profile To activate the off line profile, press t he power key briefly, and select Offline . Or, press , and select Tools > Profi les > Offline . The off line profi le lets yo u use the device wi thout connecting to the wire less network. When you activa te the o ffline profile, th e connecti on to the wireless network i s turned o ff, as indica ted by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are p laced in t he o utbox to be sent later. When the offlin e profile is active, you can us e your device without a SIM card. Important: In the offline pro file you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergenc y number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the p hone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock code. When you have activate d the offline profile, you c an still use the wireless L AN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on th e internet. R emember to comply with any applicab le safety requirem ents when establishing and using a wireless L AN 26 Your device
connection. Y ou can also use Bluetooth conne ctivity while in the offline profil e. To leave t he offline profile, press the pow er key briefly, and select anothe r profile. The d evice re- enables wireless transmission s (providing there is sufficient signal streng th). 27 Your device
Camera About the camera Your Nokia N82 has two cameras, a h igh resolution camera on the back of the device (the main came ra, up to 5 megapixels, in la ndscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on th e front (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixel s. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are automatically saved in Images & videos in Gallery. The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP fi le format with the .3gp file extension (shari ng quality ). See "Video settings," p. 38 . You can send images and vi deo clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta chment, or by using othe r connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or wireless L AN connection. You ca n also upload them to a co mpatib le onli ne al bum. See "Share i mages a nd vide os online ," p. 46 . Image capture To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the c amera activation switch. To activ ate the ma in camera when the lens cove r is already open, press and hold t he capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfind er displays the following: 28 Camera
1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during image capture. See "Act ive toolbar," p. 29 . 3 â Battery cha rge level indica tor 4 â Image resolution indicator, which indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 5M - Large , Print 3M - Mediu m , Print 2M - Med ium , E- mail 0.8M - Med. , or MMS 0.3M - Small . The quality of a digitally zoom ed picture is lower th an that of an unzoomed picture . 5 â Image counter, whic h displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the curren t image quality setting an d memory in use. The counter is not displa yed during image capture. 6 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are saved 7 â Xenon flash indicator, which is shown blinki ng only when the xenon fl ash is charging Active toolbar The activ e toolbar prov ides you w ith shortcu ts to different items and sett ings before and after taking a picture or recording a vide o. S crol l to i tems , an d select them by pressing th e scroll key. You can also define when t he active too lbar is visible on the displa y. The settings in th e active toolbar retu rn to the default settings afte r you close the camera. To view th e active toolbar before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Option s > Show icon s . To view the act ive toolbar on ly when you need it, select Options > Hide i cons . Only the capture mode and battery level indicators are shown on the display. To ac tivate the ac tive too lbar, press the scroll key. The toolbar is visi ble for 5 seconds. Before takin g a picture or recording a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following: to switch between th e video and image modes to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (images onl y) See "You in the pictu reâÂÂself-t imer," p. 33 . to activate t he sequence mode (images on ly) See "Take pi ctures in a sequence," p. 32 . 29 Camera
to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposu re compensation (images only) to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons change to reflec t the current status of the setting. The available options va ry depending on the capture mode and view you are in. See "After taking a pictur e," p. 31 . See "After recording a video," p. 36 . The active to olbar in Gallery has different options. See "Act ive toolbar," p. 41 . Take pictures Before taking a picture , note the following: â You cannot take pictures until the xenon flash is fully charged, unless you have set the flash to Off . When the flash is charging, blinks on the display. Charging th e xenon flash usually ta kes a couple of seconds. â To make l ighting and colour adjustment s, use the scroll ke y to scroll through the active toolba r. See "Setup settingsâÂÂadjust colour and lighting," p. 37 . Saving th e captured image may take longer if you ch ange the zoom , lighting, or colour settings. â To free memory for new pictures, transfer file s to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and delete the files from your device . The devi ce inform s you when the memory is full, and asks whether y ou want to change the mem ory in use . When taking a pictu re, note the following: â Use both hand s to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoome d picture. â The camera goes int o the battery sav ing mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue ta king pictures, press the capture key. To take a picture , do the follo wing: 1. If the camera is in th e video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 30 Camera
2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key hal fway down ( main camer a only, not available in landscape and sports scenes). The green locked fo cus indicat or appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red focus indi cator appears. Release the capture key , and press it halfway down again. You can, however, take the picture without locking the foc us. 3. To take a picture, pre ss the captu re key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. To zoom in or out when taking a picture, use the zoom key in your dev ice. Tip: To open Gallery and view the pictur es you have taken, press on the side of your device twice. To activate the front ca mera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To ta ke a picture, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. To leave t he camera open in the bac kground and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and ho ld the cap ture key. After taking a picture Select the followin g from th e active tool bar (available only if you select Show capture d image > On in t he sti ll im age came ra set tings) : â If you do not wan t to keep t he image, select Delete ( ). â To send the image usin g a multimedia message, e-mail, or other conn ec tion methods, such as Bluetooth conne ctivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and se nd messages," p. 102 . This option is not available during an active call. You can also send t he image to a call recip ient during an active call. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during an active call). â To tag images to the print basket for later printing, sele ct Add to Prin t basket ( ). â To send the image to a compatible online album, select (available only if you have set up an accoun t for a compat ible online album ). See "Share images and videos online," p. 46 . To zoom in an image after taking it, press to open the im age in Gallery, and selec t the zoomin g option from the opt ions list. To use the image as wallpaper in th e active standby , select Options > Set as wallp aper . 31 Camera
To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Options > Set as contac t call img. > Assign to contact . To return to the vi ewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available only in th e main camera. Keep a safe distance wh en using the flash . Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover t he flash while taki ng a picture. The camera of your device has a xenon flash for lo w light conditions. The xenon flash is not availabl e in the sports scene and se quence mode. You cannot take pict ures if the xenon flas h is not fully charged, unless you have set the flash to Off . When the flash is charging, b l i n k s o n t h e d i s p l a y . Charging the xenon flash usua lly takes a couple of seconds. The following flash modes ar e available for the still image camera: Automati c ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Off ( ). To change the flash mode, in t he active toolb ar, select the desi red flash mode. Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene he lps you t o find the ri ght col our and lighting settings for the current environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environme nt. The default scene in t he image mode is Auto , a nd in the video mode Automati c (both indicated with ). To change the sc ene, in the act ive toolbar, select Scene modes and a scene. To make your o wn scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . In the u ser defined scene you can adjust different lig hting and colour settings. To c o p y t h e s e t t i n g s o f another scene, selec t Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, sc roll to User defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To set the camera to take six pictures or the desired number of pictures in sequence (if enough memory is available), in the active tool bar, select Sequen ce mode . To take six pictures, select Burst . To ca pture the pictures, press t he capture ke y. 32 Camera
To take two or more pict ures in a sequence, select the desired time in terval. To capture pictures usi ng the selected time interval , press the capture ke y. To stop taking pict ures, select Cancel . The number of pictures taken depe nds on the available memory. After you take the p ictures in t he burst mode, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press the scroll key to open it. If you used a time interval, only the last taken picture is shown on the display. You can view th e other pictures in Im ages & videos in Galler y. You can also use the seque nce mode with the self- timer. To return to th e sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. To switch off the sequen ce mode, in the acti ve toolbar, select Sequence mode > Single shot . You in th e pictureâÂÂs elf-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer t o delay the capture so t hat you can incl ude yours elf in the pic ture. To set the self-timer d elay, in the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-time r, select Acti vate . The device beeps when the ti mer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the image captu re. The camera take s the pictu re after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip: In the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand st eady when taking a picture . Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the app ropriate pic ture qualit y. The camera ha s several picture q uality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality availa ble. Note however, that better picture quality requires more storage space . For multimedia message (MMS) and e-ma il attachments it may be necessary to use the smallest picture quality mode op timised for MMS sendin g. You can define the qua lity in the camera settings. See "Still image camera settings," p. 36 . Background Use a simple backgrou nd. For portraits and other pictures with pe ople, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttere d, comple x background that may distract at tention from th e subject. Move the camera, or th e subject, when these co nditions 33 Camera
cannot be met. Mo ve the camera c loser to t he object to take clearer portraits. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your p ictures by placing objects in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close t o the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting cond itions Changing the source, amoun t , and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical ligh ting condit ions: â Light source behind the subject. Av oid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind th e subject or visib le in the display, the resultin g picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted li ght effec ts. â Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dra matic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. â Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause th e subjects to squint the ir eyes. The contrast may also be too high. â Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the c amera activation switch. To activ ate the ma in camera when the lens cove r is already open, press and hold t he capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Audio mute on indicator 3 â Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during recording. See "Act ive toolbar," p. 29 . 4 â The battery charge level indicator 5 â Video quality indicato r that indicates whether the quality of the vide o is TV high quality , TV 34 Camera
normal quality , E-mail high quality , E- mail norm. quality , or Sharing quality 6 â The video clip file t ype 7 â Total available v ideo recording ti me. When you are re cordi ng, t he curre nt video length indicat or also shows the elapsed ti me and time remaining. 8 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators that show where videos are saved 9 â The video stabilisation is turned on ( ). See "Vid eo settin gs," p. 38 . To display all viewfind er indicators, sele ct Option s > Show icons . Select Hide icons to display o nly the vi deo stat us indicators, and during the recording, the available record time, zoom bar when zooming, and the select ion keys. Record vide os Before recording a vide o, note the following: â To make lighting and co lour adjustments, scroll through the active toolbar. See "Setup settin gsâ adjust colour and lighting," p. 37 . See "Scene s," p. 32 . â To free memory for new video clips, transfer files to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and remov e the files from your devic e. The de vice inform s you when the memory is full, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. To record a video, do the following: 1. If the camera is in the image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2. To start recording, press th e capture key. The re d record icon ( ) is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has st arted. 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Video recording automatica lly stops if recording is set to pause and t here are no keypresses within a minute. Sel ect Contin ue to resume recording. To zoom i n or out of the subject, use t he zoom key in your device . 4. To stop record ing, select Stop . The video cl ip is automatically saved to the Images & videos folder of Gallery. T he maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To activate the front c amera, select Options > Use second ary came ra . To start recording a video, press the scroll key. T o zoom in or out, scroll up or down . 35 Camera
After record ing a video After you record a video cl ip, select the fo llowing from the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video sett ings): â To immediately play the video cl ip you just recorded, select Play ( ). â If you do not w ant to ke ep the v ideo, select Delete ( ). â To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e-mail, or other connection methods, such as Blue tooth connectivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and send messages," p. 102 . See "S end data using Bluetooth conne ctivity," p. 72 . This option is not available during an active call. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during an active call). â To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select (only availa ble if you have set u p an account for a compat ible online album). See "Share images and videos online," p. 46 . â To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the captur e key. Camera settings There are two kinds o f settings for th e camera: setup settings and main se ttin gs. The setup settings return to the def ault settings afte r you close t he camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them agai n. To adjust the setup settings, use the opt ions in the active toolbar. See "Setup settings âÂÂadju st colou r and lighting," p. 37 . To chan ge the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options > Settings . Still image ca mera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select Options > Se tti ngs and from the following: â Image quality â Select Print 5M - Large (2592x1944 resol ution), Print 3M - Medium (2048x1536 resol ution), Print 2M - Medium (1600x1200 resol ution), E-mail 0.8M - Med. (1024x768 reso lution), or MMS 0.3M - Small (640x480 resolution). The better the image quality, the more memory the imag e consumes. If you want to prin t the image, select Print 5M - Large , Print 3M - Medi um , or Print 2M - Medium . If you want to send it using e-mail, select E-mail 0.8M - Med. . To send the image using a multimedia message, select MMS 0.3M - Small . 36 Camera
These resolutions are only available in the main camera. â Add to album â Select whether you want to save t he image to a cer tain albu m in Gall ery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. â Show captured image â Select On if y ou wa nt to see the capt ured image af ter it is taken or Off if you want to continu e taking pictures immediately. â Default image name â Define the default name for the ca ptured images . â Extended digital zoom (main camera only) â On (con tinuous) allows the zoom incremen ts to be smooth and contin uous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom incremen ts to pause at the digit al and extended digital step poin t, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolut ion. â Capture tone â Se lect the t one you want to hear when you take a picture . â Memory i n use â Select where you want to store your images. â Rotate image â Select whether you want images that are captured w hen the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Gallery. â Restore came ra settings â S e l e c t Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. Setup s ettingsâÂÂa djust colo ur and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colours and lighting more accurately or to add effects to your pictures or v ideos, scroll through the activ e toolbar, and select from t h e following options: â Flash mode ( ) (images only) â Select the desired flash mode. â Colour tone ( ) â Select a colo ur effect from the list. â White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting conditi on from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Exposure co mpensation ( ) (images only) â If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to c ompensate the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. â Sharpn ess ( ) (images only) â Adjust the sharpness of the image. â Cont rast ( ) (images only) â Adju st the difference betwee n the lightest and darkest parts of the image. â Light se nsitivity ( ) (images only) â Increase the light sensitivity in low light con ditions to decrease the risk of images that are too dark. 37 Camera
The screen display change s to match any setting s you make so that you see how the ch ange affects the pictures or videos. The available settings vary dependin g on the selected camera. The setup settings are ca mera specific; if you change the settings in the secondary ca mera, the settings in the main camera do not chang e. The setup settings are also shooting mode specific; if you change the settings in the image mode, the settings in the video mode do not change. Switching be tween the m odes does not reset the defined setup settings. The setu p settings ret urn to the defaul t settings when you cl ose the came ra. If you sele ct a new scene, the colou r and lighting settings are replaced by the selected sc ene. You can change the setup settings after sel ecting a scene if needed. Video setting s To change the main sett ings, in the video mode, select Options > Se tti ngs and from the following: â Video quality â S et the quality of the video clip to TV high quality , TV normal quality, E-mail high quality , E-mail norm. qua lity (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing quality . If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select TV high quality or TV normal quality , which have VGA resolution (640x480) and the .mp4 file format. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a mul timedia message. To send the video clip using a multimedia message, select Sharing quality , which has QCIF resolution and the .3gp file format. â Video stabilisation â Select On to reduce camera shaking when recording the video. â Audio recording â Select Mute if you do not want to record sound. â Add to a lbum â Select whethe r you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery. Select Yes to open a list of available albums. â Show captured video â Select whether you want the first frame of the recorded video clip to be displayed after the recording stops. Select Play from the active to olbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the video clip. â Default video na me â Define the default name for the captured video clips. â Memory in use â Select where you want to store your videos. â Restore cam era settings â Select Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. 38 Camera
Gallery To store and organise yo ur images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) devices through wireless LAN (WLAN), press , and select Galler y . Tip: If you are in another application, to view the last saved picture in Gallery , press on the side of your devi ce. To enter t he Images & vide os f o l d e r m a i n v i e w , p r e s s t h e review key again. View and organise f iles Press , an d sele ct Gallery . In Gallery, select Images & videos , Tracks , Sound clips , Streaming links , Presentations , or All files , and press the scroll key to open it. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You can also create albums and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See "Albums," p. 41 . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, press th e scroll key. Video clips, .ra m files, and streaming links open and play in RealPlayer, and music and sound clips in Music player. See "RealPlayer ," p. 90 . See "Music player," p. 79 . To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Option s > Move and copy > Copy to memory card or Move to memory card , or Copy to phon e mem. or Move to phone mem. . 39 Gallery
Images and video clips View images and videos To view your images and vide o clips, press , and select Gallery > Images & videos . Pictures taken and video clips recorded with t he camera of your device are store d in Images & videos . Images and video clips can al so be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachmen t, or through Bluetoot h connectivity. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Galler y or in the R ealPlaye r, you must fi rst save it. The video clips saved in No kia Video Centre are n ot shown in Images & videos in Gallery. See "Nokia Video Centre," p. 76 . The images and video clip files in Images & vide os are in a loop and ordered by date and t ime. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or do wn. To open a file, press the sc roll key. When an image is opened, to z oom in the image, pr ess the zoom key on the side of y our device. The zooming ratio is not stored perman ently. If you want the display to be automatically rotated based on the orie ntation of th e device, set the display rotation on in the settings. See "Personalisation settings," p. 140 . To edit a video clip or a photo, select Op tions > Edit . See "Edit images," p. 42 . To print your images on a compatible printer, or to store them on a compatible memory card (if inserted) for printing, select Option s > Print . See "Image p rint," p. 45 . You can also tag images for later printing to the print basket in Galle ry. See "Print b a sket," p. 42 . Organise images and videos To add an image or a video clip to an album in Gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . See "Albums," p. 41 . To tag an image for later printing , selec t the imag e and Add to Print bas ket from th e active tool bar. See "Print bask et," p. 42 . To use the picture as a back ground image, select the picture and Op tions > Use image > Set as wallpap er . To delete an image or video clip, select Options > Delete . 40 Gallery
Some of the options may al so be available through the active toolba r (available whe n you open an image or a video clip). See "Active toolbar," p. 41 . Active toolbar In the Images & vide os folder, you can use the active toolbar as a shortcut to different tasks. The active toolbar is availa ble only wh en you h ave selected an image or a video clip. In the activ e toolbar, scro ll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. The settings in the active toolbar return to the default settings afte r you close the camera. If you want the ac tive toolbar to alw ays be visible on the display, select Options > Show icon s . To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the activ e toolbar, press the scroll key. Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the sele cted image or vide o clip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (o nly available if you have set up an account for a co mpatible online album). See "Share images and videos online," p. 46 . or t o a d d o r r em o ve a n im a ge fr om t he pr in t bask et. See "Print basket," p. 42 . to print the view ed image to start a slide show of your images to delete the selec ted image or vi deo clip The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Albums With albums, you can convenient ly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list in Gallery, select Image s & videos > Options > Albums > View albums . To create a new album, in the albums list view, select Options > New album . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in Gallery, scroll to a pictur e or v ideo clip, and select Option s > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the alb um to which y ou want to add the picture or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Images & videos in Gallery. To remove a file from an album, open the album, scroll to the file, and press C . The file is not deleted from Images & videos in Gallery. 41 Gallery
Print b asket You can tag images to the print basket, and print them later with a compat ible printer or in a compatible printing kiosk, if available. See "Image print," p. 45 . The tagged images are indicated with in Images & videos a nd albums. To tag an image for later printing, select an image, and Add to Print bas ket from the active too lbar. To view the images in the print b asket, select from Images & videos (available on ly when you have added pictures to the prin t basket), or Options > Print > View Print basket . To remove an image from the print basket, select an image in Images & videos or in an album, and Options > Remo ve from basket . Slide show To view your images as a slide show, select an image in Gallery, and Start slide show ( ) in the active toolbar. The slide show starts from th e selected file. To view only the select ed images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images, and Options > Slide show > Start to start the slide show. Select from the following: â Pause â to pause the slide show â Continue â to resume the slide show, if paused â End â to clo se the slide show To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting the slide show, adjust th e slide show settings. Select Opt ions > Sl ide sho w > Settings , and from t he following: â Music â to add sound to the slide show. Select On or Off . â Song â to select a musi c file from the list â Delay between slides â to adjust the tempo of the slide show â Zoom and pan â to make th e slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let Gallery randomly zoo m in and out in the images To decrease or increase the volume during the slide show, use the volume key in your device. Edit images Image edit or To edit the pict ures after taking them or th e ones alread y saved in Gallery, se lect Options > Edit . The image editor opens. Select Options > Apply eff e ct to open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons. You can crop and rotate 42 Gallery
the image; adjust th e brigh tness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effect s, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop , and a predefi ned aspect ratio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appear s in the upper left corner of t h e image. Use t he scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Anothe r cross appears in the lo wer right corner. Again select the a r e a t o b e c r o p p e d . T o a d j u s t t h e f i r s t s e l e c t e d a r e a , select Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefin ed aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press the scro ll ke y. T o move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-ey e in an image, select Op tions > Apply e ffect > Red eye r eduction . Move the cro ss onto the ey e, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the e ye, use the sc roll key. To reduce the redness, press the scro ll key. When you finish editing the image, press Do ne . To save the changes, and return to Images & videos , press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the followi ng shortcuts when editing images: â To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, p ress * again. â To rota te an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . â To zoom in or out , press 5 or 0 . â To move on a zoomed image, scroll up , down, left, or right. Edit videos To edit video clips in Gall ery, scroll t o a video clip, and select Options > Edit and an editing option. The video edit or supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not ne ce ssarily support all fea tures of a file format or all the variations of file format s. 43 Gallery
TV-out mode To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivi ty Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure th e TV-out setti ngs for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See "Enhancement settings," p. 141 . To watch images and video clips on TV, do the following: 1. Connect a Nokia Video Conn ectivity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2. Connect t he other en d of the Nok ia Video Connectivity Cable t o the Nokia AV Connec tor of your device. 3. You may ne ed to select th e cable mode. 4. Press , and select Ga llery > Images & videos and the f ile you want to view. The images are shown in the image vi ewer, and t he vide o clips are played in RealPlayer. All audio, includin g the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed t o the TV w hen the No kia Video Connectivity Cable is connecte d to the device. You can use th e device microphone normally. For all applications other than the Images & videos folder in Gallery and RealPlayer, the TV screen displays what i s displayed on th e screen of your device. The opened image is displayed in full- screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on th e TV, zooming in is not availa ble. When you open a highl ighted video clip, RealPla yer starts playing the video clip on the device display and the TV screen. See "RealPlayer , " p. 90 . You can view images as a slide show on T V. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full-scree n while th e selected m usic plays. See "Slide show ," p. 42 . Presentations With pres entations, y ou can view SVG (scalable vector gr aphics) file s, such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain th eir appearanc e when printed or viewed with different screen siz es and resolutions. To view SVG files, press , and select Gallery > Presentations . Scroll to an image, and select 44 Gallery
Option s > Play . To pause playing, select Option s > Paus e . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, pr ess 7 or 9 . To switch between full an d normal screen, press * . Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to pr int, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivity. You ca n also print images usin g wireless LAN. If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compatible printer. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures t aken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, o r image vi ewer. When you use Image print fo r the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you select the image. Selec t a printer. The printer is set as the default printe r. To print to a printer comp atible with PictBridge, connect t he comp atible data cable before you select the print option, and ch eck that the data c able mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See "USB," p. 74 . The printer is automatically displayed when you select the print option. If the default pr inter is not available , a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change th e default printer , select Options > Setti ngs > Default printer . Print preview After you selec t the printer, th e selected images are displayed usin g predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the selec t ed printer. If the images do not fit o n a single page, scroll up or down to di splay the additional pag es. 45 Gallery
Print settings The available options va ry depending on the capabilities of the printing de vice you selected. To set a defa ult printer, sele ct Options > Default printer . To select the pa per size, select Paper size , th e siz e of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the pr evious view. Print on line With Print online , you can order prints of images o n l i n e d i r e c t l y t o y o u r h o m e o r t o a s t o r e w h e r e y o u can pick them up. You can also orde r different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online, you mu st have at least one printing service configuration file instal led. The files can be obtained from printing service providers that support Print online . For more information on the application, see the guides available at the No kia pro duct support pages or your local N okia websit e. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing service s on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the cont ent of the albums. The supported co ntent types may vary depending on the service provider. Before sharing images and videos online, you must subscribe to the service with an onlin e image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usual ly subscribe to th e service on the web page of the service p rovid er. Contact your service provider for details on su bscribing to the service. To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, press , and s elect Gallery > Images & videos . Scroll to the de sire d file, and select Options > Send > Post to web , or select the file and from the active toolbar. For more information on the application and compatible service provid ers, see the Nokia product support pag es or your lo cal Nokia websit e. 46 Gallery
Home network About home network Your device is compatib le with Uni versal Plug and Play architecture (UPnP). Usin g a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router, you can creat e a home network and connec t compat ible UPnP devices th at support WLAN to t he network, such as your device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or TV, or a sound system or TV equi pped with a compatible wireless multimed ia receiver . To use the W LAN function of your de vice in a home network, you mu st have a working WLAN home connection set up and have other UPnP enabled home devices to connect to th e same home network. See "Wireless LAN, " p. 68 . The home ne twork uses t he security sett ings of the WLAN connection . Use the home ne twork feature in a WLAN infrastructure networ k with a WLAN ac cess point device and encryption enabled. You can share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices using th e home network. To manage your home netw ork settin gs, pres s , and select Tools > Connectivit y > Home media . You can also u se the home ne twork to view, play , copy , or pr int c ompatible medi a file s from Gallery. See "View and share media files," p. 49 . Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection request from another compatible device, o r in Ga llery, sele ct the option to view, pla y, print, or co py media files on your device or search for other devi ces in the Home network folder. Important security information When you configure you r WLAN home network, enable an encryption meth od on yo ur access point device, then on the othe r de vices you intend to connect to your home ne twork. Refer to the documentatio n of the device s. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. You can view or change th e settings of the WLAN internet access poin t in your device. See "Acc ess points," p. 148 . If you use the ad hoc operati ng mode to create a home network with a co mpatible device, enable one of the encryption met hods in WLAN security mode when you c onfigure the internet access point. See "Conne ction settin gs," p. 147 . This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party join ing the ad hoc network. Your device noti fies you if another device a ttempts to connect t o it and the home network. Do n ot accept connection requests from an unknown device . 47 Gallery
If you use WLAN in a network that does not have encryption, switch off sha r ing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See "Settings for home network," p. 48 . Settings for home network To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through WLAN, you must create and configure your WLAN home interne t access point, then configure the settings for home network in the Home media application. See "WLAN interne t access poi nts," p. 69 . See "Connection sett ings," p. 147 . The options related t o home network ar e not available in applica tions before the settings in the Home media appl ication have been configured. When you ac cess the Home media application for the first ti me, the setu p wizard open s and helps you define the home network se ttings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the Home media main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a c ompatible PC to the home netwo rk, on the PC, you must instal l th e related sof tware. You get the software from the CD- ROM or DV D-ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device support pages on the Nokia websit e. Config ure s etting s To configure the settings for hom e network, select Tools > Co nnectivity > Home media > Settings and from the following: â Home access point â Sele ct Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access po int every time y ou connect to the home netw ork, Create new to define a new ac cess point that is used automatically w hen you use the h ome network, or None . If your home network does not have WLAN security se ttings enab led, you ge t a security warning. You can continu e and switch the WLAN security on late r; or cancel defining th e access point and first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points," p. 14 8 . â Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to th e other com p atible devices in the home netw ork. â Copy to â Select the memory where y ou want to save copied media files. Set sharing on and define content Select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Share content and from the following: â Content sh aring â Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devi ces. Do not set content sharing on before yo u have configu red all the other settings. If you set content sharing on , the 48 Gallery
other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view and cop y your fil es you have selected for sharing in the Images & videos folder. If you do not want the othe r devices to access your files, set content sharing off. â Images & video â Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status of images and videos. To up date the conten t of the folder, sele ct Option s > Refre sh cont ent . â Music â Sel ect playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing content of playlists. To update the content of the folder, sele ct Options > Refresh co ntent . View and share media files To share your media files with other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set content sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content, " p. 48 . If content sha ring is off in you r device, you can st ill view and copy the media files stored in anothe r home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show med ia files s tored in you r device To show your images, videos, and sound clips in another home network de vice, such as a compa tible TV, do the fo llowing: 1. In Gallery, select an imag e, video clip, or sound clip, and Options > Show via ho me network . 2. Select a compatibl e device in whi ch the medi a file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your device, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other devic e. 3. To stop sharing, select Opt ions > Stop showing . Show media fi les store d in the ot her device To show media files that are stored on another home network device in your device (or in a compatible TV, for example), do the following: 1. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Browse hom e . Your device starts the search of other compatible devices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a device from the list. 3. Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of t he other device. To search files with di fferent criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > Sort by . 4. Select the media file or folder you want to view. 49 Gallery
5. Press the scroll key, and select Play or Show , and On device or Via home ne twork . 6. Select the device in which the fil e is shown. T o a d j u s t t h e v o l u m e w h e n playing a video or sound clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Stop (available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print images sa ved in Gallery through a home network with a UPnP compatible printer. See "Imag e print, " p. 45 . Content sharing doe s not have to be switched on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your dev ice to anothe r compati ble de vice, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options > Move and co py > Copy to home ne twork or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on . To copy or transfer files from the other device to your devi ce, select a file in the other device and the desired copying option from the op tions list. Content sharin g does not have to be swit ched on. 50 Gallery
Positioning (GPS) About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that includes 24 satellites and their ground stations that monitor the operation of the satellit es. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio sig nals from the satellites an d measures th e travel time of the signal s. From the trav el time, the GPS receive r can calcula te its location to the accura cy of me ters. The coordinate s in the GPS are exp ressed in degree s and decima l degre es format u sing the inte rnationa l WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positi oning Syst em (GPS) is operated by the governme nt of the U nited States, whi ch is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affec ted by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United St ates Department o f Defense civ il GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be a ffec ted by you r lo cation, buildings, natural obstacles, and we ather con ditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoo rs to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise loc ation measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the G PS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigat ion. Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS). Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is us ed to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection, which assists in calculating t he coordinat es of your curre nt location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. A-GPS is a network service. Your device is preconfigu re d to use the Noki a A-GPS service, if no service prov ider specific A-GPS settings are available. The assi stance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service serv er only when needed. You must have a packet data internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS servic e. To define an access point for A-GPS , press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > General > Positioning > Positio ning ser ver > Access point . A wireless LAN 51 Positioning (GPS)
access point cannot be used for this service. The packet data internet acc e ss point is asked wh en GPS is used for the first time in your devic e. To enable or disable diffe rent positioning methods, such as Bl uetooth GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Positi oning > Position ing meth ods . GPS receiver The GPS receiv er is located in th e top of the devic e. When using th e receiver, fr om an upright position, move the device to an angle of ab out 45 degrees, with an unobstru cted view of the sky. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minut es. Establishing a GPS connection in the car may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. About satellite signals If your device cannot find the satel lite signal, consider the following: â If you are indoors, go outdoors to receiv e a better signal. â If you are outdoors, move to a more op en space. â Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. See "GPS receiver," p. 52 . â If the weather conditions are bad, the sign al strength may be affected. â If the power saver turns on while the device is attempting to esta blish a GPS connec tion, the attempt is interrupted. â Establishing a GPS connectio n may take f rom a couple of seconds to several minutes. Satellite status To check how many sate llit es your devi ce has found, and whether your de vice is receiving sa tellite signals, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS data > Position > 52 Positioning (GPS)
Option s > Satellite status . Or, in the Maps application, select Options > Map options > Satellite info . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the sate llite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calculate th e coordina tes of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. Wh en the init ial calcul ation has been made, it may be possible to continue ca lculating the coordinates of y our location wit h three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive y our position information. Service providers may offe r information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your device. When you receiv e a position request , a message is displayed showing the service that is making th e request. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Rej ect to deny the request. Maps About Maps Press , an d sel ect Maps . With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for diffe rent cities and coun tries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one location t o another, and save locations as landmarks and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides and a turn-by-tu rn navigation serv ice with voic e guidance. Maps uses GPS. You can define the positioning methods used with your device in th e device 53 Positioning (GPS)
settings. See "Positioning settings," p. 144 . For the most accurate location inform ation, use either th e internal GPS or a compatib le external GPS receiver. When you use Maps for the first time , you may need to define an internet access point for down loading map information for your current l ocation. To change the default acce ss point later, select Options > Settings > Network > Default access point . Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography provided fo r use in this device. Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Tip: You can al so download m aps by us ing a wireless LAN connecti on or through the internet using Nok ia Map Loader PC software. See "Download maps," p. 55 . To receiv e a note wh en yo ur device registers to a network out side your h ome cellular network, select Options > Settings > Network > Roa ming warni ng > On . Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. Browse maps The map coverage varies by country. When you open t h e Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location tha t was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application zooms in to the capital city of the country you ar e in based on the information the device re ceives from the cel lular network. At the same t i me, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not b een downloaded during previous sessions. To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select Opti ons > Find place > GPS position [ 0 ] , or press 0 A GPS indicator is shown on the display when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connec tion, the c ircles are ye llow. When the devic e receives enou gh data fro m the satellites to calculate the coordinates of you r current location, the circle s turn green. To view information about satellit es when you are using Ma ps, sele ct Op tions > Map options > Satellite in fo . Your current lo cation is indicated on the map with . 54 Positioning (GPS)
To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. To zoom in or out, press * or # . To switch be tween the 2D and 3D views, select Option s > Map option s > 2D/3D . To find a location, select Option s > Find place . You can choose to go to your GPS position, find an address, find a point of interest by entering a key w ord, find locations nearby, or browse a guide (extra service). To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to plan a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and se lect the desired option. When you browse t he map on the display, for example, move to an other country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service prov ider's network . For more information on data transm ission ch arges, contact your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). To define what kinds of po ints of interest are shown on the ma p, select Options > Map option s > Categories a nd the desired categories. To save a loca tion as a landmark, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select Save > As landmark , enter a name for the landmark, and select th e categories you wan t to includ e it in. To take a screen shot of your location, select Save > As image . The screen shot is saved in Gallery. To send the screen shot, in Gallery, selec t the screen shot, and from the active t oolbar. To view saved landmarks, select Option s > Find place > Landmark . To send a landmark to a compatible dev ice, in the landmarks view, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you send th e landmark in a text message , the information i s converted to plain te xt. To adjust the ne twork, routing, an d general settings, select Option s > Settings . Download maps When you browse t he map on the display, for example, move to anot her country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded 55 Positioning (GPS)
maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve transmission of large amounts of data through your service prov ider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your serv ice provider. You can view the amou nt of transferred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or search for locations online. To prevent the device from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for example, when you are outside your home cellular network, select Options > Settings > Network > Use network > Never . To define how much memory card space yo u want to use for saving maps or voice guidance files, select Options > Settings > Network > Max. memory card use (%) . This option is av ailabl e only when a compatible memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the oldest map data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC softw are. Nokia Map Loader N o k i a M a p L o a d e r i s P C s o f t w a r e t h a t y o u c a n u s e t o download and install maps for different countries from the internet t o your device or a compatible memory card (if inserted). You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn n avigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from the inte rnet at www.nokia.com/map s. Follow the instructio ns on the screen . You must use th e Maps application before using Nokia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history information to ch eck the v ersion of map data to be dow nloade d. After you have inst alled the PC softw are to your PC, to download maps, do the following: 1. Connect your device to the PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Data transfer as the USB conn ection mode. 2. Open Nokia Map Lo ade r your PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the v ersion of map data to be downloaded. 3. Selec t the m aps or v oice guidance files you want, and download and install them to your dev ice. Find a place To view p oints of interest near your current location or other locat ions on the map, select Options > Find place > N earby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select Options > Find place > Keyword search or start 56 Positioning (GPS) on
entering th e first letters o f the name, and select Find . To search for a location by address, select Option s > Find place > By a ddress . You mus t enter the city and country. To use an a ddress you have saved to a conta ct card in Contacts, select Option s > Find place > By address > Opti ons > Select from contacts . To view a search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map . To return to the results list, select Back . To view a list of your previous locations, select Option s > Find place > Recent . Plan a route To plan a route from one location to anothe r (for example, from your home to your office), do the following: 1. Scroll to a point on the map, press the scro ll key, and select Route from . 2. Scroll to From , and selec t Option s > Select and the desired opt ion. To adjust the routing settings, such as the mode of transportation, sele ct Options > Settings > Routing . 3. To select the destin atio n, sc roll to To , and select Option s > Select and the desired option. 4. To view the route it inerary, selec t Options > Show route . The route is calcul ated using the selected routing settings. To view the itin erary route on th e map, selec t Option s > Show on map . To run a simul ation of the route, select Options > Start s imul ation . Tip: You can also use a compatible GPS receiver with Bl uetooth connecti vity with Maps. For example, in a car, an external GPS receiver can b e position ed so that it has a clear view of the sky. E nable the use of an external GPS receiver in positioning settings. See "Positioning settings," p. 144 . Extra services for Maps You can purchase and download different kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for d ifferent cities to your device . You can also purchase a turn- by-turn navigation service with voice guidance to use it in Maps. The downloaded gu ides are automaticall y saved to your devi ce. The licence you p urchase for a guide or navigation is device-specific and cannot be transferred from your devi ce to an other devi ce. 57 Positioning (GPS)
Naviga tion To purchase a navi gation service with voice guidance to use in Maps, sel ect Options > Extra services > Add navigatio n . After purchasing the navig ation upgrade, the service is available through Maps. After creating a route in Maps, to st art navigation to the desired destination with GPS using voice guidance, s elect Options > Start navigation . See "Plan a route," p. 57 . You can also start navigat ion by selecting any location on the map or in a results list, and Navigate to . When you use naviga tion for the first time, you are prompted to select t he language of the voice guidance and download the voice guidance files of the selected lang uage. You can also download v oice guidance files using Nokia Map Loader. See "Download maps," p. 55 . To change the language later, in the Maps main view, select Opti ons > Settings > Gene ral > Voice guidance and a language, and download the voice guidance files for the sel ected language . To discard the c reated route and use anothe r route, select Options > Alternati ve route . To view only the n ext turns and hide the map, select Options > Map options > Ar row mode . To stop navigation, select Option s > Stop navigation . Guides To purchase and downlo ad different kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for different cities to your de vice, se lect Opti ons > Extra services > Guid es . The guides provide inform ation about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and othe r points of interest. The guides must be downloaded and purchased before use. To browse a downloaded guide, on the My guides tab in Guides, select a guide and a subcategory (if availa ble). To download a new guide to your device, in Guides, scroll right to the Nearest guides or All guides tab, select the desired guide, and press Yes . The purchase process starts automatically. Yo u can pay for the guides through a c redit card or have the amount charge d to your ph one bill (if supported by your cellular network service provider). To confirm the purchase, select OK twice. To receive a confirmation of the purchase through e -mail, enter your name and e-ma il address, and select OK . 58 Positioning (GPS)
Landmarks Press , an d sele ct Tools > Connectivity > Landmarks . With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of spec ific locations in your device. You can sort the saved lo cations into differen t categories, such as business, and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved l andmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data and Maps . GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format u sing the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To crea te a new landm ark, select Options > New landmark . To make a positioning request for your current location, se lect C urre nt posit ion . To enter the position informat ion manually, select Enter manually . To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select Options > Edit . Scroll to the d esired field, and enter the information. To view th e landmark on t he map, selec t Options > Show on map . To create a route to t he location, select Options > Navigate using map . You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select Options > Edit c ategories . To add a landmark to a category , scroll to the landmark in La ndmarks, and selec t Option s > Add to categor y . Scroll to each category to which you want to ad d the landmark, an d select it. To send one or several landmarks to a compatible device, select Op tions > Send . Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidan ce information to a selected destina tion, position information about your current location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destin ation and approximate duration of travel. Press , and selec t Tools > Connectivity > GPS data . The coordinate s in the GPS are exp ressed in degre e s and deci mal degre es format using the inte rnational WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS da ta, the GPS receiver o f your device must initially receive posi tion information from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinates of your location. When th e initial calculation has b een 59 Positioning (GPS)
made, it may be possible to continu e calculating the coordinates of your locati on with three satellit es. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Route guidance Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS data > Navigation . Start the route gu idance o u tdoors. If started indoors, the GPS rec eiver may not receive the necessary information from the satell ites. Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approx imate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is desi gned to show the straightest route and the shortest dist ance to th e destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. Difference s in altitude are not taken into account when calculatin g the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your tri p de stination, select Options > Set destinat ion and a landmark as the destination, or enter the l atitude and l on gitude coordinates. Se lect Stop navigat ion to clear the destination se t for your trip. Retrieve position information Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Position . In the posit ion view, you c a n view th e posit ion information of your current location. An estimat e of the accura cy of the lo cation is displa yed. To save your current lo ca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save position . Landmarks are saved locations with more information, and they can be used in other compatib le applica tions and transferred between c o mpatible devices. Trip meter Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Trip distance . Select Options > Start to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Select Reset to set the tri p distance and ti me and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calcul ation. Sel ect Rest art to se t the odomete r and total time to zero. The trip meter has limite d accuracy, an d rounding errors may oc cur. Accura cy can also b e affecte d by availability and quality of GPS signals. 60 Positioning (GPS)
Web browser With the We b browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML ) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hy pertext marku p language (XH TML), or the wireless markup lang uage (WML). If the web page is unreada ble or not supported and garbage code is found w hile browsing, you can try to press , and select Web > Optio ns > Settings > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. To browse the web , you need to have an int e rnet access point configured in your device. Browse the web Press , an d sele ct Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the standby mode. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To browse a web page, in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter t he address in the field ( ), and press the scroll key. Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a pag e, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . To enter a new web page a ddress you want to visi t, select Options > Go to web addr ess . Tip: To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while browsing, p ress 1 , and select a bookmark. 61 Web browser
To retrieve the latest content of t h e page fro m the server, select Option s > Navigation options > Reload . To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select Option s > Save as bookm ark . To use visual hi story to view sna pshots of the pages you have visite d during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History list is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not the first page you vi sit). To go to a prev iously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Option s > Tools > Save page . You can save pages and browse them later when offline. You can also group these saved pages into folders. To access the page s you ha ve save d, sele ct Options > Bo okmar ks > Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or ac tions for the page that is open, select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). To allow or prevent t he automatic ope n ing of multiple windows, select Options > Window > Block pop- ups or Allow pop-up s . Shortcuts while bro wsing â Press 1 to open your bookmarks. â Press 2 to search for keyw ords in the current page. â Press 3 to return to the previous page. â Press 5 to list all ope n windows. â Press 8 to show the page o verview of the c urrent page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. â Press 9 to enter a new web address. â Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings). â Press * and # to zoom in or out on t he page. Tip: To return to the stan dby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return t o the browser, press and hold , and select the browser from the list. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps you select frequent ly used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, pr ess and hold th e scroll key on an empty spot on a web pa ge. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To sele ct a feature, press the scroll key. In the toolbar, select from the followin g: â Frequently used links â V i e w a l i st o f t h e w e b addresses you visit frequently. 62 Web browser
â Page overview â See an overview of the current web page. â Find â Search for keyword s within the current page. â Reload â Refre sh the page. â Subscribe to web feeds (if a vaila ble) â View a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Navigate p ages Mini Map and pag e overview help you na vigate web pages that contain a large amount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the we b page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location, stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and le aves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of informat ion, you can also use Page over view to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press 8 . To find the desired sp ot on the page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 a g a i n t o z o o m i n a n d view the desire d section of th e page. Web feeds and blo gs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are used by the weblog communit y and news organisati ons to share the latest headlines or text, for example, news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and Atom t echnologies. It is common to find web feed s on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a w eb feed, select Option s > Subscr ibe . To view the web feeds to which you have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it and Options > Refresh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Option s > Settings > Web f eeds . 63 Web browser
Content search To search for keywords, phone numbe rs, or e-mail addresses within the cu rrent web page, select Options > Find and the desired optio n. To go to the previous matc h, scroll up. To go to the next match, scroll down. Tip: To sea rch fo r keyw ords w ithin t he pag e, press 2 . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items c an be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective appl icat ions in your device, for example, a downloaded photo or an . mp3 file can be saved in Gallery. Importan t: Only install and use appl ications and other software from trusted sources, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To download an item, do the following: 1. Select the link . 2. Select t he appropriat e option to pu rchase the item (for example, "Buy"). 3. Carefully read all the information provided. 4. To continue or cancel the download, select the appropriate option (for example, "A ccept" or "Cancel"). When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Do wnloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Opti ons to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open t he Web applica tion. You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookma rks in the Auto. bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ). indicates the starting page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the intern et. You can also save addresses received in me ssages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. 64 Web browser
To open the bo okmarks view wh ile browsing, pre ss 1 , or select Options > Bookmarks . To edit the details of a bookmark, such as the tit le, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also ope n other browser folders. The Web application allow s you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content o f the pages you have saved off line. Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. book marks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web feeds , you can vi ew saved lin ks to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organisation web pages, personal weblogs, onli ne communities t hat offer th e la test headlines, and article summaries. W eb feeds use RSS an d Atom technolo gies. Empty the cache The information or servic es you have a ccessed are stored in the cach e memory of the device . A cache is a memory location that is used to store data tem porarily. I f you have tried to a ccess or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after e ach use. Th e information or services you have accessed are stored in the cac he. To empty the c ache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . End the connection To end the conne ction and view t he browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; o r to end the connec tion and close the browser, select Option s > Exit . To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. To delete the in formation th e network serv er collects a bout your vi sits to various web page s, select Options > Clear privacy data > Delete cookie s . Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connecti on, the da ta transmission bet ween the device and the intern et gate way or se rver is encrypted. The security icon does not indic ate that th e data transmission be tween the gateway an d the conten t server (or place where t he requested re source is 65 Web browser
stored) is secure. The serv ice provider secures the data transmission between t he gateway and th e content server. Securi ty certi ficates m a y be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notifi ed if the identit y of the serve r is not authen tic or if you do not have the correct se curity certi ficate in your device. For more informatio n, contact your service provider. Web settings Press , and select Web . Select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: General settings â Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. â Homepage â Define the home page. â Mini map â Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages," p. 63 . â History list â Whi le browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on. â Security warnings â Hide or show security notificatio ns. â Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page sett ings â Load content â Select wh ether you want to load im ages and oth er objects whi le browsing. I f you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, sel ect Options > Tools > Load i mage s . â Screen size â Sele ct betw een full screen and the normal view with the opt ions list. â Default encoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to language for the current page. â Block po p-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop- ups while browsing. â Automatic reload â If you want the web pages to be refreshed automa tically whi le browsing, select On . â Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy se ttings â Auto. bookmarks â Enable or disable automatic bookmark col lecting. If you want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Auto. b ookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmark s view, select Hide folder . â Form data saving â If you do not want the dat a you enter to different fo rms on a web page to be 66 Web browser
saved and used the ne xt time you op en the page , select Off . â Cookies â Enable or disabl e t he receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed se ttings â Automatic upda tes â Define whet her you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often y ou want to update them. Setting t he application to retrieve web feeds automatical ly may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data through your servi ce provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. â Acc. point for auto-upd ate â Select the desired access point for up dating. This option is only available when Automatic updates is on. 67 Web browser
Connections Your device offe rs several options to conn ect to the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (WLAN). With W LAN, you can connect your device to the internet and c ompatible devices that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN . Check w ith your local authorit ies for more in formation. Features that use WLAN, or that ar e allowed t o run in the backg round while usin g other feature s, increase the d emand on battery power and re duce the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard â Operation at 2.4 GHz â Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys u p to 128 bits, W i-Fi pr otected acce ss (WPA), and 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. WLAN connections To use WLAN, you must c reate an int ernet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN. Use the access point for applicat ions that need to co nnect to the internet. See "WLA N interne t access points," p. 69 . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption meth ods to increase the security of your wirele ss LAN connection. Using encryption reduc e s the risk of unauthorized access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection u sing a WLAN internet access point. Th e active WLAN connection ends when you end the data con nection. You can use WL AN during a voice cal l or when packet data is active. You can only be connecte d to one 68 Connections
WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the sa me internet access point. When the device is in th e o ffline profile, you can st ill use WLAN (if av ailable). Remember to comply with any applicable safety re quirements wh en establishing and usi ng a WLAN connection. Tip: To c heck the unique med ia access cont rol (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard he lps you t o connect t o a WLAN and manage your WLAN connecti ons. The WLAN wizard sh ows th e status of your WLAN connections in the active stand by mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displa yed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start Web browsing . If you select a secured WL AN network, you are ask ed to enter the re levant p asscodes. To c onnect to a hidden network, you mu st enter the correct network name (serv ice set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . If you are connec ted to a WLAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing . To end the conn ection in th e WLAN, select t he status and Disconnect WLAN . If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN , WLAN scanni ng off is displayed. To set scanning on and search for availabl e WLANs, select the status and press the scrol l key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, select the st atus and select WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard application in the menu, press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. . WLAN internet access points Press , an d sel ect Tools > WLAN wiz. Select Option s and from the following: â Filter WLAN netw orks â Filter out W LANs in the list of found networks. The select ed networks are filtered out the next time the app lication searches for WLANs. 69 Connections
â Details â View the d etails of a network show n in the list. If you select an act ive connection, the connection details are displayed. â Define access point â Create an internet access point (IA P) in a WLAN. â Edit access point â Edit the details of an existing IAP. You can also us e connection manager to create internet access p oints. See "Active data connections," p. 70 . Operating modes There are two operating mode s in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devi ces are connected to each other through a WLAN access point device, or wireless de vic es are connecte d to a wired LAN through a WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc ope rating mode , device s can send and receive data directly with each other. Connection manager Active data connections Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > A ctive data connections . In the active data connections vie w, you can see the open data conne ctions: data calls packet data connections WLAN connections Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, roun ding off for bil ling, and so forth. To end a connection , select Options > Disconn ect . To c l ose all open connections, sele ct Options > Disco nnect all . To view th e details of a conne ction, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connec tion type. Available WLAN networks Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. > Available WLAN net works . The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their networ k mod e (infrastructure or ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with enc ryption, an d if your devic e has an active connec tion in the netw ork. To view th e details of a network, sel ect Option s > Details . 70 Connections
To create an internet acc ess point in a network, select Options > Define access point . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity You can make a wirel ess connection to other compatible devices w ith Blue tooth conn ectivity. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enh ancements su ch as headsets and car kits. You can use Bl uetooth connectivi ty to send images, video clips, mu sic and sound clips, and notes; make a wireless connection to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer file s); and connect t o a compatib le printer to print images with Image print. Since devices with Bluet ooth wireless technology communicate using radio wave s, they do not need to be in di re c t l in e- of -s ig h t. Ho we ve r , t he y m us t b e within 10 m etres (33 fee t ) of each ot her, although the conn ection may be subject to i nterferen ce from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is c ompliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following p rofiles: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Ba sic Ima ging Profile, Basic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface Device Prof ile, Object Push Profil e, SIM Access Profile, and Synchronization Profi le. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetoot h technology, use Nokia approved en hancements f or this model. Ch eck wi th the manufacturers of ot her devices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restri ctions on using Bluetooth t e c h n o l o g y i n s o m e l o c a t i o n s . C h e c k w i t h y o u r l o c a l authorities or service provider. Features us ing Bluetooth t echnology, or allo wing such features t o run in the background wh ile using other features, increase the deman d on battery power and reduce the batter y life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetoot h connecti vity. See "Phone and SIM," p. 142 . Setting s Press , an d sel ect Tools > Blueto oth . When you open the applicatio n for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your dev i ce. You can change th e name later on. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â To make a wir eles s conn ectio n to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a con nection. To switch off Bluetoot h connectivi ty, select Off . 71 Connections
â My phon e's vis ibili ty â To allow your d evice to be found by other de vices w ith Blue tooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time after w hich the visibili ty is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . To hide yo ur device from othe r devices, select Hidden . â My phon e's name â Edit the name show n to other devices wi th Bluetooth wirele ss technology. â Remote SIM mode â To enable another d e vice, such as a compatible car kit enhancement, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, s elect On . See "Remote S IM mode," p. 74 . Security tips Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When you are no t using Bluetooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetoot h > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair wit h or accept connection re quests from an unknow n device. This pr otec ts your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Blue tooth connections can be act ive at a time. For e xample, if yo u are connecte d to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to anothe r compati ble d evi ce at the same time. 1. Open the ap plication where t he item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery. 2. Select t he item and Options > Send > Via Bluetoot h . Devices with Bluetooth wireless techn ology that are within range are displayed. Device icon s are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3. Select the de vice with which you w ant to connect. 4. If the other device requ ires pairing before data can be transmitted, a to ne sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices," p. 73 . 72 Connections
When the conne ction is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique addr ess (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the sta ndby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create yo ur own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair wit h a device , select Options > New paired devi ce . Devices that are with in range are displa yed. 2. Select the device , and enter the passc ode. The same passcode must be entered on th e other device as well. 3. Some audio e nhancements conn ect automatically to your devic e after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancemen t, and select Option s > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, scroll to the devic e, and select from the follo wing option s: â Set as authorised â Connections betw een your device and the auth orised dev ice can be made without your know ledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your comp atible head set or P C or de vice s that bel ong to someone you trust. indicates auth orised devices in the paired devices view. â Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separate ly every time. To cancel a pairing, scro ll to the device, and select Option s > Delete . If you want to cancel all pa irings, select Option s > Delete all . Receive data using Blueto oth connectivit y When you receive data th rough Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages received 73 Connections
through Bluetoot h connectivity are indicated by . Remote SIM mode Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and the pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the othe r device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compa tibl e car kit enhancem ent, activate B luetooth connectivit y, and enable th e use of the remo te SIM mode with your device. Activate th e remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection t o the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area, and you cannot use SIM card services or features requiring cellul ar network coverage. When the wireless devic e is in the remote SI M mode, you can only use a compatible connecte d enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode , except to the emergenc y numbers programmed into y our device. To make calls from your device, you must leave the rem ote SIM mode. If the device is lo cked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SI M mode, press the power key, and se lect Exi t remote SIM mo de . USB Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > USB . To have the devic e ask the purp ose of the connection each time a c ompatible dat a cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an acti ve connection, select USB mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Nseries PC suite, Nokia Lifeblog, and Nokia Software Updater. â Data transfer â Tr ansfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Use this mode also for downloading maps with the Nokia Map Loader PC application. â Image print â Print images on a compatible printe r. â Media player â Synchronise music with Windows Media Player. 74 Connections
PC connections You can use your device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, tr ansfer images be tween your de vice and a compatible PC. Always create th e connection from the PC to synch ronise wi th your device. 75 Connections
Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet vide o servic es usin g packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video cl ips from a compa tible PC t o your devic e and vi ew them in Video Centre. Video Centre supports the same file formats as RealPlayer. All videos are played in the landscape mode by default. Your devic e may have predefined services. Service provid ers may provide free con tent or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service prov ider. Find and view videos 1. Press , and select Video centre . 2. To connect to a service, scroll left or right, and select the desired video service. The device upda tes and displays the content available in the service. 3. To view videos b y catego ries (if availabl e), scroll left or right to view the ot her tabs. 4. To view informatio n about a video, select Options > Video deta ils . 5. Some video clips c an be stream ed over the air, but others must be fi rst downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . To stream a video clip or view a downloaded clip, select Options > Play . 76 Nokia Video Centre
6. When the clip is playing, use th e scroll key an d the selection keys to cont rol the player. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downl oaded videos are saved in Video centre > My videos . To conne ct to the inte rnet to bro wse available services that y ou can ad d to the main view , select Add new serv ices . Internet videos Internet vid eos are video clips distributed in the internet using RSS -based feeds. You can add new feeds to Internet videos in the settings. You can view your fe eds in the Internet videos folder in Video Centre. To add or delete feeds, selec t Options > Feed subscrip tions . To view the vi deos available in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information about a video, select Option s > Video details . To download a video, scroll to it, and select Option s > Download . To play the downloaded vi deo, press the scroll key. Play downl oaded videos The downloaded videos are saved in Video centre > My v ideos . To play a downlo aded video, p ress the sc roll key. To play a downloaded vi deo in the home network, select Options > Show v ia home network . Home network mu st be configured first. See "About home network, " p. 47 . When the clip is playin g, use the scr oll key and the selection keys to control the player . If there is not en ough free space in the device memory and compatible memory card, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest videos when new videos are downloaded. indicates videos that may soon be deleted. To prevent a video from being automatically dele ted ( ), select Option s > Prot ect . Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own vi deos to Video Cent re from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. To transfer videos from a compatible PC to the memory card in your device, do the following: 77 Nokia Video Centre
1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device ( E:\ ) where you ca n transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable . 2. Select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. S e l e c t t h e v i d e o s y o u w a n t t o c o p y f r o m y o u r P C . 4. Transfer the vi deos to E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred vide os appear in the My videos folder in Video Centre. Video files in other folder s of your de vice are no t displayed . Settings In the Video Centre main view, sele ct Option s > Settings and from the following: â Video service selection â Select the video services you w ant to in the main view of the application . You can also view the details of a video service. Some services require a user name and a password that you receive from the service provider. â Defaul t access po ints â Select the access points used for the dat a connection. Using packet data access points to downlo ad files may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider fo r information about data transmission charges. â Parental control â Activate the parental lock for video services. â Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatib le memory card. If the selected memory becomes full, the device saves the content in the othe r memory, if available . If there is not enough spac e in th e other memo ry, the application automatically dele tes some of the oldest videos. â Thumbnai ls â Select whether to view thumbnail images in video lists. 78 Nokia Video Centre display
Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposu re to high volume may damage your hearin g. Do not hold th e device near your ear when t he loudspeaker is in use, b e cause the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or al l the variations of file format s. You can also use Music play er to listen to podcast episodes. Podca sting is the metho d for delivering audio or video content ov er the internet using either RSS or Atom technolo gies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music to your device," p. 82 . Play a song or a podcast epis ode You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have up dated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all available items to the library, in the Music player main view, selec t Option s > Refresh . To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following: 1. Press , and select Mu sic > Music player . 2. Select Music or Podcas ts . 3. Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast ep isode you want to hear. 4. To play the selected fi les, press the scroll key. To pause pla yback, press th e scroll k ey; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down . To fast forward or rewind , press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to th e next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again 79 Music folder
within 2 seconds after a so ng or podcast has starte d. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuf fle . To repeat the current item ( ), all i tems ( ), or to switch repeat off, select Options > Rep eat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switc h ed off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance bass, select Opti ons > Audio settings . To view a visualisation during playback, select Options > Show visualisation . To return to t he standby mode and le ave the p layer playing in the backgro u nd, pres s the end key, or t o switch to another ope n ap plication, press an d hold . To close the player, select Options > Exit . Music menu Press , and select Music > Music p layer > Music . The music menu shows the availabl e music. Select the desired option in th e music menu to view all songs, sorted songs, or playlists. When the Music player is playing in th e background, to open the Now playing v iew in th e multimedia menu, press the multimedia key. Playl ists Press , and select Music > Music player > Music . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlist detail s . Create a playlis t 1. Selec t Options > Create playlist . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list unde r an artist title, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5. When you ha ve made your selection s, select Done . 80 Music folder
If a compatible memory card is inser ted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs later, wh en viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Optio ns > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Option s > Remove . This does not delete the so ng from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playli st, scroll to the song you want to move, and se lect Options > Reorde r list . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. Podcasts Press , an d sele ct Music > Music player > Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played , partially played, and completely played. If an episode is part ially played, it plays from the last playback position th e next time it is p layed. If an episode i s never playe d or completel y played, it plays from the beginning. Home network with music pla yer You can play content stor ed in your Nokia device remotely on compatible de vices in a home network. You can also copy files fr om your No kia de vice to other devices that are connected to th e home network. Home network must be configure d first. See "About home network," p. 47 . Play a song or a podcast remotely 1. Press , and select Mu sic > Music player . 2. Select Music or Podcas ts . 3. Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast ep isode you want to hear. 4. Select the desired song or podcast and Options > Play > Via home network . 5. Select the devi ce in wh ich the fi le is played. Copy so ngs or podca sts wirelessly To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible devi ce in a home network, select a file and Options > Move and cop y > Co py to home netw ork or Move to hom e net. . Conten t sharing does not have to be switched on in the home network settings. See "Set sharing on and defin e conte nt," p. 48 . 81 Music folder
Transfer music to your device You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other com patible de vices using a compatible US B data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. PC requirements for music transfer: â Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) â A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your de vice's product pages on the Nokia website. â Nokia Nseries PC Suite 1.6 or later Windows Media Player 10 may cause playback delays to WMDRM technolo gy prot ected file s after they have been t ransferre d to your device. Check Microsoft support websit e for a hotfix to Windows Media Player 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Player. Transfer music from PC You can use three diff erent methods to transfer music: â To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where y ou can transfer an y data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. If you are using the USB cable, sele ct Data transf er as the connection mode. A compat ible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. â To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB dat a cable and select Media player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. â To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite, connect the compat ible USB data cable and select PC Suite as the conn ection mode. Use Data transf er and Media player modes to transfer files to a compatible memory card. To change the de fault USB co nnection mode, press , and sele ct Tools > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimised to transfer music files. For information about transferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see th e help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit the Nokia su pport pages. Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. 82 Music folder
Manual synchron isation With manual synchronisation, you can select the songs and playlists that yo u want t o move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is conn ected with Windows Media Player, select your d evice in the navigation pane on the right, if more than one device is conn ected. 2. In the l eft naviga tion pane, bro wse the music files on y our PC wh ich you w ant to s ynchr onise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the righ t. You can see the amou nt of available memory in your devic e above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums , select an item in the Sync List , right-click, and select Remo ve f rom list . 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync . Automati c synchro nisatio n 1. To activate the automatic synchronisat ion function in Window s Media Player, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handse t > Set Up Sync... , and check the Sync this device automati cally check box. 2. Select the playlists yo u want to syn chroni se automatically in the Availa ble playlists pane, and click Add . The selected items are transfe rred to the Playlists to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisation, click Finish . When the Sync this device automatic ally check box is checked and you connect you r device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the pl aylists you select for synch ronisatio n in Window s Media Play er. If no playlists have been selected, the whol e PC music library is selected for synchr onisation. If there is not enough free memory in your device, Windows Media Player selects ma nual synchro n isation automatically. To stop automatic sync hronisation, click the Sync tab, and select St op Syn c to 'No kia Han dset' . Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (network serv ice) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purch ase music, you first need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visi t music.n okia.com. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. 83 Music folder
To open Nokia Music Store, press , and select Music > Music sto re . To find more music in different c a tegories of the music menu, select Option s > Find in M usic store . Nokia Music St ore settings The availability and appear an ce of the music st ore settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and no t editable. If the settings are no t predefined, you m ay be asked to select the access point to use when connect ing to the music store. To select the access point, select Default a cc. pt. . In the music store, you ma y be able to edit the settings by selecting Opti ons > Settings . Radio You can use the radio as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and save d stations or with parallel visual informat ion related to the radio programme on the display if you tune to statio ns that offer Visual Radio service. The Visual Radio service uses packet data (n etwork service). Warning : Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. Do not hold the de vice near your ear when the loud speaker is in use, because the vo lume ma y be ext remel y loud. When you open the radio for the first time, a wizard helps you to save local radio stations (network service). If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stati ons in your area may not support V isual Radio. Listen to the radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible headset or enhancement ne eds to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function prop erly. Press , and select Music > Radio . Note that the qu ality of th e radio broadc ast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can normally make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an activ e call. To start a statio n search, select or . To change the freq uency manually, select Options > Manual tunin g . If you have previously save d radio stations, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . 84 Music folder
To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activa te louds peaker . To view available stations based on location, select Option s > Station directory (network service). To save the curre nt tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save station . To op en the l ist of your saved stat ions, select Options > Sta tions . To return to the standby mode and allow the FM radio to play in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs and to subscribe to the service , contact yo u r service provider. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select or Option s > Start visual service . If the visual service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or se lect Retriev e to search for it in the station directory (n etwork service). When the c onnection to the v isual service is established, the current visual content is displayed. Saved stations To open the list of yo ur sa ved stations, select Option s > Stations . To listen to a save d station, select Options > Statio n > Listen . To view availa ble visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Option s > Station > Sta r t visual service . To change station details, select Options > Statio n > Edit . Setting s Press , an d sel ect Music > Radio . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Start-up tone â Select whether a t one is played when the applicat ion is start ed. â Auto-start service â To start Visual Radio autom aticall y when yo u select a saved station that offers Visual Ra dio service, select Yes . â Access point â S e lect the acc ess point used for the data connectio n. You do not need an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. â Current region â S e l e c t t h e r e g i o n i n w h i c h y o u are currently located. Th is setting is displayed only if there is no n etwork co verage when t he applica tion is started. Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcas ti ng application (network service), you can search, di scover, subscribe to, and 85 Music folder
download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Warning : Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. Do not hold the de vice near your ear when the loudsp eaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Settings Before using Nokia Podcastin g, set your conn ection and download settings. The recommended connection me thod is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before usin g other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow la rge data transfers for one mon thly fee. Connection settings To edit the conn ection settin gs, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Opti ons > Settings > Connection . Def ine the following: â Default access point â Select the access point to define your c onnection to the int ernet. â Search service URL â Define the po dcast sea rch service to be u sed in search es. Download settings To edit the download settings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Opt ions > Settings > Download . Define the following: â Save to â Define the location where you wan t to save your podc asts. â Update interval â Define how often podcasts are updated. â Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic update . â Next update time â Define the time of next automatic update . Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, the automatic updates are not activated. â Download limit (%) â Define the size of the memory that is used for podcast downloads. â If limit exceeds â Define what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the applicatio n to retrieve po dcasts automatically may involve the transmissio n of large amounts of data through your servic e providerâ s network. Co ntact your service provider for information about data transmission charge s. To restore the defaul t settings, select Op tions > Restore d efault in the settings view. 86 Music folder
Search Search helps you to find podca sts by keyword or title. The search engine uses t he podcast search service you set up in Po dcasting > Options > Settings > Connecti on > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, press , select Music > Podcasting > Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast titl es and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General t o pics, such as foot ball or hip-hop, u sually give be tter results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to marked c hannels and add th em to your podc asts, sel ect Opti ons > Subscribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting one. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the web site of the podcast, sel ect Options > Open web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, select Op tions > Descriptio n . To send selected podcas ts to another compa tible device, select Optio ns > Send . Directories Directories help you t o find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. To open directories, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Dire ctories . Contents of the directori es change. S elect t he desired directory folder to update it (net work service). When the colour of th e folder chan ges, press the scroll key again to open it. Directories can include top podcasts listed by popularity or themed fol ders. To open the desired folder topic, press the scroll key. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title, and press the scroll key. After yo u have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in the po dcasts menu. To add a new director y or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Fo lder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline pr ocessor ma rkup language) file, and Done . To edit the selec ted folder, web link , or web directory, sele ct Option s > Edit . To import an .opml file st ored on your device, select Option s > Import OPML file . Select the locat ion of the file, an d import it. 87 Music folder
To send a directory f older as a multimedia message or using Blueto oth connect ivity, select the fol der and Option s > Send . When you receiv e a message with an .opml file using Bl uetooth connectiv ity, open the file to save the file into the Received f o l d e r i n d i r e c t o r i e s . O p e n the folder to subscribe to any o f the links to add to your podcasts. Down load s After you have subscribed to a podca st, from directories, search, or by entering a URL, you can manage, download, and play episodes i n Podcasts . To see the podcasts you ha ve subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcas ts . To see individual episode titles (an episode is a particular media file of a pod cast), select the podcast title. To start a download, selec t the ep isode title. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episo des, select Options > Download or Continue do wnload . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading , select the podcast and Options > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown until the library is refreshe d. Play and manag e podcasts To display the available episodes from th e selected podcast, select Optio ns > Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of th e file, and time of th e upload. When the podc ast is fully downloaded, to play the full episode, select Podcasts > Options > Play , or press and select Music > Mu sic player > Podcasts . To update the selected podcast or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Opt ions > Update . To stop th e updating, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering the UR L of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of t he selected p odcast, sele ct Options > Edit . To delete a downloaded podcast or marked podcasts from your device , select Options > Delete . 88 Music folder
To send the sele cted podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and se nd a group of selected podcasts at once, se lect Options > Mark/ Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Option s to choose the desired action. To open th e websit e of the p odcast (network service), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts pro vide the opportu nity to intera ct with the cr eators by comment ing and voting . To connect to the inte rnet to do this, select Options > View comments . 89 Music folder
Media folder RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pl ay video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files wi th extensions such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlay er does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play v ideo clip s Press , and select Application s > Media > RealPlayer . 1. To play a saved media file, select Options > Open and from the following: â Most recent clips â Play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer. â Saved clip â Play a file saved in Gallery. 2. Scroll to a file, and press the sc roll key to play the file. To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. Stream content over the air Many service pr oviders require you to use an internet access point (IAP ) for your default acc e ss point. Other service prov iders allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, yo u can on ly open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer pla ys a .ram file if you open an http link to it in a browser. To stream content ov er the air (network se rvice), select a streaming link sa ved in G allery, on a web page, or received in a te xt message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device con nects to the site and starts loading the content. The content i s not saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special message from the service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: 90 Media folder
â Video â Select whether video clips are automatically repeate d after they finish p laying. â Streaming â Select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range use d when connecting. Contact your serv ice provider for the correct settings. Adobe Flash Player Press , an d sele ct Applications > Media > Flash Player . Use Adobe Flash Player to view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices. To open a flash fi le, scro ll to it, and sel ect it. Nokia Lifeblog Nokia Lifeblog keeps a multimedia diary of the items that you collect with your d e vice. Lifeblog organises your photos, videos, sounds, text messages, multimedia messages, and weblog posts into a chronology that you can browse , search, share, publish, and back up. Lifeblog mobile automati c ally keeps track of your multimedia items. Use Lifeblo g on your device to browse your items, send them to others, or publish them on the we b. For safekeeping, you can back up your Nokia Lifeblog database using the hard disk of your compatible PC or compat ible CDs, DVDs, removable drive, or netw ork dri ve. Addi tionally , you can p ost items to your compat ible webl og (blog). For more information on we blog services and their compatibility with Nokia Lifeblog, visit www.nokia.com/lifeblog. Press , and selec t Applications > Media > Lifeblog . The time line view opens and shows your multimedia items. To open your saved favourites, select Option s > View Favou rites . Activation key s To view digital rights activation keys, press , and select Applications > Media > Actv. keys . Digital rights management Content owners may use diffe rent types of digit a l rights management (DRM) tech nologies to protect their intel lectual pro perty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-pr otected con tent. With this d evice you can access cont ent prote cted with WMDR M 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and O MA DRM 2.0. If cert ain DRM software fails to protect the con tent, content own ers may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM- 91 Media folder
protected cont ent be revoked. Re vocation may also prevent rene wal of such DR M-protected content alrea dy in your de vice. Revocati on of su ch DRM software does no t affect t he use of content protected with other ty pes of DRM or the use of no n- DRM-pr otected con tent. Digital rights manag ement (DRM) pro tected conte nt comes with an associat ed activation key that defines your ri ghts to use the content. If your device has OMA DR M protected cont ent, to back up both the activati on keys and the conte nt, use the backup featu re of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activation k e y s w h i c h n e e d t o b e r e s t o r e d w i t h t h e c o n t e n t f o r you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected con tent after the de vice memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activa tion keys in case the f iles on your device ge t corrupted. If your device has WMDR M protec ted cont ent, both the activation keys and the c ontent will be lo st if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and th e content in case the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losin g the activation keys or the c ontent may limit yo ur ability to use the same content on your device again. For more informat ion, con tact y our serv ice provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protec ted content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main view, select from the following: â Valid keys â View keys that are connected to media files or whose validity period has not begun. â Invalid keys â V i e w k e y s t h a t a r e n o t v a l i d ; t h e time period for usin g the media file is exc e eded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connec ted activation key . â Not in use â V i e w k e y s t h a t h a v e n o m e d i a f i l e s connected to them in th e device. To buy more usage time fo r a media file, select an invalid activation key and Optio ns > Get new key (web service messages must be enabled). See "Web service message settings," p. 111 . To view detailed information, such as the validity status and ability to send the file, scroll to an activation key, and press the scroll key. Recorder Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. 92 Media folder
To record a telephone c onversation, open Re corder during a voice call. Both pa rti es hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. 93 Media folder
Personalise your device You can personalise your device by changing the standby mode, main menu, to nes, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing th e font size, can be a ccessed through the device settings. See "Persona lisation settings," p. 140 . Themes Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Per sonalisation > Themes . You can change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and ic ons. To change the theme that is used for all the applica tions in yo ur device , select General . To preview a theme be fore activatin g it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memo ry card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in th e device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory c ard without the memory card, save the themes in the devic e memory first. T o c h a n g e t h e l a y o u t o f t h e m a i n m e n u , s e l e c t Menu view . To open a browser conne ction and download more themes, in General or Menu vi ew , select Download themes (network service). Important: Use only serv ices that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmf ul software. To edit the wal lpaper and pow er saver of the current them e that appe ar in the standby mode, select Wallpaper to change the background image or Power saver to change the power saver. ProfilesâÂÂset tones Press , and select Tools > Profiles . You can se t and customise t he ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environment s, or caller grou ps. 94 Personalise your device
To change the p rofile, select a prof ile, and Option s > Activ ate . To also change the profile, press the pow er key in the standby mode. Sc roll to the profile you want to activa te, and select OK . Tip: To switch between the ge neral and silent profiles in the standb y mode, press and hold # . To modify a profile, scroll to the profile, and sele ct Option s > Perso nalise . Scroll to the se tting you want to change, and press th e scroll key to o pen the choices. Tones stored on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are i ndicated with . In the tones list, select Download sound s (network service) to open a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start conn ection to a web page to download more tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken when your devi ce rings, sel ect Options > Personalis e , and set Say caller's name to On . The ca llerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts. To crea te a new p rofile, select Options > Create new . 3-D tones Press , sel ect Tools > Utilitie s > 3-D tones . With 3-D tones, you can enabl e three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To enable the 3 -D effects, select 3- D ringing ton e effects > On . To change th e ringing tone, s elect Ringing ton e and the desired ringing tone. To change the 3-D effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the eff ect, select from the following settings: â Trajectory speed â S cr ol l le ft or ri g ht to ad ju s t the speed at which so und moves from one direction to anot her. This setting is not available for all ringing tones. â Reverberatio n â Select the type of echo. â Doppler eff ect â Select On to have the ri nging tone sound louder wh en you are closer to your device, and softer when you are farther away. When you get closer to the device, the ringing tone appears to become louder, and soft er when you move away from it . This setting is not available for all ringing tones. To listen t o the ringin g tone with th e 3-D effect , select Options > Play tone . If you enable t he 3-D tones but do not select any 3-D effe ct, stereo widening is appli ed to the ringing tone. 95 Personalise your device
To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profi les > Option s > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify the standby mode To switch the ac tive st andby on or off, press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalis ation > Standby mode > Active standby . The active stan dby display shows applica tion shortcuts, and events from applications such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select Tools > Settings > General > Personalis ation > Standby mode . Some shortcuts may be fi xed, and you cannot change them. To change the clock show n in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Cloc k > Options > Settings > Clock type . You can also change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver. See "Themes, " p. 94 . Modify the main menu To change the main menu view, in the main menu, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid or List . To rearrange the main me nu, in th e main me nu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used app lications into folders and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. To use animated icons in your device, in the main menu, select Option s > Icon animation > On . 96 Personalise your device
Time management Clock Alarm clock Press , and select Applications > Cloc k . To set a new quick alarm, select Options > New quick alarm . Quick alarms are set for the next 24 hours and t hey cannot be repeated. To view your active a nd in active alarms, scroll right to the alarm tab. To set a new alarm, select Option s > New alarm . Define the repe tition, if needed. When an alarm is active, is shown. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is re ached while the device is switched of f, the device sw itches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Sto p , th e device asks whether you want to activa te the device for calls. Select No to switch off the dev ice or Yes to make and receive call s. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause int erference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time , date, and clock t ype settings, select Options > Settings . To allow the mob i le phone network to up date the time, date, and t ime zone informa tion to your device (network service) , in the settings, select Network operato r time > Auto-update . World clock Press , an d sel ect Applications > Clock . To open the w orld clock vie w, scroll right to the world clock tab. In the world clock view, yo u can view the time in dif ferent ci ties. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add cit y . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city , scroll to a city, and select Option s > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, an d the time in your d evice is changed according to the city selected. Ensure that the time is correc t and matches yo ur time zon e. 97 Time man ageme nt
Calendar Create a calendar entry Press , and select Application s > Calendar . 1. To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, and select Options > New entry and one of the following: â Meeting â to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time â Memo â to write a general entry for a day â Anniversary â to remind you of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated annually) â To-do â t o r e m i n d y o u o f a t a s k t h a t m u s t b e done by a specific date 2. Fi l l i n th e fi el d s. T o s e t a n a la r m , s el e c t Alarm > On , and enter the alarm time and date. To add a description for an entry, select Options > Add description . 3. To save the entry, se lect Done . Tip: In the day, we ek, or month calend ar view, press any key ( 1 -0 ). An appointment entry opens, and the c h aracters you ente r are adde d to the s ubjec t fiel d. In t he to-do view, a to-do note entry open s. When the calendar alarm soun ds for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text stays on the screen. To stop the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . Calendar views To change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar, sele ct Options > Settings . To go to a certain da te, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press # . To switch betw een the mo nth view, week view, day view, and to-do v iew, press * . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compa tible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly . 98 Time man ageme nt
To modif y the calen dar, sele ct Options > Settings > Calendar ala rm tone , Default view , Week starts on , or Week view title . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, go to the month view, an d select Options > Dele te en try > Before date or All entrie s . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-d o view, a nd sele ct Options > Mark as done . You can synchronise your calenda r with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a c alendar e ntry, set th e desired synchronisatio n option. 99 Time man ageme nt
Messaging Only d evi ces th at hav e compati ble fe atures can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. Messaging main view Press , and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Messaging contains the followin g folders: â Inbox â Received message s, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use te xts in the Templates folder in My folders . You can al so create and save your own templ ates. â Mailbo x â Connec t to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. â Draf ts â Draft messages that have no t been sent are stored here. â Sent â The last messa ges that have been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivit y, are stored here. You can change the number of messages to save in this folder. â Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outsid e network coverage. â Reports â You can request th e networ k to send you a delivery repo rt of the text message s and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send servic e requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network servic es, to your service provider, select Options > Service comm and in the Messaging main view. Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topi cs, such as weather or t raffic co nditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the Messaging main view, select Opti ons > Cell broadcast . 100 Messaging
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packe t data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Write text Your device supports tradit ional text input an d predictive tex t input. With predicti ve text, you c an enter any letter with a single keypre ss. Predictive text input is based on a bu i lt-in dictionary to which you can add new words. When you w rite text, is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when us ing pr edicti ve text input . Traditional text input Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) rep eatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on th e key. If the next letter is loca ted on the same key as the present on e, wait un til the cursor appears (or scrol l right to end the t ime-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three times. Predictive text input With predictive in put, you c an enter any letter w ith a single keypress. Predicti ve text input is b ased on a built-in dictionary to which you c an add new words. 1. To turn pred ictive text i nput on or of f in the general settings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Langu age > Predictive text . 2. To write the desired word, press the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only onc e for one lett er. For example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, press 6 for N, 6 for o, 5 for k, 4 for i, and 2 for a. The word suggest ion changes after eac h keypress. 3. When you finish writin g the word correctly, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words th e dictionary h as found one by one. If the ? character is shown after the word, the word is not in the dictionary . To add a word to the dictio nary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text in put, and sele ct OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 101 Messaging
4. Start writing the next word. Tips on text input To insert a number in the lett er mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch betw een the different character modes, press # . To delete a ch aracter, press C . T o de lete m ore than one character, press and hold C . The most common punctuat ion marks are available under 1 . To scroll th em through one b y one, press 1 , and then * repeatedly. To open a list of specia l characters, press and hold * . Tip: To select several special characters from the special characters list, press 5 after each highlighted cha racter. Change the writing language When you are writing text, you can change the writing languag e. For example, if you are writing text using a non-La tin alph abet and want to write Latin characters, such as e-mail or web addresses, you may need to change the writing language. To change the writing lang uage, select Opt ions > Writing language and a writing language tha t uses Latin characters. After changing the writin g language, for example, if you press 6 repeatedly to reach a specific charac ter, c hangin g the wr iting l anguage gives you access to char acters in a differen t order. Edit text and lists To copy and past e text, wh ile pressin g and holding # , scroll l eft or right to hi ghlight text. To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding # , select Copy . To insert the text in to a document, press and hold # , and sel ect Paste . To mark an item in a list , scroll to it, and press # . To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold # while you scroll up or do wn. To end the selection , stop scrolling, and release # . Write and send messa ges Press , and select Messaging . Before yo u can create a mult imedia message or write an e- mail, yo u must have the co rrect connection settin gs in plac e. See "Define the e- mail settings," p. 105 . 102 Messaging
The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If th e inserted picture exceeds this limit, t h e d e v i c e m a y m a k e i t s m a l l e r s o t h a t i t c a n b e s e n t by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you at tempt to sen d an e-mail message that exc eeds the size limit of the e- mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempt s to resend it p eriodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous att em p s to resend the e-mail ma y increase yo ur phone bill. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Draft s folder. 1. Select New m essage > Te xt message to send a text message, Multimedia message to send a multimedia message (MMS ), Audio message to send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one soun d clip), or E-mail to send an e-mail. 2. In the To fiel d, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâ s phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press * . You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the Subje ct field, ente r the subject of the multimedia messag e or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4. In the message field, wri te the message. To insert a templ ate, select Options > In sert or Insert o bject > Template . 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Inser t object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . 6. To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video cl ip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . 103 Messaging t
To see what the mu ltimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Vid eo clip , Note , or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8. To send the message, select Opt ions > Send , or press the call key. Note : Your device may indicate that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Your device may not indicate wh ether the me ssa ge is received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, contac t your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the charac ter limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Cha racters th at use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the numbe r of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video cl ips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exce ed the siz e limit of the wireless network in a multime dia message. Tip: You can c ombine images, vi deo, soun d, and text to a p resentation and se nd it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia message, and select Options > Create presen tation . The option is shown only if MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free. See "Multimedia message settings," p. 108 . Messaging inbox Receive messages Press , and select Messaging > Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetoot h connectivity. When you re ceive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Sho w . To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and pre ss the scroll key. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia m essages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may 104 Messaging
contain mal icious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a pack et data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the v ideo, select the indicator. To see the media objects t hat have be en included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message in cludes a multimedia presentation, i s d i s p l ay e d . To p l a y th e p r e se n t a t io n , s e le c t t h e indicator. Data, settings, and web se rvice messag es Your devi ce can recei ve many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, ca lendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may al so receive setti ngs from your service provider or company information management department in a co nfiguration message. To save the data from the message, select Option s and the correspo nding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, ne ws headlines) a nd may contain a text message or a link. For avai lability and subscription, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: Use Settings wizard to define yo ur mailbox settings. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Sett. wiza rd . To use e-mail, you must hav e a valid internet acc ess point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly . See "Access points," p. 14 8 . See "E-mail settings," p. 109 . You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Mailb ox in the Messaging main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating t he e-mail settings with the mai lbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox rep laces Mail box in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. 105 Messaging
Open the mailbox Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, the d evice asks if you want to co nnect to the mailbo x ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbo x and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuousl y connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previous ly retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the Messa ging main view or Options > Create mess age > E-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages," p. 102 . Retrieve e-mail messages Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Op tions > Connect to start a connection to th e remote mailbox. Importan t: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious so f t w a re o r o t h er w i s e be h a rm f u l t o y o u r de v i c e o r PC. 1. When you have an op en connection to a remote mailbox, select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only the messages that have been marked, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2. To close the c onnection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you a re asked if you want to retrieve thi s message from the ma ilbox. To view e-mail attachmen ts, open the message, and select the attachmen t field indicated by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it ha s not been retrieve d to the device ; select Opt ions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messa ges automatically, select Options > E-m ail setting s > Automatic retrieval . See "Automatic retrieval settings," p. 111 . Setting the device to retrieve e-mail auto matically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provide r's network. Contact y our service p rovid er for information about data transmission charges. 106 Messaging
Delete e-mail messages Press , an d sele ct Messaging and a mai lbox. To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still re taining it in the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete . In Delete message from: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail heading s in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, th e e-mail heading stays in your dev ice. If you want to remove the heading as well , you must first delete t he e-mail message fro m your remote mailbox, then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the st atus. To delete an e-mail from th e device and th e remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e -mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection , and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, t o end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . View messag es on a SIM c ard Press , an d sel ect Messaging . Before you c an view S IM messages, you must copy them to a fo lder in yo ur device. 1. In the Messaging ma in view, selec t Options > SIM messages . 2. Select Options > Mark/Un mark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3. Select Options > Cop y . A list of folders opens. 4. To start copying, select a folder and OK . T o view the messages, op en the f older. Messaging settings The settings may be precon figured in your device, or you may receiv e them in a message. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message cent res or access points may be preset for yo ur device by you r servic e provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings Press , an d sel ect Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Text message . 107 Messaging
Select from the following: â Message cen tres â V iew a list of all text message cent res that hav e been defined. â Message cen tre in use â Select which message centre to use to de liver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding syst em when available, select Reduced support . â Receive report â Select whether the netw ork sends delivery reports on your messages (network service). â Message validity â Select how long the message centre re sends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent withi n the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. â Message sent as â Contact your service provider to learn if your message centre is able to convert t ext messages into these other formats. â Preferred connection â S elect the connecti on to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message ce ntre number (network service). Multimedia m essage settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia messa ge . Select from the following: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mo de â I f y o u s e l e c t Guided , the device info rms you if yo u try to send a message that may not be supported by the reci pient. If you select Restricted , the de vice prevents you from sending messages that ma y not be supported. To include conten t in your messages with out notifications, select Free . â Access poin t in use â Select which access point is used as the pre ferred connec tion. â Multimedia retrieval â Se lect how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular network, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home cellular network, you receive a notification tha t there is a message to re trieve in the multimedia message centre. Outside your home cellula r network, sending and receiving multimedia messa ges may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your de vice automatically makes an active pa cket da ta connect ion to retrieve the 108 Messaging
message both in and outside your home cellular network. â Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to reject messages from an an onymous sender. â Receive adverts â D efine wh ether y ou want t o receive multimedia message advertisements. â Receive report â Sele ct whether you wa nt the status of the sent message t o b e s h o w n i n t h e l o g (network servic e). â Deny repo rt sendin g â Select whether you want to deny your devi ce sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message vali dity â Select how long the message centre resends yo ur message if the fi rst attempt fails ( network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail setti ngs Manage mailboxes Press , an d sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > E-ma il . To select which mailbox you w ant to use to send e- mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox . To remove a mailbox an d its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C . To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes , sele ct Option s > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mail box replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settin gs, user settings, retriev a l settings, and aut omatic retrieval sett ings. Connection settings Press , an d sel ect Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection se ttings . To edit the sett ings for the e-mai l you rece ive, selec t Incoming e-mail , and from the following: â User name â Enter yo ur user name given to you by your service provider. â Passwo rd â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to c o nnect to you r remote mailbox. â Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address o r h o s t n a m e o f t h e m a i l s e r v e r t h a t r e c e i v e s y o u r e-mail. â Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). See "Access points," p. 148 . â Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. â Mailbox type â Defines t he e-mail protoco l that your remote mailbox service prov ider 109 Messaging
recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. â Security (ports) â Sele ct the security option used to secure t he connec tion to th e remote mailbox. â Port â Define a port for the connection. â APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 proto col to encrypt th e sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, se lect Outgoing e-mail and from the following: â My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your serv ice provider. â Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e- mail. You may only be able to use t he outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. The settings for User name , Password, Access point in us e , Security (ports) , and Po rt are similar to the on es in Incoming e-mail . User settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select from the following: â My name â Enter your own name . Your name replaces your e-mail address in t he recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs dev ice supports this function. â Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Sele ct Immediately for the d evice to connec t to the ma ilbox when you sel ect Send message . If you se lect During next conn. , e - mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. â Send copy to self â Sel ect whether you want t o s e n d a c o p y o f t h e e - m a i l t o y o u r o w n m a i l b o x . â Include sign ature â Select whethe r you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. â New e-mail alerts â Select whe ther you want to receive t he new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . Select from the following: â E-mail to retrieve â Define which parts of the e-mail are retrieve d: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs . (POP3). â Retrieval amount â Define how man y new e- mail messages are retrieved to the mail box. 110 Messaging
â IMAP4 folder path (f or IMAP4 only) â De fine the folder path for folder s to be subscribed. â Folder sub scriptions (for IMAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve co ntent from those fo lders. Automatic retrieval settin gs Press , an d sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > E-ma il > Mailbox e s , a mailbox, and Automat ic retri eval . Select from the following: â E-mail notifications â To automatically retrie ve the hea dings to your devi ce when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-u pdate or Only in ho me netw. . â E-mail retrieval â To aut omatically retrieve t he headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at de fined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw . . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retr ieve e-mail automatically may involve the tra nsmissi on of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provid er for information about data transmission charges. Web service m essage setting s Press , an d sel ect Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Service message . Select wh ether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network co nnecti on to retriev e content when you receive a service message, select Downl oad messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and selec t Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Cell broadcast . Select from the following: â Reception â Se lect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. â Language â Select the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . â Topic detection â Selec t whether the device automatically search es for new topic numbers, and saves the new n umbers withou t a name to the topic list. 111 Messaging
Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: â Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you sen d to the Sent folder. â Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. â Memory in us e â Select the memory w here you want to save your messag es. 112 Messaging
Make calls Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, e nter the ph one number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international calls, press * twice fo r the character (rep laces th e international access code), and enter the country code, area c ode (omit the l eading z ero if n ecessary ), and ph one number. 2. Press the call key to call the nu mber. 3. Press the end key t o end the ca ll (or to canc el the call attem pt). Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another applica tion is active. To make a call from Contacts, press , and sele ct Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the se arch field. Matc hing contacts are listed. To call, press the call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list. Options during a call To adjust the v olume during a call, use the volume key on the side of you r device. You can also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute fi rst. To send an image or a vi deo clip in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Option s > Send MMS (in UMTS networks onl y). You can edit the messag e and change the re cipient before sending. Press the ca ll key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on h old while answering another inco ming call, select Op tions > Hold . To switch bet ween the ac tive and the held call, sel ect Option s > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Option s > Send D TMF . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pa use character (p), press * repeatedly . To send the ton e, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the p hone number or D TMF fields in a contact card. 113 Make calls
Tip: Wh en you h ave onl y one acti ve voice call, to put the call o n hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press t he call key again. During an active call , to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activ ate loud speaker . If you have attached a compatible headset with B luetooth co nnectivity , to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activa te hands free . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Activate handset . To end an active call and repl ace it by answering the waiting call, select Opt ions > Replace . If you have several calls active, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or v ideo mailbox (ne twork services, video mailbox av ailable only in the UMTS network), press and hold 1 in the st andby mode, and se lect Voice m ailbox or Video m ailbox . To change the phone num ber of your voice or video mailbox, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Call mail box , a mailbox, and Optio ns > Change number . Ente r the number (obtained from your network service provider), and se lect OK . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. T o m u t e t h e r i n g i n g t o n e o f a n i n c o m i n g c a l l , s e l e c t Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Ca ll divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone sett ings to divert calls, declining an incomi ng call also diverts the call. When you s elect Silence to mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informing the cal ler that you canno t answer the call. Select Option s > Send text message . To set up thi s option and write a standard text message, select Tools > Sett ing s > Phone > Call > Reject call with SMS . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to th e first part icipant. 2. To make a call to anot her participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3. When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conference call, sel ect Options > Conf erence . 114 Make calls
To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conferen ce > Add to confere nce . Yo ur device supports conf erence calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a par ticip ant, and sele ct Private . The conferen ce call is put on hold on your device. The othe r participants can still continue t he confere nce call. Af ter you finish the private conv ersation, select Options > Conferen ce to re turn to the co nference cal l. To drop a participant, select Options > Conferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4. To end th e active c onference c all, press th e end key. Speed dial a phone number To activate the featur e, press , a nd select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number keys (2-9), press , and selec t Tools > Util ities > Speed dial . Scroll t o the key to wh ich you want to assign the phone num ber, and select Options > Assign . 1 i s reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the sta ndby mode, press the assigned key and the call key. Call waiting You can answe r a call whil e you have anot her call in progress if you have ac tivated call wai ting in Setti ngs > Phon e > Call > Call waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call , press the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch b etween t h e two calls, select Swap . T o connect an incoming call or a call on hold w ith an active call and to disconne ct yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end th e activ e call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports e nhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not depende nt on the speakerâÂÂs voic e, so the user d oes not record voice tag s in advance. In stead, the dev ice creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compares the spok en voice ta g to it . The voice recognition in 115 Make calls
the device adapts to t h e main userâÂÂs voice to recognise the voice commands bett er. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on t he contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, op en a contact card, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note : Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should n ot rely solely upon voi ce dial ing in all circumstances. When you use voice dia lling, the loudspeak er is in u se . H o l d t h e d e vi c e a t a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice diall ing, in the standby mode, press and hold the righ t selection key. If a compatible headset with the head set key is attached, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone is played, and Spea k now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3. The device plays a synthesised voice tag for the recognise d contact in the selecte d device language, and displ ays the name and number. After a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device di als the number. If th e recognised cont act was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialling. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number in a c ontact card . Make a video call When you make a v i deo call (network service), you can see a real-time, tw o-way vi deo between you and the recip ient of the call. The live video image, or video image capt ured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your ne twork service provider. A video call ca n only be made between two parties. The v ideo c all can be ma de to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, v i deo, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied vide o sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Tools > 116 Make calls
Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied vi deo sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video c all, enter the p hone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Select Options > Call > Vid eo ca ll . The second ary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. St arting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through th e loudspeaker. The call rec ipient may deny video sending ( ), in whic h case you only hear th e sound and may see a still image or a grey backgro und graphic. 3. To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Options during a video call To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Options > Enabl e , or Disable and the desired option. To zoom your image in or out, sc roll up or down. To route the aud i o to a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity atta ched to your device, select Opti ons > Activate ha ndsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Option s > Activ ate h andse t . To adjust the volume duri ng a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. To use the main camera to send video, select Option s > Use main camera . To switch back to the secon dary cam era, select Options > Use second ary came ra . Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow vi d eo i ma ge t o be se n t t o ca ll e r? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not a ctivate the video ca ll, video sending is not activated, a nd you only h ear the sound of the 117 Make calls
caller. A grey screen rep laces the video image. To replace the grey scre en with a still image captured by the camera in yo ur device, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from y our mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is act ive when y ou activate V i deo sharing. If you do not want to use the loudspea ker for the voice call while you share video, y ou can also use a compatible headset. Requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availability of the UMTS network. Contact your service provider for more information on the service and ne twork ava ilabi lity and fees associated with using this service. To use video sharing you must do the following: â Ensure that your devi ce is set up for person-to- person connections. â Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMT S network co verage. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a hand ove r to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continue s. You cannot start video sharing if you are not within UMTS network coverage. â Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS n etwork. If you in vite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage, does not have video sharing installed, or person- to-person conn ections set u p, the recipi ent does not know tha t you are sending an invitation. You receive a n error message tha t indicates that the recipient c annot accep t the invi tation. Settings To set up v ideo sharing, you need person -to-person and UMTS connection settings. Person -to-pers on connection se ttings A person-to-person connect ion is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile sett ings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save th em in your device. Your service provider may send you 118 Make calls
the settings over the air or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a contact card, do the following: 1. Press , and select Co ntacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail or Share view . 4. Enter the SIP address in th e format username@domainname (you ca n use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use t he phone nu mber of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connectio n settings To set up y our UMTS con nection, do the follo wing: â Contact your service provid er to establish an agreement for you to use t he UMTS network. â Ensure that your device UMTS access point connection settings are configured p roperly. Share live video or video clips 1. When a voice call is ac tive, select Options > Share vi deo > Live video . To share a video clip, select Option s > Share vide o > Recorded clip . A list of video clips saved on the device memory or compatible memory card opens. Select a clip you want to share. To preview t he clip, select Options > Play . 2. If you sha re live video, your dev ice sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recip ient. If you share a video clip, select Opt ions > Invite . You may need to c onvert the video clip into a suitable format to b e ab l e t o sh a r e it . Clip must be conver ted for sharing. Co ntinue? appears. Sele ct OK . If the contact info rmation of the recip ient is saved in Contacts, and the contact has several SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the SIP address or the phon e number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the in vitation. 3. Sharin g begins automa tically when the r ecipie n t accepts th e invita tion. 4. To pause the sharing session, select Pause . To resume sharing, select Continue . T o fast forward or rewind the vi deo clip, scroll up or down. To play the clip again, press the end key. 119 Make calls
5. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, p ress the end key. Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. To save t he live vi deo yo u shared, sel ect Save to accept the Save shared video clip? query . The shared video is saved in the Images & videos folder in Gallery . If you access other appl ications whil e you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view and continue sharing, in the active standby mode, select Options > Continue . Accept an invi tation When someone sends you a video sharing invitation, the invitat ion message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it rings when you receive an in vitation. If someone sends you a share invitation a nd you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you re ceived an invitation. When you receiv e an invitation, select from the following: â Accept â Activates the sharing session. â Reject â Declines the invitat ion. The se nder receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can also press th e end key to decline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. When you receive a vi deo clip, to mu te the sound of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Internet calls With the internet call service (netwo rk service), you can make and receiv e calls over the internet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobi le phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive an internet ca ll, your device must be connected to an internet call service. To connect to an internet ca ll service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection ne twork, such as a WLAN access point. Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your dev ice attempts emergency calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cell ular network s is not successful, your device atte mpts an e mergency cal l through your net call provider. Due to the establish ed nature of cellular telephony, you shou ld use cellular ne tworks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage availabl e, ma ke su re th at yo ur 120 Make calls
cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emergen cy call. The capability for an emergency ca ll using internet telephony depends on the availability of a WLAN network and you r net call provider's implementati on of emerge ncy call capabiliti es. Contact your ne t call provider to check t he internet telephony emergency call capability. Create an internet call profile Before you can make i nternet calls, you m ust creat e an internet call profile. 1. Press , select Tools > Settin gs > Connect ion > SIP settings > Options > New SIP pr ofile , and enter the required information. Ensure that Regis tration is set to Always on . Contact you r internet c all provider fo r the corre ct settings. 2. Select Proxy server > Transport type > Auto . 3. Select Back until you retu rn to the main view of connection settings. 4. Select Internet tel. > Options > New profile . Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To use the c reated profile for connecting to th e internet call service automatically, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel. > Preferred profile . To log in to the intern et call service manually, select Registratio n > When needed , and Transport type > UDP or TCP in the S IP set tings when creating an int e rnet call profile. Connect to th e internet ca ll service T o m a k e o r r e c e i v e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l , y o u r d e v i c e m u s t be connected t o an internet call service. If you have selected auto matic login, your device automatically connects to the interne t ca ll service. If you log in to the service manually, sele ct an available network from the list and Select . When you are conn ected to an inte rnet call service, is shown in th e standby mode. The list of network s is refreshed automa tically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select Option s > Refresh . Use this option if y our WLAN access point is not shown. To select an internet call service for outgoing calls if the device is c o nnected to more than one service , select Options > Chan ge service . To configure new services, select Options > Configure ser vice . This option is shown only if there are servic es that have not been conf igured. 121 Make calls
To save the network to wh ich you are c urrently connected, select Optio ns > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star in the list of networks. To connect to an internet call servi ce using a hidden WLAN, select Option s > Use hidden network . To end the connection to an internet call service, select Options > Disconnect from serv. . Make internet calls When you ha ve activat ed the int ernet call feat ure, you can make an internet call from a ll applications where you can make a regular voic e call. For example, in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and se lect Call > Options > Internet call . T o m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l i n t h e s t a n d b y m o d e , e n t e r the phone number or internet address, an d press the call key. T o m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l t o an address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # fo r a few seconds to clear the displ ay and to switch the device from the numb er mode to the let ter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To make an internet ca ll from Contacts, press , select Contacts , scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Internet call . To make an internet ca ll from the log, press , select Tools > Log and the log typ e, scroll to the desired contact, and select Opt ions > Internet call . Service settings Press , select Tools > Connectivity > Interne t tel. > Options > Settings , and select the default settings or service-specific settings. To set internet call as th e preferred c all type for all outgoing calls, select Default call type > Interne t call . When your device is connected to an internet call service, al l calls are made as in ternet calls. To log in automatically to the internet call service, select Login type > Aut omatic . If you use the automatic login type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for WLANs, which increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To log in manually to the inte rnet call s ervice, s elect Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the internet cal l service and th e networks detected by the internet call servic e, select Saved conn. network s . To define the serv ice-sp ecific settings, select Edit service set tings . This option is only available if a 122 Make calls
service-specific software plug-in has been in stalled in the device. Log The log stores informa tion about th e communication history of the de vice. The device registers missed and receiv ed calls only if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on, and within the network serv ice area. Recent calls Press , an d sele ct Tools > Log . To monitor the ph one number s of missed, received, and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls onl y if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on, and within the network serv ice area. To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the rece nt calls mai n view. To cl ear one of the call registers, open the register you w ant to erase, and select Option s > Clea r list . To clear an individual event, op en a register, sc roll to the event, an d press C . Call duration Press , and select Tools > Log . To monitor the approximate du ration of your incoming and ou tgoing cal ls, select Call dura tion . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration ti mers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you n eed the lo ck code. Packet data Press , an d sel ect Tools > Log . To check the amount of dat a sent and rec e ived during packet data c onnections, select Packet data . For example, you may b e charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Press , an d sel ect Tools > Log > Re cent ca lls . Icons in the log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed communicat ion events 123 Make calls
To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and WLAN connections registered by the device, scroll righ t. Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connection s, are logged as one communication even t. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or web pages are shown as pack et data conn ections. To add an un known phone numbe r from the log to your contacts, select Opti ons > Save to Co ntacts . To filter the log, select Op tions > Filt er and a filter. To erase the conten ts of the log, re cent ca lls register, and messaging delivery reports permanent ly, selec t Options > Clea r log . Select Yes to confirm. To remove a single event f rom one of the recent calls logs, press C . To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, rece nt calls registe r, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip: In the details view , you can copy a ph one number to the c lipboard, and paste it into a text message, for exa mple. Se lect Options > Copy nu mber . To view from the pa cket data c ounter how much data is transferred and how long a certai n packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event ind icated by Pack. , and select Options > View details . 124 Make calls
Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can sa ve and update contact information, such as ph one numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your con tacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Yo u can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same t ime. Save and edit name s and numbers 1. Press , and select Cont acts > Optio ns > New c ont act . 2. Fill i n the fiel ds that you want , and select Done . To edit co ntact card s, scroll to the contact card you want to edit, and select Opti ons > Edit . You can also search for the desire d contact by entering the first letters of the name to th e search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on t he display. Tip: To add and edit contact cards, you can also use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia Nseries PC S uite. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open th e contact card, and sel ect Options > Edit > Option s > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail im a ge is shown when th e contact ca lls. Manage names and numbers To ad d a cont act to a g roup, s elect Options > Add to group (shown only i f you hav e created a group) . To check to which groups a cont act belong s, sele ct the conta ct and Option s > Belongs t o groups . To delete a c ontact card, sele ct a card, and press C . To delete several contact cards at the same time, select Options > Ma rk/Unmar k to mark the desired contact cards, and press C to delete. To send con tact info rmatio n, select the card you want to send, Option s > Send , and the desired option . To listen to the voice ta g assigned to the contact, select a co ntact card an d Options > Play voice tag . 125 Contacts (phonebook)
Default numbers and addresses Press , and select Contacts . You can assign defa ult numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily cal l or send a message to the co ntact to a certain number or address. The d efault number is also used in v oice dialling. 1. In the contacts list , select a contact. 2. Select Option s > Defaults . 3. Select a defaul t to which y ou want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an a ddress you want to set as a default. The default number or addre ss is underlined in the contact card. Add ringing tones for contacts Press , and select Contacts . To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following: 1. Press the scroll key to op en a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2. Selec t Option s > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3. Select the rin ging tone yo u want to use for the individual contac t or the members of the selected group. When a contact or group member calls you, the device pl ays the chose n ringing t one (if the ca llerâÂÂs telephon e number is sent with t he call and your device recognises it). To remove the rin ging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts To copy names and number s from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Con tacts > Opt ions > SIM contacts > SIM directo ry , the names you want to copy, and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contacts, select the names yo u want to cop y and Op tions > Copy to SIM directory , or Options > Copy > To SI M directory . Only the cont act card fiel ds supporte d by your SIM card are cop ied. 126 Contacts (phonebook)
SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service p rovider or other v e ndor. To see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card, select Op tions > SIM contacts > SIM directory . In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Option s > SIM contacts > Fixed dia l contacts . This setting is only shown if supp orted by your SIM card. To restrict calls from your devi ce to se lecte d phon e numbers, select Options > Activate fi xed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Co ntact your service provi der if you do not have the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Option s > New S IM c ont act . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use fixed dialling, packe t data connections are not possibl e, except wh en sending text messages over a packet data connection . In this case, the message centre number and the recipientâ s phone number mu st be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixed dialling is activated, calls may be possible to the offici al emergency nu mber programmed into your device. Manage contac t groups Create co ntact groups 1. In Contacts, scroll right to open the grou ps list. 2. Select Options > Ne w gr oup . 3. Write a name for the grou p or use the default name, and s elect OK . 4. Select the group and Option s > Add members . 5. Scroll to a con tact, and press the scroll key to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the cont acts you want to add. 6. To add the co ntacts to the group, select OK . To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the n ew name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1. In the grou ps list, sele ct th e group yo u want to modify. 2. Scroll to the c ontact, and select Options > Remove from group . 127 Contacts (phonebook)
3. To remove the contact f rom the group , select Yes . 128 Contacts (phonebook)
Office folder Quickoffice With Quickoffice, y ou can view .doc, .xls, .ppt, and .txt documents. All file formats or features are not supported. Apple Macintosh is not supported. To use the Quickoffice applications, press , and select Ap plicati ons > Office > Quick office . A li st of available files in the .doc, . xls, .ppt, and .txt file formats opens. To open Quickword, Qu icksheet, Quickpoint, or Quickm anager, use the scroll key to scroll to th e tabs. If you experience problems wi th Quick word, Quicksheet, Q uickpoint, or Quickmanager, visit www.quickoffice.com for more information. Support is also available by sending an e-mail to supportS60@quickoffice .com. Quickword With Quickword, you can view na tive Microsoft Word do cument s with yo ur dev ice. Quickword supports the viewin g of documents saved in .doc and .txt form ats created wit h Microsoft Word 97, 2000, XP, an d 2003. Not all va riations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quic kword that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Option s > Upgrade t o edit . The upgrade is chargeable. Quicksheet With Qui ckshee t, you can view nativ e Micros oft Excel files with your devic e. Quickshe et supports the viewing of spreadshee t files saved in .xls format created with Microsoft Excel 97, 2000 , XP, or 2003. No t all variations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quicksheet that suppo rts editing, when you have a file open, select Option s > Upgrade t o edit . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickpoint With Qui ckpoin t, you can v iew native Micros oft PowerPoint presentations with your device. 129 Office folder
Quickpoi nt supports th e viewing of presentati ons saved in .ppt format created with Microsoft PowerPoint 2000, XP, and 2003. Not all variations or features of the mentioned file forma ts are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickpoint that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Up grade to edit . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickmanager With Quickmanager, you can download software, including updates, u pgrades, and othe r useful applica tions. You ca n pay for the downloads by phone bill or credit card. Notes Press , and select Application s > Office > Notes . To write a note, start entering the text. The n ote editor opens automatically. To o pe n a n ot e , s cr ol l to it, and press the scroll key. To send a note to other compatible device s, select Options > Send . To delete a no te, press C . Tip: To delete severa l notes, select Options > Mark/Unm ark and the notes, and press C . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchroni sation . Se lect Start to start synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the n ote. Adobe PDF reader Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Adobe PDF . With the PD F reader you can re ad PDF documents on the display of your device; searc h for text in the documents; modify settings , such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Converter Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Converter . With Converter, you can convert me asures from one unit to another. The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1. In the Ty pe field, select th e measure you w ant to use. 130 Office folder
2. In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. 3. I n t h e n e x t U n i t f i e l d , s e l e c t t h e u n i t t o w h i c h y o u want to convert. 4. In the first Amount field, en ter the value you want to convert. The other Amount fiel d changes automatically to show the co nverted value. Set base currency and exchange rates Select Type > Cu rrency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make currency convers ions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change ba se currency, yo u must enter new exchan ge rate s because a ll previously se t exchange rate s are cleared. Zip manager Press , and select Applications > Of fice > Zip . With Zip manag er, you can c reate new archive file s to store compressed .zip file s; add single or multiple compressed files or director ies to an archive; set, clear, o r change the archive p assword for p rotected archives; and cha nge settings, such as compression level and file name encoding. Barcode reader Press , an d sel ect Applications > Office > Barcode . Use the Barc ode reader app lication to dec ode different types of codes (such as codes in magazines). The codes may contain information such as URL links, e-mail addresses, and phone numbers. To scan a code, activate the main camera and Scan code . Set the code between the red lines on the display. The application attempts to scan and deco de the code, and th e decoded information appears on the display. To save the scanned data, select Options > Save . The data is saved in .bcr format. To view previously saved, decoded inform ation in the main vi ew, selec t Saved data . To open a code, press the scroll key. When viewing the decoded information, the different links, U RL links, phone nu mbers, and e- mail addresses are indicated by icons on the top of the display in the direct ion t hey ap pear i n the decode d inform ation. In the Saved data view, select Opti ons to scan new codes or use the decoded information. 131 Office folder
The device reverts to th e standby mode to save battery power if the barcode reader cannot be activa ted or if no keys are pre ssed for 1 minute . To continue scanning or viewing saved informati on, press the scroll key. 132 Office folder
Applications folder Calculator Press , an d sele ct Applications > Calculator . Note: This calculat or has limited accura cy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, ente r the first number of t he calculation. Select a funct i on such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the ca lcul atio n, and sel ect = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered . The result of the calculation remains in the ed itor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. To save the results of a calculation, select Opti ons > Memory > Sa ve . The saved result replaces the previously st ored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a calcul ation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved result, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the de vice does not clear the memory . You can recall the last save d result the next time you open the Calculator application. Application manager With Application manager, you can see th e software packages installed in yo ur device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. Press , and selec t Applications > App. mgr. . You can install two type s of applications and software to your device: â J2ME applications based on Java technology with the extension . jad or .jar â Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the extension .sis or .sisx Only install software spec ificall y desig ned f or you r device: Nokia N82. Softwa re provider s will often refer to the official mode l number of this product: Nokia N82-1. 133 Applications fol der
Install applicatio ns and software Installation files may be transferred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to yo u in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachment or using other connectivity methods, suc h as Bluetoot h connect ivity. Yo u can use Nokia Application Inst aller in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an applicat ion to your device. If y ou use Microsoft Windows Expl orer to transfer a file, save the file to a co mpatib le memory car d (loca l disk). indicates a .sis or .sisx application, a Java applica tion, that the application is not fully installed, and that the applicat ion is installed on the memory card. Importan t: Only install and use appl ications and other software from trusted sources, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. Before installation , note the following: â To view the applicatio n type, versi on number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View det ails . To display the security ce rtificate deta ils of the application, in Detai ls: , scroll to Certif icates , and select View deta ils . See "Certificate management," p. 143 . â If you install a file that contains an up date or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original appl ication if you have the original installati on file or a full backup copy of the removed software pa ckage. To restore the original application , remo ve the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup c opy. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When y ou are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an a pplication or software, do the following: 1. To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a compatible memory card (if inserted) in File manager, or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installati on file. 2. In Application manager, select Options > Install . In other applica tions, scroll to the installation file, and sel ect it to start the installation. 134 Applications fol der
You cannot cancel the installation after you have started it. During installation, th e device shows information about the progress of t he installation. If you in stal l an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continu e installation only if you are sure of the orig in and contents of th e application. To start an installed applic ation, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applicati ons folder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installed or removed and wh en, se lect Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and oper ation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation fi les (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient me mory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up i nstallation fil es to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files f r o m t h e d e v i c e m e m o r y . I f t h e . s i s f i l e i s a m e s s a g e attachment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox. See "File manager," p. 137 . Remove applications and software Press , an d sel ect Applications > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Option s > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, yo u can only reinstall it if you ha ve the original software package or a f ull backup of the r emove d softw are pac kage. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents crea ted with that softw are. If another software pa ckage depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the document ation of th e install ed software p a ckage for details. Setting s Press , an d sel ect Applications > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Software installation â S elect whethe r Symbian software that has n o verified digital signature can be installe d. 135 Applications fol der
â Online certificate check â Select to check the online certificates before insta lling an application. â Default we b address â Set the default address used when checking on line certificat es. Some Java application s may require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. In the Ap plication manager main view, scroll to an a pplication , and select Options > Open to change settings re lated to that specific applica tion. 136 Applications fol der
Tools folder File manager To browse files and folders in the memory, press , and select Tools > File mgr. . When you open File man ager, the de vice memory view ( ) opens. S croll right to o pen the memo ry card view ( ), if available. To see how much memo ry different data t ypes use, select Options > Memory details . To find a file, select Opt i ons > Find and the memory from which to se arch. Enter a search text that matches the file name. To mark files, select Options > Ma rk/Unmar k > Mark or Mark all . To move or copy the files, select Option s > Move to fol der or Copy to folder . Memory card tool A compatible memory card may already be inserted in your device. Press , and s elect Tools > Utilitie s > Memory . To see how much memo ry different data t ypes use, select Options > Memo ry details . To back up information fr om the device memory to a compatible memory card, select Options > Back up phon e memory . The device notifies you if there is not enough free space to create a back up. To restore informatio n from the compa tible memory card to the device memory, selec t Option s > Restore from card . When a memory card is reformatted, all data on the card is permanently lost . Some memory cards are supplied pref ormatted and othe rs require formatting; consult your retailer. The memory card supplied with your de vice does not need to be formatted. To format a memo ry card, select Options > Format memory card and Yes to confirm. Voice commands Press , an d sel ect Tools > Utilities > Voice comm. . You can use enhance d voic e commands to control your devi ce. See "Voice dialling," p. 115 . 137 Tools folder
To activate enhanced voic e commands to start application s and profiles, you must open the Voice commands application and its Profiles folder; the device creates voice tags for the applications and profiles . To use enh anced voice commands, press and hold the right select ion key in the standby mode, and speak a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, in the Voice commands main view, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To change voi ce comman d sett ings, se lect Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags and commands in the selected de vice language, select Synthesise r > Off . To reset voice reco g nition learning, for example, when the main use r of the device ha s changed, select Rem ove voice adapts. . Sync Press , and select Tools > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text me ssages, or contacts with various compatible applic ations on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisation settings in a special message. In the Sync main vie w, you can see the different synchronisation profiles. A synchroni sation profile contains the necessary set tings to synchronise data in your device with a remote database on a server or compatible dev ice. To synchronise data, sele ct Options > Synchro nise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Device manager Press , and select Tools > Utilit ies > Device mgr. . Use Devi ce manager t o connect t o a server and receive configuration sett ings for your device, to create new server pr ofiles, or to view and manage existing server profiles. You may receive serv er profiles and different configuration setting s from your service providers and company information managemen t department. These configurat ion settings may 138 Tools folder
include connec tion and other settin gs used by different applications in your devic e. Scroll to a server profile, and select Optio ns and from the following: â Start configuration â Co nnect to th e server and receive con figuration settings for your device. â New server prof ile â Create a server profile. To delete a server profil e, scroll to it, and press C . 139 Tools folder
Settings Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General settings In general settin gs, you can edit the g eneral settings of your devic e or restore the device to original default settin gs. You can adjust time and date settings also in th e clock. See "Clock ," p. 97 . Personalisation settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Per sonalisation . You can edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functi ons of your device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. See "Themes," p. 94 . Voice comms. opens the settings for the Voice commands application. See "Voice commands," p. 137 . Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clock, and currently active profile. Display â Light sensor â Scroll left or right to adjust the light sensor that observes the lighting conditio ns and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor may cause the display to flicker in low ligh t. â Font size â Adjust the size of the text a nd icons on the display. â Power saver time -out â Select the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. â Welcome note / logo â The welc ome note or logo is displayed briefly each ti me you switch on the device. Se lect Defa ult to us e the defau lt image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery. â Light time-out â Select a time-out after which the backlight of the display is switch ed off. â Rotate screen â Change the setting for automatic display rotation . In most applications, the display rotates automatically between portrait and landscape modes based on the orientation of the de vice. To ensure that the automatic display rotation works, ho ld the 140 Settings
device in an upright position. Automatic rotation is not functioning, if you change the display rotation setting manual ly in an application. When you e xit th e ap plication, automatic rotation is activated again. Standby mode â Active standby â Activate shortcuts to application s in the standby mode. â Shortcuts â Assign a shortcut to the selection keys in the standby mode. If the active standby is se t off, you can also assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key. â Active standby apps. â If the active standby is set on, select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the ac tive standby. â Operator logo â This setting is only available if you ha ve receive d and saved a n operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Changing the settings for the phone lang uage or writing language af fects every application in your device, and th e change remains eff ective unti l you change these settings a gain. â Phone langu age â Change the language of the display text in your device. This also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in c alculations. Automatic selects the language according to the informat ion on y our SI M card. Af ter you change the display text langu age, the device restarts. â Writing language â Change the writing language. This affects the characters availa ble when writing te xt and the predictive text dictionary used. â Predi ctive text â Set predictive text in put on or off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary i s not available for a ll languages. Enhanceme nt setting s Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > General > Enhancement . Some enhan cement conne ctors indicate w hich type of enhancem ent is connecte d to the device. See "Display indi cators," p. 21 . The avai lable settings depend on the type of enhancement. S elect an enhancement and from the following: â Default pr ofile â Set the profile th at you want activated each time y ou connect a ce rtain compatible enhancemen t to your device. â Automatic answer â Sel ect whether you want the device to answer an incoming call automat ically afte r 5 seconds. If the ring ing type 141 Settings
is set to Beep once or Silent, automatic answer is disabled. â Lights â Set whe ther lights remai n on or are switched off after the time-ou t. This setting is not available for all enhancement s. TV-out settings To change th e settin gs for a TV-out connection, select TV-Out and from the follo w ing: â Default prof ile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connec t a Nokia Vide o Connectivity Cable to your device. â TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs. â TV system â Select the analogue video signal system that is compat ible with your TV. â Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flic ker on all TV screens. Security settings Phone and SIM Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card . â PIN code request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivati ng the PIN code request m a y not be allowed by some SIM cards. â PIN code , PIN2 code , and Loc k code â You can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 c ode. These codes can on ly includ e the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forg et the PIN or the PIN2 code, co ntact your service pr ovider. If you forget the lock code, contac t a Nok ia Care point or you r service provider. See "Access codes," p. 16 . Avoid using access codes similar to th e emergency n umbers to pr event acc i dental dialling of the emergency number. â Keypad aut olock period â Select whether the keypad is lock ed when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left sele ction key, th en * . â Phone autolock peri od â To avoid unauthorised use, you can se t a time-out after which the d evice aut omatical ly locks. A loc ked device cannot be used until th e correct lock code is entered. To turn off the aut olock period , select None . Tip: To lock th e device ma nually, pr ess the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phon e . â Lock if SIM card changed â You can se t the device to ask for the loc k code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device 142 Settings
maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. â Closed user group â You can spe cify a group of people to w hom you can call and who can call you (network service). â Confirm SIM services â You can se t the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certificate management Press , an d sele ct Tools > Settings > General > Security > Certificate managemen t . Digital certificate s do not guarantee safe ty; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate manage ment main view, you can see a list of authority certificates that are stored in your devi ce. Scroll rig ht to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that invol ve transferring confidential information. They should al so be used if you want to reduce t he risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when down loading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remot e connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The ex istence of a certificate does not offer any prote ction by itself; t he certif icate manager mu st contain corre ct, authentic, o r trusted ce rtificates fo r increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid ye t" is shown even if the certific ate should be valid, c heck that th e current date a nd ti me in y our de vice a re co rrect. Before ch anging an y cert ificate settings, you must make sure that y ou really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to the listed owner. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authe nticity You can only be sure of the correct ide ntity of a server when the signatu re and the period of validity of a server ce rtificate have be en checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is n ot authentic or if you do not hav e the correct se curity certif icate in your d evice. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Cer tificate detail s . When you open certificate de tails, the validi ty of the certific ate is checked, and one o f the following notes may be displayed: 143 Settings
â Certificate not trusted â You have not set any application to us e the cer tificate. â Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the select ed certificate. â Certificate not valid yet â The period of validit y has not ye t begun for th e selected certi ficate. â Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Cont act the certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owne r of the certificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an au thority certificate, and select Options > Trus t settings . De pending o n the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certific ate is shown. For example: â Symbian installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Interne t : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. â App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new J ava⢠application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to c h ange th e value. Security modu le Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Security module . T o v i e w o r e d i t a s e c u r i t y module (if availabl e), scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view deta iled info rmation abou t a security module, scroll to it, and sele ct Options > Se curity details . Restore original settin gs Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Factory s ettings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do th is, you need the lock code. After resetting , the device may take a longer time to power on. Document s an d files are unaffected. Positi oning sett ings Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Posi tioning . Position ing meth ods â Integrate d GPS â Use the inte grated GPS receiver o f your devi ce. â Assisted GP S â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS). â Bluetoot h GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver wi th Bluet ooth co nnectivit y. 144 Settings
â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positio ning ser ver To define an access point, and positioni ng server for A-GPS, select Position ing ser ver . The positioning server may be prese t by your service prov ider, and you may not be able to edit the setting s. Phone settings In phone settings, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Phone > Call . â Send my caller ID â You can se t your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service prov ider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network servic e). â Call waiting â If you have act ivated call waiting (network se rvice), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Set the function on ( Activate) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the funct ion is activ a ted ( Check status ). â Internet call waiting â S e l e ct Act ivat ed to be notified of a n ew incoming internet call while you have a call in progre ss. â Internet call alert â S elect On to be alerted for incomin g internet cal ls. If you select Off , you are not alert ed, but a notification about missed calls appears. â Default call type â To set inter n et calls as the default c all type whe n making calls, select Internet call . If an internet ca ll service is not available, a regular voice call is started instead. â Reject call with SMS â To send a text message to a caller informing why you coul d not answer the call, select Yes . â Message te xt â W r i t e a t e x t t o b e s e n t i n a t e x t message whe n you reject a call. â Image in video call â If video is not se nt during a video call, yo u can sel ect a still imag e to be displayed instead. â Automatic redial â Select On , and y o ur device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful c all a ttem pt. T o st op automatic redialling, press th e end ke y. â Show call duration â Activate this setting if you want the leng th of a call to be displ ayed during the call. â Speed dial â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the number key s (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See "Speed dial a phone number ," p. 115 . 145 Settings
â Anykey answer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, e xcept th e left and ri ght se lection keys, th e power k ey, and the end key . â Line in use â This setting (network service) is shown only if the S IM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which p hone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answer ed i rresp ectiv e of t he selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this netw ork service, you are not able to mak e calls. Wh en line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip: To switch between th e phone lines, press and hold # in the standby mode. â Line change â To prevent lin e selectio n (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phon e > Call divert . Call divert al lows you to divert yo ur incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact y our service provider. Select which ca lls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. Set the option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is act ivated ( Check sta tus ). Several diverting op tions can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown i n the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be activ e at the same time. Call barri ng Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phon e > Call barring . Call barring (network servic e) allows you to restrict the calls that you m ake or receive with the devi ce. To change the se ttings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring and call diverting cannot be activ e at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergenc y numbers. Voice call barring Select the desired barrin g option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check stat us ). C all barring affects all calls, in cluding data calls. 146 Settings
Internet call barring To select whether anon ymou s calls are allowed from the internet, set Anon ymous call ba rring on or off. Network settings Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Phone > Network . Your device c an automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GS M network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . â Network mode â Sele ct which network to u se. If you select Dual mode , the devic e uses the GSM or UMTS network aut omatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between th e wireless service providers. Contact your network se rvice provide r for details and roaming costs. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. â Operator selection â Select Automati c to set the device to searc h for and select one of the availa ble net works, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e sele cted network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. A roaming agreement is an agreement be tween two or more service providers to enable th e users of one service prov ider to use the servic es of other service providers. â Cell info display â Select On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network ( MCN) technology and to act ivate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection setting s, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. You can also edit settings for Bl uetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth connectivity application. See "Settings," p. 71 . You can also edit se ttings for data cable connec tions in the USB application. See "USB," p. 74 . Data connections and access points Your device supp orts packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM n etwork. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be act i ve at the same time, and acce ss points can share a data 147 Settings
connection. In the UMTS network, data con nections remain active during voice calls. You can al so use a WLAN data conne ction. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several app lications can use the same internet access point. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define differe nt kinds of access points, such as the following : â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet access point (IAP ) to send and receive e- mail and connect to the internet Check the t ype of access poin t you need w ith your service provider for the se rvice you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contac t your service provider. Access points Create a new access point Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset fo r your device by your service provide r, and you m ay not be able to chan ge, create , edit, or remove th em. indicates a prot ecte d access point. indicates a packet data access point. indicates a WLAN access point. Tip: You can c reate internet acce ss points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new access point , select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an access point, select Options > Edit . Follow the instructions from your service provider. â Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. â Data be arer â Select the data connection type. Depending on th e data connecti on you select, only certain setting fields are av ailable. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be def ined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed ot herwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection , your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access poin ts > Option s > Edit or New access point . 148 Settings
Follow the instructions fr om your service pro vider. â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provi der. â User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. â Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . â Passwo rd â A password may b e needed to make a data connection a nd is usually provided by the service provider. â Authentication â S e l e c t Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. â Home page â Dependi ng on the acc ess po int you are sett ing up, ente r the web addre ss or the address of the multimedia messagin g centre. Select Op tions > Advanced settings to change the following settings: â Network type â Select t h e internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. Th e other settings depend on the selected network type. â Phone IP address (for IPV4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS address â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider . Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses. â Prox y server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port n umber of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points > Option s > Edit or New access point . Follow the instructions from the WLAN service provider. â WLAN network name â Sele ct Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing net work, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. â Network status â Define whe ther the network name is displayed. â WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc networ k and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN acc ess point devi ce is not need ed. In an ad hoc ne twork, all devices must use the same WLAN network name . â WLAN security mode â Select th e encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you sele ct Open ne twork , no 149 Settings
encryption is used. The WEP, 8 02.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. To enter the settings for t h e selected secu rity mode, select WLAN security settings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in use â Select the wired eq uivalent privacy (WEP) key n umber. You can crea te up to four WEP keys. The sa me settings must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â Authentication type â Select Open or Shared for the aut h entication typ e between your device and the WLA N access point device. â WEP key settings â Enter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hexadeci mal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the sele cted format). Security se ttings for 802.1 x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA2 â Select the means of authentication: EAP to use an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-in, or Pre- shared ke y to use a passwor d. Complete the appropriate settings: â EAP plug- in settings â Enter the settings as your service provider instru cts. â Pre-sh ared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled dev ices are allowed to establis h a connection in this mode. Advanced WLAN settings Select Option s > Advanced setti ngs and fro m the following: â IPv4 settings â En ter the IP address o f your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Contact your intern et service prov ider for these addresses. â IPv6 settings â D e f i n e t h e t y p e o f D N S a d d r e s s . â Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel n umber (1- 11) man ually, select User defined . â Proxy server addres s â Enter the a ddress for the proxy serv er. â Proxy port numbe r â Enter the p roxy port number. Packet data sett ings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection . â Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the de vice registers to the packet 150 Settings
data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e- mail) is quick er. If there is no packet data coverage, the devic e periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the devi ce uses a pack et data connection only if you start an application or action that need s it. â Access point â The access poin t name is neede d to use your device as a pac ket data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network service) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN settings Press , an d sele ct Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Wireless LA N . â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed in the standby mode when a wireless LAN is av ailable. â Scan for networ ks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select ho w often th e device searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, selec t Option s > Advanced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommende d. SIP settings Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > SIP settings . Session Initiation Proto col (SIP) settings are neede d for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Internet ca ll set tings Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Internet tel. . To crea te a n ew interne t call pro file, select Option s > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Opt ions > Edit . Configur ations Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Configurations . You may receive trusted serve r settings from your service provider in a co nfigurat ion message. You can save view or delete these settings in configurations. 151 Settings
Access point name co ntrol Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access p oint name control service , you can restrict packet data co nnections and allow your device t o use o nly certain pack et data acce ss points. This setting is only available if your SIM card supports the access po int control service. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the correspo nding opti on. To ch ange the opti ons, you need your PIN2 code. Cont act your service provider for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of so me of the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . To edit the settings, you can also select Options > Settings in each application. 152 Settings
Troubleshooting Q: What is my pass word for the lock, PIN, or PUK code s? A: The defau lt lock cod e is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code , contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have no t received such a code, contact your netw ork service provider. For information about passwor ds, contact your access point provider, for example, a commerc ial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provi der. Q: How do I close an a pplication that is not responding? A: Press and hold . To close an application, scroll to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Mu sic player, se lect it fro m the list, and Options > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protect ion windows are clean. Q: Why do mis sing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the s creen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteri stic of this type of display. Some displays may contai n pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, no t a fault. Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS connec tion? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and loca tion information in th is user guide. See "Posi tioning (GPS)," p. 51 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my f riendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth conn ectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also th at the distance between the two de vices is not ov er 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the de vices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Blue tooth connection? A: If another de vice is connected to your device, you can eith er end the conn ection using the other device or by deactivati ng Bluetooth connecti vity. 153 Troubleshootin g
Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my device in the home ne twork? A: Make sure that you h ave configured the home network sett ings, conten t sharing is turned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my home network connection stops working? A: Switch off the wirele ss LAN (WLAN) connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does n ot help, restart y our compatible PC and your device. If the connec tion still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN setti ngs in both your compatible PC and dev ice. See "Wireless LAN," p. 68 . Se e "Conne ction settings," p. 147 . Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the hom e netwo rk? A: If you are using a firewall applica tion in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use t he external conn ection (y ou can add Home media server to the firewall application's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the firewall applicatio n allows traffic to the followin g ports: 1900, 49152, 49 153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devices have a built-in firewall. In such cases, check that the firewall in the access point device does not block t raffic to th e followin g ports: 1900, 49152, 49 153, and 49154. Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) ac cess point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SS ID if you know the correc t SSID, and have created a WLAN Internet access point for the network on you r Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your No kia dev ice switche s off when you are not trying to connect, not conn ected to another access po int, or not scanning for availab le networ ks. T o further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in th e background. WLAN switches off in betw een background scan s. To change the background scan settings: 1. Press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Wireless LAN . 2. To increase the background scan time interval, adjust the time in Sca n for network s . To stop 154 Troubleshootin g
background scans, select Show WLAN availabi lity > Never . 3. To save your changes, press Back . When Scan for networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN network s, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: How can I save my data before deleting it ? A: To save data, use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to make a back-up c opy of all data to a compatible co mputer; send images to your e-mail address, then save the images to your computer; or se nd data using Bluetoot h connect ivity to a compa tible device. Yo u can also store data on a compatible memory card. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not ha ve a phone number, an address, or an e-mail address. Press , select Contacts , and edit th e contact ca rd. Q: How can I en d the data connection when th e device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multim edia message centre. To stop the devi ce from making a data connection, press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Multim edia m e ssage > Mult imedia retrieval and Manual to have the multimedia messaging centre save me ssages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new mu ltimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any netw ork connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the d evice to use a packet data connec tion only if you st art an application or action that needs it, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, swit ch the device o ff, and switch it on again. Q: Why do I have pro blems conn ecting the device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have the latest version of Nokia Nseries PC Suite an d that it is insta lled and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use No kia Nseries PC Suite, se e the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or v isit the Nokia support page s. Q: Can I use my de vice as a fax modem with a compat ible P C? A: You cann ot use your de vice as a fax mode m. However, with call divert ing (network servi ce), you can divert i ncoming f ax calls to another pho ne number. 155 Troubleshootin g
Nokia original enhancements Warning : Use only batteries, chargers, and enhanceme nts approved by No kia for use with th is particular model. T h e use of any othe r types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. An extensive rang e of enhancements is available for your device. Please visit www.nokia-asia.com/ enhancements for more details. For availability of the e nhancements, please check with your local dealer. Enhancements Practical rul es about acce ssories and enhanceme nts â Keep all accessories and enhancemen ts out of the reach of small children. â When you disconnect th e power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. â Check regularly that enhancements instal led in a vehicle are mounted and are operating p roperly. â Installation of any comple x car enhancement s must be made by qual ified perso nnel only. Battery Type Talk tim e Standby BP-6MT Important: Battery talk and standby times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, network condi tions, feature s used, battery age and condition, temperatures to which battery is exposed, use in digita l mode, and many other f a c t o r s . T h e a m o u n t o f t i m e a d e v i c e i s u s e d f o r c a l l s will affect its standby ti me. Likewise, the amount of time that the device is t urned on and in the standby mode wil l affect its ta lk time. 156 Nokia or iginal enhan cements Up to minutes (WCDMA/GSM) 0 19 6 2 0 / Up to hours / 2 1 0 2 5 2 (WCDMA/GSM)
Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will event u ally wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, re place the batt ery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery onl y with Nokia approved cha rgers designated for this device. If a replacement bat t ery is being used for the first time or if the battery h as not been use d for a prolonged perio d, it may be necessary to connect the charger, the n discon nect and reconnect it t o begin charging the batt ery. Unplug the charger fr om the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connect ed to a charger, since ov ercharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged b a ttery w ill lose i ts cha rge over time. If the battery is completely disch arged, it may take several minutes before the charging indica tor appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpos e. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circu it the battery. A ccidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic ob ject such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) termi nals of the battery. (These look like metal st rips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pock et or purse. Short- circuiting the ter minals may damage the battery or the conn ecting ob ject. Leaving th e battery in hot or cold pl aces, such a s in a closed ca r in summer or winter co nditions, wil l reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always tr y to keep th e battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A de vice w ith a hot or co ld battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully ch arged. Battery perfo rmance is partic ularly limited in temper ature s well below freezing. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they may explode. Batt eries may also exp lode if damaged. Dispose of batteries accord ing to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. 157 Battery information
Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery le ak, do not allow the liqu id to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In th e event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immedi ately with water, or seek m e dical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nok ia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and inspect the ho logram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the auth enticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe t hat your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorised No kia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect th e battery for au thenticity. If authentici ty cannot be verified, return the battery to the p lace of purch ase. Authen ticate h ologram 1. When you look at the hologram on th e label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo w hen looking from another angle . 2. When you angle the hologram lef t, right, down and up, you shou ld see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authen tic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery wit h the hologram on th e labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery . Take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The us e of a battery that is not approv ed by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any appro val or warra nty applying to the device. 158 Battery information
To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery . 159 Battery information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of sup erior design and craftsmanship and shoul d be treated with care. The following sug gestions w ill help you protect your warranty coverage. â Keep th e device dry. Precipitatio n, humidity , and all types of liquids or moisture ca n contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely befo re replacing it. â Do not use or store th e device in dust y, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. â Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatu res can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store the de vice in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circui t boards. â Do not atte mpt to open the de vice other than as instructed in thi s guide. â Do not drop, knock, or shake the d evice. Rough handling can break int ernal circuit boards and fine mechanics. â Do not use harsh chemic als, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the d evice. â Do not paint the dev ice. Paint can clog the moving parts and p revent prop er operation. â Use a soft, clean, d ry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Use only the suppli ed or an appr oved replacement anten na. Un authorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. â Use chargers indoors. â A l w a y s c r e a t e a b a c k u p o f d a t a y o u w a n t t o k e e p , such as contacts and calendar notes. â To reset the devi ce from time to t i me for optimum performance, power off the device and remove th e battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any en hancement. If any de vice 160 Care a nd maintenance
is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service fa cility for service. 161 Care a nd maintenance
Additional safety information Small ch ildren Your device and its enha ncements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the n ormal use posit ion against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 centimeters (5/ 8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-w orn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body . To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the netw ork. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above sep arati on distance instructions are followed un til the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magn etic. Metallic mate rials may be attracted to the de vice. Do not place cred it cards or other magnetic storage me dia near the device, because infor mation stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wi reless phones, may inte rfere with the functionality of inad equately protected medical devices. Consu lt a phys ician or t he manufactu rer of the medical d evice to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your d e vice in health care faciliti es when any reg ulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities ma y be using e quipment th at could be sensitive t o external RF energy. Implanted m edical devic es Manufacturers of medica l devices recommend that a minimum separa tion of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches ) should be maint ained betwe en a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoi d potential int erferenc e with the medi cal device. Persons who have such devices should: 162 Additional safety information
â Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inc hes) from the med ical devi ce when the wireless dev ice is turned on. â Not carry th e wireless device in a breast po cket. â Hold the wirele ss device to the ea r opposite the medical devic e to mini mize the pote ntial for interfer ence. â Turn the wireless device off im mediately if ther e is any reason to suspec t that inter ferenc e is taking place. â Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their im planted medical device. If you ha ve any ques tions abo ut using yo ur wireless device with an implanted medical d evice, consult your hea lth care provider . Hearin g aids Some digital wireless de vices may interfere with some hearing aids. If inte rfere nce occurs, co nsult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded elect ronic syste ms in motor vehicles such as elec tronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electron ic speed contro l systems, and air bag systems. For more inform ation, check with the manufacturer, or its repres entativ e, of yo ur vehicle or any equipment th at has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the devi ce or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that al l wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operatin g properly. Do not store or carry flammable liqu ids, gases, or explosive materials in the same co mpartment as the device, its parts, or enhancemen ts. For vehi cles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place ob jects, including installed or portable wireless equipmen t in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wirele ss equipment is improperly inst alled and the air bag inflates, se rious i njury could result. Using your device while flying in ai rcraft is prohibited. Switch off your de vice be fore b oardi ng an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices i n an aircraft may be danger ous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt th e wireless tele phone netw ork, and may be illegal. 163 Additional safety information
Potentially explosive enviro nments Switch off your device wh en in any area with a potentially explosive at mosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would n o r m a l l y b e a d v i s e d t o t u r n o f f y o u r v e h i c l e e n g i n e . Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even dea th. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipm ent in fuel depo ts, storage, and distribution areas; chemical pl ants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosph ere are often, but not always, clea rly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where the air c o ntains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with th e manufacturers of v ehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if th is device can be safely used in th eir vicinity . Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including th is device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landli ne networks, and user- programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditi ons cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely sole ly on any wire less devi ce for essential communications li ke medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end ke y as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for c alls. 3. Enter the off i cial emerge ncy number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in u se, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If th e device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to activate the ph one function be fore you can make 164 Additional safety information
an emergency call . Consult this gui de or your service provider for more information. When making an emergen cy call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the sce ne of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to radio waves . Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidel ines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the p rotection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The expo sure guideline s for mobile de vices emplo y a unit of measureme n t known as the Spec ific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/k ilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the dev ice tr ansmit ting at its hi ghest certif ied power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the po wer required to reach th e network. That amount changes dependin g on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest S AR value under the ICNIRP guidelines f or use of the dev ice at the ear is 0.62 W / kg. Use of device acc essories and en hancements may result in diff erent SAR va lues. SAR va lues may va ry depend ing on nationa l repor ting and tes ting requirements and the netw ork band. Additional SAR information may be provided under produ ct information at www.nokia -asia.com. 165 Additional safety information
Index A access codes 16 access points 69, 148 accessories See enhancem ents activation keys 91 active standby mode 96, 141 active toolbar in camera 29 in galle ry 41 address book See contacts alarm clock 97 alarm, calendar note 98 albums, media 41 anniversary notes 98 answering calls 114 application manager 133 applications 133 attachment s 105, 106 audio messages 102 auto-update for time/ date 97 B backlight time-out 140 barcodes 13 1 battery power saver setting 140 saving power 17 birthda y notes 98 blogs 63, 91 Bluetooth conne ctivity device address 73 device visibility 72 pairing devices 73 receiving data 73 security 72 sending data 72 settings 71 switching on/off 71 bookmarks 64 brightness, di splay 140 browser bookmarks 64 browsing pages 6 1, 63 cache memory 65 downloads 64 security 65 settings 66 C cable connection 74 cache memory 65 calculator 133 calendar 98 call waiting 115 calls 113 answering 114 conference 114 duration of 123 internet calls 122 log for 123 options during 113 recording 92 rejecting 114 settings 145 camera colour 37 flash 32 image quality 36 imaging mode 30 lighting 37 scenes 32 self-timer 33 sequence mode 32 settings 36 166 Index
video mode 35 video quality 38 cell broa dcast messages 100 certificates 143 character encoding 102 charts, sprea dsheet 129 clipboard, copying to 102 clock 96, 97 comput er connections 75 See also data connections conference calls 114 configu ratio n See settings connection manager 70 contact information 15 contac ts copying 126 default information 126 deleting 125 editing 125 groups 127 images in 125 ringing tones 126 saving 125 sending 125 synchronising 138 voice tags 125 conver ter currenc y 130 copying text to clipboard 102 copyright prot ection 91 currency convert er 130 customer service 15 D data connections cable 74 device manager 138 PC connectivity 75 synchronisation 138 date and time 97 declining calls 114 device manager 138 dialled numbers 123 dismissing c alls 114 display settings 140 document applications 129 downloads 64 DRM (digital r ights management) 91 duration of ca lls 123 E e-mail messages 105 end al l calls opt ion 115 enhancements settings 141 Excel, Microsoft 129 F factory settings, restoring 144 feeds, news 63 Flash Player 91 FM radio 84 font settings 140 formatting memory cards 137 G gallery 39 general informati on 1 5 GPS (Glob al Positioning System) 51 grid view of menu s 9 6 H headset 25 help appl ication 15 home ne twork 47 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 22 I IAPs (internet access points) 69 imag es editing 42 printing 45, 46 167 Index
sharing online 46 inbox, message 104 indicato rs and icon s 21 inst allati on of applications 134 internet calls 120, 12 2 connecting 121 making 122 profiles 121, 151 settings 151 internet connecti on 61 See also browser J J2ME Java application support 133 Java script s/ applications 133 K keyguard 22, 142 keypad 22, 142 L landmarks 5 9 language settings 141 light settings 140 list view of menus 96 location information 51 lock co de 16 lockin g keypad 22, 142 loudspe aker 26 M mailbox e-mail 105 video 1 14 voice 114 main menu 96 Maps 53 media Flash Player 9 1 music player 79 radio 8 4 RealPlayer 90 streaming 9 0 voice reco rder 92 meeting notes 98 meetings, setting up 98 memo notes 98, 130 memory cleari ng 18 web cache 65 messages e-mail 105 folders for 100 icon for incoming 104 multimedia 104 settings 107 voice 114 Mini Map 63 MMS (multim edia message service) 102, 104 multimedia menu 23 multimedia messages 102, 104 music player 79 muting sound 114 my numbers 125 N navigation too ls 51 network settings 147 news feeds 63 Nokia contact informati on 15 Nokia Lifeblog 91 Nokia ori ginal enhancements 156 notes 130 O offline mode 26 operator logo 141 options menu for calls 113 outbox, message 100 168 Index
P packet data connection access point settings 148 counters 12 3 settings 150 page overview 63 PDF reader 130 person al certif icates 143 personalisation 94, 140 phonebo ok See contacts photographs See camera PictBridge 45 PIN code 16 PIN2 code 16 positionin g information 51 position ing set tings 144 power saver 140 PowerPoint, Micros oft 129 predictive text entry mode 101 presen tations, multimedia 44, 105, 129 printin g images 45 print baske t 42 product supp ort pages 15 profiles internet call profile 121, 151 offline restrictions 26 proxy setti ngs 149 PUK codes 16 punctuation, text entry 102 Q Quickmanager 130 Quickpoint 129 Quicksheet 129 Quickword 1 29 R radio 84 RealPlayer 90 recording calls 92 sounds 92 recording video clips 35 redial feature 145 rejecting calls 114 remote m ailbox 105 remote SIM mode 74 ringing tones 94, 95 roaming 147 S scenes , imag e and v ideo 32 screen sett ings 140 security certificates 143 web browser 65 WEP 150 WPA 150 security code 16 security module 144 self-timer, camer a 33 sent messages folder 100 service commands 100 service messa ges 105 setting wizard 19 settings access point name control 152 access points 148 applications 152 Bluetooth conne ctivity 7 1 call barring 146 call divert 146 calls 145 camera 36 certificates 143 configuration 151 display 140 enhancemen ts 141 home network 48 internet call 151 language 141 169 Index
network 147 packe t data 150 packe t data access points 148 personalisa tion 140 positioning 144 RealPlayer 90 shortcuts 141 SIP 151 standby 1 41 tv-out 142 Video Centre 78 video sharing 118 web browser 66 WLAN 150, 151 WLAN internet access points 149 shared video 118 shooting mode s, camera 32 shortcuts 141 signature, digital 143 SIM card contacts 127 messages 1 07 SIM card security 142 SIP 151 slide sho w 42 SMS (short message service) 102 software applications 133 software updat e 16 songs 79 speaker phone 26 special characters, text entry 102 speed dialli ng 11 5 standby mode 96, 141 streaming media 90 support 15 Symbian applications 133 synchronisatio n of data 138 T templates, message 103 text entry 101 text messages receiving and reading 104 replying to 104 sending 102 settings 107 SIM messages 107 themes 94 time and date 97 time zone settings 97 time-out for back light 140 tones ring settings 94, 95 settings 140 toolbar 29, 41 transferring data 19 transferr ing music 82 troubles hooting 153 trust settings 144 TV configuration 142 tv-out mode 44 U unlocking keypad 22, 14 2 UPIN code 16 UPnP (Universal Plug and Play architecture) 47 UPUK code 16 USB cable connection 74 V video calls 116, 1 17 options during 117 video clips shared 118 Visual Radio 84 voice ap plica tions 137 voice calls See calls voice commands 115, 137 voice over IP 122 voice over IP (VOIP) 12 0 voice recorder 92 VoIP 122 volume controls 26 170 Index
W wallpaper 94 web connection 61 web logs 63, 91 week settings , calendar 98 welcome 19 welcome note 140 WEP 150 wireless LAN (WLAN) 68 wireless LAN s ettings 151 Word, Microsof t 129 world clock 9 7 WPA 150 Z zip manager 131 zooming 31, 35 171 Index
Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care we b suppor t provid es you w ith mor e infor mation on our on line servic es. INTE RA CTIVE D EMONSTR ATI ONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time , and fin d out more about its feature s. Intera ctive Dem onstrations give step-by -step in structio ns on u sing yo ur phone. USERâ S GUID E The online Userâ s Guide c ontains deta iled informa tion on your ph one. Reme mber to che ck regularly for up dates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone wit h software fo r your ph one and PC. Nok ia PC Suite connects your ph one and PC s o you c an m anage your calen dar, co ntacts , music an d images, w hile other application s complement its use. SETTINGS Certain ph one fun ctions, such as mul timedia mes saging , mobile brow sing and email*, may requir e set tin gs befo re yo u ca n use th em. Have t hem sen t t o yo ur phone free of charge. *Not available on all phones . INTERACTIVE DEMONST RATIONS SOFTWARE USER âÂÂS GU ID E SETTINGS
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE? The Set U p secti on, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps yo u prepare your phone for use. Familiarise yourself with phon e functions and featu res by refer ring to the Guides and Demos s ection at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AN D PC? Connecting your phon e to a compatible PC with the requis ite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite le ts you sy nchr on ise yo ur cal enda r and c ont act s. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR M Y PHONE? Get mor e out of your phone with downloads fr om the Software section at www.nokia-as ia.c om/softwa re . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON QUESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on y our phone and other Nokia products and serv ic es. HOW DO I KEEP UP WIT H NOKIA NEW S? Subscribe online at www.nokia- asia.com/signup an d be the fir st to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connecti ons" to rec eive month ly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up fo r "Be The Fi rst To Know" to get exclus ive previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promo tional Communications" for upcoming events. Should you still require further assistance, please refer to www.nokia-as ia.co m/contactu s . For addition al inform ation on repair s ervices, please visi t ww w.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own coun try site for mor e details: Australia and New Zealand ww w.noki a.com. au/su pport Malay sia www.no kia.com .my/s upport Indi a ww w.nokia .co.in /suppor t Phili ppin es www.no kia.com .ph/s upport Indo nesi a ww w.nokia.co .id/su pport Sing ap or e www.no kia.com .sg/supp ort Jap an ww w.nokia.co .jp/su pport Thai lan d www.no kia.co.th /suppo rt If your countr y is not listed above, pleas e visit www.n okia-asia. com/s upport .
DECLARATION O F CONFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares tha t this RM-313 product is in compliance with the es sential requirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/5 /EC. A copy o f the Decla ration of Conformity can be found at h ttp:// www.nokia.com/phon es/declaration_of_co nformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Noki a Origin al Enhancements logos, Nseries, N82, Navi, N-Gage, Vis ual Radi o, and No kia Care are trademark s or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporat ion. Nokia tune is a soun d mark of Nokia Corpo ration. Other product and company name s me ntio ned her ein may be tradema rks or trad enames of thei r respective owners . Reproducti on, transfer, d istribution, or st orage of part or al l of the contents in this docu ment in any form without the prior written permission of Nok ia is prohibited. This product includes so ftware licensed f r om Symbian So ftware Ltd é 1998- 2007. Symb ian and Symb ian OS are trademar ks of Symbia n Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input soft ware Copyright é 19 97-2007. Tegic Com munications, Inc. All rig h ts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of th e Nokia Maps softwa re are co pyright é 1996-2002 The FreeType Project. Al l rights reserved. This product is li censed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfo lio License (i) for personal and no ncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a person al and noncommercial activity a nd (ii) fo r use in connect ion with MPEG-4 video provid ed by a licensed video provid er. No license is grante d or shall be implied fo r any other use . Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional, in ternal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained fro m MPEG LA, LLC. See http://w ww.mpegla . com. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing develop ment. Nokia reserves th e right to make cha nges and improvemen ts to any of the product s describ ed in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAX IMUM EX TENT PE RMITTED BY APPLICA BLE LAW, U NDER NO CI RCUMSTAN CES SHALL NOKI A OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONS IBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME O R ANY SP ECIAL, I NCIDENT AL, CONSEQUENT IAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HO WSO EVER CAUSED. THE CO NTENTS OF THIS DOCUMEN T ARE PROV IDED "AS IS". E XCEPT A S REQUI RED BY APPLICA BLE LAW , NO WA RRANTI ES OF ANY KIND, E ITHE R EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL IED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AN D FITN ESS FOR A PARTICUL AR PURPOS E, ARE MAD E IN RELA TION TO TH E ACCUR ACY, R ELIABI LITY OR CONT ENTS OF THIS DO CUMEN T. NOKIA RESERV ES THE RIGH T TO REV ISE THIS DOCUM ENT OR WI THDRA W IT AT A NY TIME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTICE.
The third-party applications provided with your device may have been created an d may be owne d by pers ons or entiti es not affili ated with or related to Nokia. Nok ia does not own th e copyrights or intel lectual prop er ty rights to the third-pa rty applications. As s uch, Nokia doe s n ot take any respo nsibility for end-user support, functi onality of the applications, or the inf ormation in the applicat ions or these materia ls. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the third-party a pplications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS Y OU ACKNOW LEDGE THA T THE APPLICA TIONS ARE P ROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY K IND, EX PRESS OR IMP LIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTEN T PERMITTE D BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FUR THER ACKNO WLEDGE THAT NEIT HER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIAT ES MAKE ANY REPRESE N TAT IONS OR WARRANTI ES, EXPRES S OR IMPL IED, INC LUDING BUT NOT LIM ITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TITLE , MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNE SS FOR A P ARTICUL A R PURPOS E, OR THAT THE AP PLICATIONS W ILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY P ATENTS, COPYR IGHTS, TRAD EMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of particular product s an d applications and service s for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and a vailab ility of l anguage opt ions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities, technolo gy or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and oth er countr ies. Dive rsion contrary to law is prohib ited. /Issue 1
Contents For yo ur s afe ty ...... ......... ....... ......... ........ ...1 0 About your device............................................ .............11 Network services................................ ...........................12 Enh ance me nts , b att er ies , an d ch ar ge rs.....................12 Get c onne ct ed.. ........ ..... ...... ......... ...... ....... .14 Useful information.......... ...........................15 Help............ ............ ........... ........... ................ ............ .......15 Get started.................................................................... .15 Nok ia s up port an d co nta ct in form ati on ....... ......... ..... 15 Additional applica tions............ ........ ........... ......... ........15 Software updates...... ....................................................16 Settings......................................................................... .16 Access codes....................... .......................... .................16 Prolong battery life............................ ...........................17 Free memory................ .................. ............. ................. .18 Your device........... .......... ............. .......... .....19 Welcome.................................. ............................ ..........19 Switch............. .................. .................. ................. ...........19 Transfer content............................. ............................19 Syn ch roni se, re tri ev e, or se nd con te nt.................... 20 Display indicators. .............................. ....................... ....21 Fast downloading............................ ............. ................2 2 Lock the keypad................. ................ ................ ...........2 2 Shortcuts................................ ........................................23 Multimedia menu...... ....................................................23 Mobile Search.......................... ............... .................... ...24 Games........... ................... ................... ......................... ...24 Headset.......................................... ................................25 Volu me and lou dsp ea ker co ntro l... ....... ......... ...... ....... 26 Offline profile............... ............... .................... ............... 26 Camera.................. ................. .................. ..28 About the camera ........... ............ ......... ............ .............2 8 Image capture.............................................................. .28 Sti ll ima ge c am er a in di cat ors ....... ....... ....... ......... ..... 28 Active toolbar.................. ............ ............... ............... .29 Take pictures....................... ................ ............... ........30 After taking a pict ure.................................................31 Flash........ .............. ................. .............. .............. ..........32 Scenes.................... ........................ ....................... .......32 Take pictures in a sequence......................................3 2 You in the pictureâÂÂself-t imer...... ......... ....... ......... ...33 Tips on taking good photographs.................. ..........33 Video recording..................................... ........................34 Video capture indicators............ ........ ...... ......... ........3 4 Record videos................. ............ ................. ............ ...35 After recording a video..............................................36 Camera settings... .................. .............. ............ ..............36 Still image camera settin gs.......................................36 Se t u p s et t i ng s âÂÂa d ju s t c o lo u r a n d l ig h ti n g............37 Video settings.................................... .........................38 Gallery.......................................... ..............39 View and organi se files................. ................ ............ ...39 Images and video clips.................................................40 View images and vi deos............................................40 Organise images and videos....................... ..............4 0 Contents
Active toolbar.................... ........... ................ ............ ..41 Albums............. .............. .............. .................. ..............41 Print basket........ ................. ...................... ..................42 Slide show. .............................. ....................................42 Edit images....................................................................42 Image editor...............................................................42 Crop image............................ ......................................43 Reduce red-eye...........................................................43 Useful shortcuts............. ............................ .................43 Edit videos........................... ................. .................... .....43 TV-out mode..................................................................44 Presentations........................ ................ ............ ............44 Print images.......................... ................... ..................... 45 Image print.................................................................45 Printer selection................... ................ ............... ....45 Print preview................... ................. ................ .......45 Print settings. ............... ............ ............ ........... .........46 Print online................................................ .................46 Share images and videos online... .............. .................46 Home network............. ............... .................... .............. .47 About home network....................... .................... ......47 Important security informa tion................. ...............47 Settings for home network.............. .............. ...........48 Set sharing on an d define content.......... .......... .......48 View and share media files..................... .............. ....49 Copy media files...................... ................ ............ .......50 Positioning ( GPS)........... .......... .......... .........51 About GPS..... ............... .............. ............... ................... ...51 GPS receiver............................................. ......................52 About satellite si gnals.......................... ..................... ...52 Position requests........................... ............. ................. .53 Maps................................. ................................ ..............53 About Maps...................................... ................... ........53 Browse maps..................................... ..................... ....54 Download maps...... ................. ............ ............. ..........55 Find a place.................................................................56 Plan a route...... ................. ............. ............. ................57 Extra services for Maps.............. ...... ......... ....... ........ ..57 Navigation. ....................... ....................... .................58 Guides.......................................................................58 Landmarks........................................... ..........................59 GPS data.........................................................................59 Route guidance............... ......... ............. ......... ............60 Ret rie ve posi ti on i nfo rma ti on. ............ ....... ......... .....6 0 Trip meter............................................. ...................... 60 Web browser.... .......... ........... .......... ...........61 Browse the web.............................. .............. ................61 Browser toolbar...................... ........... .................. .........62 Navigate p ages........ .................. ....................... .............63 Web feeds and blogs.................... ......... ............. ..........63 Content search... ...................... ............. ................ .........64 Download and purcha se items........................ ............64 Bookmarks................................................. ....................64 Empty the cache............................................................65 End the connection.................................................. .....65 Connection security.................. ........ ............ ........ ........65 Web setti ngs........... ................... ......................... ...........66 Connections... ............ ............. ............... .....68 Wireless LAN.................................................................. 68 About WLAN................................................................68 WLAN connections. ................... .............. ............. .......68 WLAN wizard...... .............. ................. .............. ............69 WLAN internet access poi nts.....................................69 Operating modes... ......................... ................... .........70 Connection manager................. ........ .......... ........ .........70 Contents
Active data connect ions........... ............ ............. .........70 Available WLAN networks. .............. .................. .........70 Bluetooth connectivity....................... .............. ............71 About Bluetooth connectivity................ ......... ..........7 1 Settings.............................. ....................... ..................71 Security tips................................... ......................... ....72 Send data using Bluet ooth connectivi ty........ ...... ....72 Pair devices.................................................................73 Re c ei v e d a t a u s in g Bl u e to o th c on n ec t i vi t y........... ..7 3 Remote SIM mode................. ............... ................... ...74 USB............... ................ ............... ................ ....................74 PC connections................. ............... ........... ............... ....75 Nokia Video C entre........... ......... ......... ........76 Find and view videos....................................................76 Internet videos..............................................................77 Play downloaded videos............ ........... .......... ........... ..77 Transfer videos from your PC.......................................77 Settings......................................................................... .78 Music folder................... ......................... ....79 Music player........................................ ...........................79 Pla y a s ong or a p odca st epi so de... ........ ......... ......... 79 Music menu..................................... ............................80 Playlists.......................... ...................... .......................8 0 Podcasts................................... ...................................8 1 Hom e ne tw ork wit h mu si c p lay er ....... .......... ....... ....81 Transfer music to your device. ..................................82 Transfer music from PC.................................. .........82 Transfer with Windows Media Player....................82 Nokia Music S tore............................... ........................... 83 Radio.............................. ...................... ..........................84 Listen to the radio. .......................................... ...........84 View visual content. .............................................. .....85 Saved sta tions........... ............ .......... ............ ............ ....85 Settings................................... ........................ ............85 Nokia Podcasting......................... ................. ............. ...85 Settings................................... ........................ ............86 Search......................................................................... .87 Directories...................... .................................... .........87 Downloads............................................................ ......88 Play and manage p odcasts................. .................... ...88 Media folder.................................. .............90 RealPlayer .................................... ................................ .90 Play video clips.................................. .........................90 Stream content over th e air................. .................. ...90 RealPlayer settin gs........................... ......................... .90 Adobe Flash Player.............................................. ..........91 Nokia Lifeblog.................. ................ ............ ................ .91 Activation keys.................................. ........................... .91 Recorder................................. ........................................ 92 Per son al ise you r d evi ce ...... ....... ...... ........ ..9 4 Themes......... ........................ .................... ................... ...94 ProfilesâÂÂset tones... ......................... ................. ...........94 3-D tones.......... ..................... ...................... ...................95 Modify the standby mode............. ....... .......... ....... .......96 Modify the main menu ............ ........... ............. ........... ..96 Time management...... ............ ................ ...97 Clock ........................... ................. ........................... .......97 Alarm clock................. .............. ................ ...................97 World clock................ .............. .................. .............. ...97 Calendar............................................. ............................98 Create a calendar entry.... ................................ ..........98 Calendar views....... .................. .............. .............. .......98 Manage calenda r entries............... .......... .............. ....99 Contents
Messaging................ .......... ............. ........ .100 Messaging main view.................................................100 Write text. ....................... .................................. ...........101 Traditional text input........... .......... ............ ....... ......101 Predictive text input......................... .................. .....101 Tips on text inpu t....................................... ..............102 Change the writing language........... ........ ...... ........102 Edit text and lists.... ............ ............ ............... .......... .102 Write and send messa ges.............. .................. ..........102 Messaging inbox.......................... .................... ...........104 Receive messages................ ............ ......... ............ ...104 Multimedia messages..............................................104 Dat a, s et tin gs, an d w eb s erv ic e me ss age s............105 Mailbox... ............... ............... .................... ............... .....105 Define the e-mail settings.......................................105 Open the mailbox....... ................................ ..............106 Retrieve e-mail messages........... ........ ...... ......... .....106 Delete e-mail messages..... ................. .................... .107 Disconnect from the mailbox......................... .........107 View messages on a SIM card...................... ..............107 Messaging settin gs..................... ..................... ...........107 Text message set tings............................................ .107 Multimedia message set tings........................... ......108 E-mail settings.... .............................. ....................... .109 Manage mailboxes ............ .......... ............. ......... ....109 Connection settings.............. .......... ....... .......... .....109 User settings......................................................... .110 Retrieval settings.............. .......... ....... ........... ........110 Au toma ti c re tr iev al set ti ngs .......... ................... ...1 11 Web service mess age settings................................111 Cell broadcast settings. .................. .............. ............111 Other settings ...........................................................112 Make calls. .......................................... ......113 Voice calls..................... ................ .................... ...........113 Options during a call. ............ ................ ............. ......... 113 Voice and video mailboxes............ ......... .......... ........ .114 Answer or decline a call.......... ......... ....... ....... ......... ...114 Make a conference call............. ........... ............ ........ ...114 Speed dial a phone number.......... ............................. 115 Call waiting.......... ................................ ........................115 Voice dialling.................................... ...........................115 Make a video call............................... ..........................116 Options during a video call............................ ............117 Answer or decline a video call........................ ...........117 Video sharing...................... .................. .............. ........118 Requirements..................................... ......................118 Settings.......................................................... ...........118 Sha re l iv e v ide o o r vi deo cli ps ..... .......... ........ ...... ...1 19 Accept an invita tion.................................................120 Internet calls.... ................ ............ ............ ................ ....120 Create an internet call profile.............. ......... ......... .121 Connect to the internet call service........................ 121 Make internet calls ..................................................122 Service settings .............. ........... ............... ................122 Log................ ...................... ....................... ................... 123 Recent calls...................................... .........................123 Call duration......................... .................. ..................123 Packet data ...................................... .........................123 Moni tor al l c ommu ni ca tio n e ven ts........................ 123 Contacts (pho nebook)............... ...............125 Save and edi t names and numbers.......................... .125 Ma nag e na me s an d nu mb ers ..... ........ ......... ...... ....... .12 5 Default numbers and address es................................126 Add ringing tones for con tacts.................. ................126 Copy contacts...................... ........... .............. ...............126 SIM dire ct ory and o the r SI M ser vi ces ................... .....1 27 Contents
Manage contact groups..............................................127 Office folder. .......... ......... ............ ........ ......129 Quickoffice...................................................................129 Quickword............... .................... .............................. 129 Quicksheet........................ ................... ............... ......129 Quickpoint....... ............. ................... ............... ...........129 Quickmanager........................ ................... ...............130 Notes............................................................................130 Adobe PDF reader........... ............. ................ ............ ....130 Converter...................... ............... ..................... ...........130 Zip manager.................... ................. .................. .........131 Barcode reader................................... .........................131 Applications folder. .............. ................ ....133 Calculator.....................................................................133 Application mana ger........................... ...................... .133 Install applica tions and softw are ................. .........134 Remove applications and soft ware........................135 Settings.................................................. ...................135 Tools folder.................................. ............137 File manager....... ............ ................... ............... ...........137 Memory card tool........................................................137 Voice commands.........................................................137 Sync................................................ ..............................138 Device manager.................... ............. .............. .......... .138 Settings................................... .................140 General settin gs........................... ...............................140 Personalisation sett ings..........................................140 Enhancement set tings................................... ..........141 Security setting s.................................. .....................142 Phone and SIM............................................. ..........142 Certificate manageme nt...................................... .143 Security module......... .............. ................... ...........144 Restore original settings............................. ............144 Positioning settings .................................................144 Phone settings....................... ................ ................ .....145 Call settings.. ................. ............. .............. ................. 145 Call divert................................................ ..................146 Call barring..... .............. .................. .............. .............146 Network settings... ................... .................. ..............147 Connection settings ........................................... .........147 Dat a c onn ect io ns a nd acc ess po in ts......................147 Access points.................. ............... ............. ..............148 Create a new access point.................... ......... .......148 Packet data access poin ts..................................... 148 WLAN internet access poin ts................................149 Packet data setti ngs............ ........ .......... .......... ....... .150 Wireless LAN sett ings......... ......... ...... ......... ........ .....151 SIP settings................................. .......................... ....151 Internet call settings ................ ........................ ........151 Configurations..........................................................151 Access point name cont rol............ .............. ........... .152 Application setting s.................................................... 152 Troubleshooting............ ...... ....... ....... ......153 No ki a or i gi n al e nh a n ce m en ts .................15 6 Enhancements............. ................................................156 Battery......... ........... ................ ............. ............ .............156 Battery information................................ .157 Charging and disch arging........................... ...............157 Nok ia ba tt ery au the nti cat io n gui de li nes ......... ....... .15 8 Authenticate holog ram........ ........... ........ .......... ......158 What if your battery is not authentic?...................158 Contents
Car e a nd m ain tena nce ........... .......... ........1 60 Addi t ion al s af ety in for ma tio n............. ....16 2 Small children ................ ....................... ................. ......162 Operating envi ronment............... ..................... ..........162 Medical devices................. ............ ............. ................ .162 Implanted medical devices............. .......... ......... .....162 Hearing aids... .................. .................. ....................... 163 Vehicles........................................................................163 Pot ent ia ll y ex pl osi ve e nv iro nme nt s.........................16 4 Emergency calls............... ......................... ...................164 Certification information (SAR).. .............. .................. 165 Index................................................. .......166 Contents
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not fol lowing them may be dangerous or illegal. Re ad the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON S AFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Al ways keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFE RENCE All wireless dev ices may be sus ceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH O FF IN HOSPIT ALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRC RAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WH EN REFUELIN G Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENS IBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product docu mentation. Do n ot touch t he antenna areas un necessarily. QUALIFIED SE RVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BAT TERIES Use only approved enhancements and batterie s. Do not connect incompa tible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. 10 For your safety
BACK-UP COP IES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of a ll important information stored in your device. CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible product s. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone funct ion of the device is switched on and in serv ice. Press the end key as many times as needed to c lear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location . Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is ap proved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Conta ct your service provider for more information about networks. When using the featu res in this device, obey all laws and respect loca l customs, privacy a nd legitimate rights of others, in cluding copyrights. Copyright protection s may preven t some images, music (includi ng ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports inte rnet connections and other methods of connectivity. Li ke computers, your device may be expose d to viruses, malicious m essages and applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and open messag es, ac cept connectivity requests, download content, and acce pt installations only from trustworthy source s. To increase the security of your devices, consider installing, using, and regularly upda ting antiviru s software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To us e any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interfer ence or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 ). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. During extended operation, such as an active v ideo sharing session or high-sp eed data connection, the device may feel warm. In mo st cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working 11 For your safety
properly, take it to the nearest au thorized service facili ty. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party inte rnet sites. You ma y also acce ss other third-party sites through you r device. Th ird-party sites are not affiliated w ith Nokia, and No kia does not endorse or assume liabilit y for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should ta ke precautions for security or content. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the phone you must have s ervice from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These feat ures are not availa ble on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will apply . Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language-dependent cha racters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocol s. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always swit ch the dev ice off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This devi ce is intended for use when supplied with power from the DC-4, AC-4, or AC-5 charger and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with thi s device is BP-6MT. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any ap proval or warranty, and may be danger ous. For availability of a ppr oved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the 12 For your safety
power cord of any enhanc ement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. 13 For your safety
Get connected Nokia N82 supports the following connectivity methods: â 2G and 3G networks â Bluetooth connec tivity â to transfer files an d connect t o compatible enhan cements. See "Bluetooth connectivity," p. 71 . â Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) â to connect to compatible headsets, headphones, TVs, or home stereo sets. See "TV-out mode," p. 44 . â USB data cable â to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See "USB," p. 74 . â Wireless LAN (WLAN) â to co nnect to th e internet and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wireless LAN," p. 68 . â GPS â to co nnect to GPS satellite s to measure your location. See "Positioning (GPS)," p. 51 . 14 Get connected
Useful information Model number: Nokia N82-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N82. Help Your device has con text-sensitive he lp. When an application is open, select Optio ns > Help to access help for the current view. When you are re ading the instructions, to switch between he lp and the applica tion th at is open i n the background, press and hold . To open he lp from the main menu, select Tools > Util ities > Help . Sele ct the des i red application to view its hel p topics. Get started See the get st arted guide for k eys and parts information, instructions for setting up the devi ce and for other essential information. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nokia-asia.com/support or your local Nokia website for the latest gu ides, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. You may also download free configuration setting s su ch as MMS, GPRS, e-mail, and other services for your de vice mo del at www.nokia-asia.com/phonesetting s. If you need to c ontact custom er service, chec k the list of local Nok ia Car e contac t cent res at www.nokia-asia.com/contactus. For mainten ance servic es, check your neare st Nokia Care point at www.nokia-asia.com/repair. Additional applications There are various applica tions provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. Th ese applications are explained in the guides that are available on the pr oduct su pport pages of the No kia website. 15 Useful information
Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhan ced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through th e Nokia Software Updater PC applica tion. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Softwa re Updater application and a compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2 000, XP, or Vista operating system, br oadband internet access, and a compatible data cable to connect your devic e to the PC. To get more information an d to do wnload the No kia Software Updater applic ation, visit www.nokia- asia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia websit e. Tip: To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the st andb y mode . Settings Your device normal ly has MMS, GPRS, stream ing, and mobile internet se ttings automatic ally conf igured in the device, based upon your network service provider information. Yo u may ha ve settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receiv e or request th e settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can change th e general settings in your device, such as lang uage, stan dby mode, display, and keypad lock s ettin gs. See "General settings," p. 140 . Access codes If you fo rget any of th e access co des, contac t your service provider. â Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. Af ter three consecutiv e incorrect PI N code entrie s, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. â UPIN code â This code ma y be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM ca rd is an enha nced versio n of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. â PIN2 code â This code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, an d is required to access some functions in your device. â Lock code (also known as security code) â This code (5 digits) can be us ed to lock the device to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code i s 12345 . To avoid u nautho rised use of yo ur device , change t he lock code . Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate 16 Useful information
from your device. Try enter ing the code only once, if you forget the cod e. If the code y ou entered is not correct, co ntact a Nokia Care point or your service provider for f urther instructions. â Personal unblocking ke y (PUK) code and PUK 2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the code s are not supplied with the SIM ca rd, contact th e operator wh ose SIM card is in your device. â UPUK code â This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contac t the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery life Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, note the fo llowing: â Features that use Bluetooth tech nology, or allowing such features t o run in the background while using other fea tures, increase the demand on battery power. T urn Bluetoot h tech nology off when you do not need it. â Features that use wi reless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features t o run in the background while using other fea tures, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia d evice switches off wh en you are not t rying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not sca nning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background . See "Wireless LAN," p. 68 . When Scan for networks is set t o Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. Ho wever, you ca n still manually scan for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN netw orks as usual. â If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data c overage (GPRS), t he device perio dically tri es to establ ish a packet data connection. T o pr olong the op eratin g time of your device, select Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps application downloads new map information whe n you scroll to new areas on th e map, which increas es the deman d on batt ery power. You can preven t the automati c download of new maps. See "Maps," p. 53 . â If the signal strength of the ce llular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the ava ilable network repe atedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mod e is set to dual mode in th e network settings, th e device search es for the 17 Useful information
UMTS network. To only use the GSM network, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Network > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the display inc reases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the time-out after which the backlight is sw itched off, and adjust the light sensor that obse rves lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightn ess. Press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation > Display and Light time- out or Light sensor . â Leaving applicati ons running in the background increases the demand on battery p ower. To close the applications you do not use, press and hold , scroll to an applicatio n in the list, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from the list and Options > Exit . Free memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies y ou if the device memory or the memory card memory (if available) is low. To view how much memory different data types consume, press , and s elect Option s > Memory details . To free device memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compatible PC. To remove data you no longer need, u se File manager or go to the resp ective application. You can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messa ges from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .si sx) of applications you have installed. Back up th e installation files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Sui te. â Images and video clips in Gallery. Back up the files to a compatible PC usin g Nokia Nseries PC S uite. If you are deleting multiple items and Not enou gh memory to perf orm op eration. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some da ta from phon e memory. is show n, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest items. 18 Useful information
Your device Welcome When you switch on yo ur device, the Welc ome application is displayed. Select from the following: â Sett. wizard â to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For mo re information on the Settings wizard application, see the guides available at th e Nokia product sup port pages or your local Nokia website. â Switch â to transfer con tent, such as contac ts and calendar entries, from a compa tible Nokia device. See "Transfer content," p. 19 . There may also be a demonstration about your device available in th e Welcome appl ication. To access the Welcome ap plication later, press , and select Tools > Utiliti es > Welcome . You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. Switch Transf er con tent With the Switch application, you can transf er content, such as contac ts, betwee n two compat ible Nokia devices using Bl uetooth c onnecti vity. The type of content that can be transferre d depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content . If the other de vice supports synchronisation, you can al so synchronise data betwe en the o ther d evice an d your de vice. Your device notifies you i f the other de vice is not compatible. If the other dev ice cannot be powe red on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is sw itched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatica lly activated. Transfer content 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Switch in the Welcome applicat ion, or press , and select Tools > Utilities > Switch . 19 Your device
2. Select the conne ction type you want to use to transfer the data. Both de vices must suppo rt the selected connection type. 3. If you se lect Blue tooth conn ectivity : To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the devic e from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the othe r device, an d select OK . The devices are now paired. See "Pair devices," p. 73 . For some device models, the Switch applicatio n is sent to the other device as a message. To install the Switch app l ication on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4. From your device, select the content you want to transfer from the oth er device. Once the transfer has started, you can ca ncel it and continue later. Transferring time depends o n the am ount of data to be transferred. Content is transferred from th e memory of the other d e v i c e t o t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g l o c a t i o n i n y o u r d e v i c e . Synchronise , retrieve, or send content After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer, depe nding on th e model of the other device: to synchronise cont ent betwee n your device and the other d evic e, if the other devi ce supports synchronisation. The synchronisation i s two-way. If an item is deleted in one de vice, it is dele ted in both. You cannot restore deleted ite ms with synchronisation. to retrieve data from the ot her device to your device. With retrieval, data is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original data in th e other device, depending on th e device model. to send data from your device to your other device If Switch cannot transfer an item, depending on the type of the other device, you ca n add the item to the Nokia folder to C:\Data\Nokia or E:\Data\Nokia and transfer it from there. When y ou select th e folder to transfer, the items are syn chronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. 20 Your device
Use shortc uts to repe at a transfe r After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfe r settings to th e main view to repe at the same transfer later. To edit the shortc ut, sc roll to it, and select Option s > Shortcut settings . You ca n, for example, c reate or change the name of th e shortc ut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log o f a previous tr ansf er, scroll to a shortcut in the main view , and select Opti ons > Vi ew log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device att empts to merge the c hanges automatically. If this is no t possible, th ere is a transfer conflict . Select Check one by one , Priority to this ph one , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. For furthe r instructions, select Option s > Help . Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in th e Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received ne w e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages wait i ng to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ring ing ty pe is se t to silent, and the message alert tone and e-mail al ert ton e are set to off. The devi ce keyp ad is locke d. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls to the device are diverted to anoth er number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a numbe r indicates t he active l ine. A compatible headse t is connected to the device. A compatible TV ou t cable is con nected to the device . A compatible te xt phone is c onnected to the device . A data call is active (network service). A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k service). indicates the connect ion is on hold and that a connection is available. A p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e i n a p a r t o f t h e network that supports EG PRS (network service). 21 Your device
indicates the connection i s on hold and that a connection is available . The icons indicate t hat EGPRS is available in the ne t w o r k , b u t y o u r d e v i c e i s not necessa rily using EGPR S in the data tra nsfer. A UMTS packet dat a connection is acti ve (network service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connect i on is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates the connec tion is on hold and that a connection is available. See "Fast downloading," p. 22 . Y o u h a v e s e t t h e d e v i c e to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is ava ilable (network service). See "About WL AN," p. 68 . A wireless LAN connection is active in a network th at has enc ryption. A wireless LAN conn ection is active in a netw ork that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connecti vity is on. See "Bluetooth connectivity," p. 71 . Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the in dicator is blinking, your device is trying to conn e ct with anothe r device. A USB connec tion is active. Fast downloading High-speed downlin k packet ac cess (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that sup ports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser pages through the cell ular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connect ion is indicated by . See "Display indicators," p. 21 . You can acti vate or deactiv ate support f or HSDPA in the device settings. See "Packet data settings," p. 150 . For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the do wnload speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. Lock the keypad To lock the keys, p ress th e left select ion key, then * . To unlock the keys, press the left selection key, then * . 22 Your device
You can select t o lock the keypad au tomatically after a time-out. See "Security settings," p. 142 . Shortcuts When in th e menus, instea d of using the scrol l key, you can use the number ke ys, # , and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 2 t o o pe n M es s ag in g , or # to open th e application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. To switch between open applications, press and hold . Leaving applications running in the background increases th e demand on battery power and reduces the batter y life. To open Gallery , press once. To open the mu ltimedia menu to view th e multimed ia conten t you have use d most freque ntly in your device, press the mult imedia key. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to view the most used option items, press the scroll key. To change the p rofile, press the power key, and select a profile. To switch betw een the General and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and hold # . If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches betw een the two lines. To call your v oice mailbox (netw ork service), in th e standby mode, press and hold 1 . To open the last dialled numbers list, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in th e standby mode, pr ess and hold the right selection key. Multimedia menu With the multimedia menu , you can view your most frequently used multime dia content. The selected content is shown in th e appropriate application. 1. To open or close the multimedia menu, pre ss the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right. 23 Your device
The tiles are t he following: â Music â E n t e r M u s i c player and the Now playing view, browse your songs and play lists, or download and manage podcasts. â Galler y â View your last taken picture, start a slide show of your images, or view me dia files in albums. â Games â Tr y out N-Gage game s. â Maps â View your fa vourite lo cations in t he Maps applicat ion. â Interne t â View your favourite web links in the browser. â Contacts â Add your own contacts, send messages, or make voic e calls. To add a new contact to an empty positio n on the list, pre ss the scroll key, and select a contact. To se nd a message, in the multimedia menu, select a contact, and Send text me ssage or Send multimedia msg. . 3. To scroll up or down in a tile, press the scroll key up or down. To select items, press the scroll key. To change the ord er of the tiles, se lect Options > Arrange tile s . To return to the multimedia menu from an open applica tion, press the multimedia key. Mobile Search Press , and select Search . Use Mobile Search to get access to search engines and find and connect to local services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can also search content in your devi ce, such as cale ndar entries, e- mail, and other messages. Web se arch (network s ervice) 1. In the main vi ew, select Search the Internet . 2. Select a sear ch engine. 3. Enter your te xt to search. My content search To search content in your device, in the main view, enter your tex t into the search field. The search results are displayed on th e screen as you write. Games You can pl ay high-quali ty multiplayer N-Ga ge⢠game s with your de vice. 24 Your device
Your device inclu des either one of the follow ing applications in th e main menu: â Discover N-Gage application â W ith this preview application you can get information about the upcoming N-Gage gamin g experience, try out game demos, and downlo ad and install the full N-Gage applica tion when it becomes available. â N-Gage application â The full featured applica tion gives you ac cess to th e complete N- Gage experience replac ing the Discover N-Gage application in the menu. You can find new games, try and buy games, find other players, and access scores, events, chat, and more. Some features may not be av ailable at the time of software installation on your device, check www.n-gage.com for software u pdates. For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, ei ther through the ce llular network or wireless LAN. Contact your service provider for more information on data services. For more information, visit www.n-gage.com . Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need to sel ect the cabl e mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to he ar outside sou nds may be aff ected. Do not use the headset where it can enda nger your safety. S o m e h e a d s e t s c o m e i n t w o p a r t s , a remote control unit and headphones. A remote control unit has a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. T o use the headph ones with a remote control unit, connect th e unit to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) in t he device, then connect the headphones to the unit. If a headset does not inclu de a microphone, for handsfree phone ca lls, use such a headset with a compatible remote cont rol unit or the microphone of the de vice. When using certain headset enh ancements, t o adjust the volume during a call, use the vol ume key in the device. Some headset e nhancements have multimedia volume cont rols that are used to adjust the volume only for mu sic or video playback. You can also connect a co mpatible TV-out cable to the Nokia AV Connector (3 .5 mm) of your device. 25 Your device
Do not conn ect products that c reate an ou tput signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connec tor. When connec ting any ex ternal dev ice or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device , to the Nokia AV Conn ector, pay special attent ion to v olume l evels. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decre ase the volume lev el when you have an active call or are listeni ng to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning : Do not hold t he device near your ear when the loud speaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker d uring a call, sele ct Options > Ac tivate loudspeaker . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activ ate h andse t . Offline profile To activate the off line profile, press t he power key briefly, and select Offline . Or, press , and select Tools > Profi les > Offline . The off line profi le lets yo u use the device wi thout connecting to the wire less network. When you activa te the o ffline profile, th e connecti on to the wireless network i s turned o ff, as indica ted by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are p laced in t he o utbox to be sent later. When the offlin e profile is active, you can us e your device without a SIM card. Important: In the offline pro file you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergenc y number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the p hone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock code. When you have activate d the offline profile, you c an still use the wireless L AN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on th e internet. R emember to comply with any applicab le safety requirem ents when establishing and using a wireless L AN 26 Your device
connection. Y ou can also use Bluetooth conne ctivity while in the offline profil e. To leave t he offline profile, press the pow er key briefly, and select anothe r profile. The d evice re- enables wireless transmission s (providing there is sufficient signal streng th). 27 Your device
Camera About the camera Your Nokia N82 has two cameras, a h igh resolution camera on the back of the device (the main came ra, up to 5 megapixels, in la ndscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on th e front (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixel s. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are automatically saved in Images & videos in Gallery. The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP fi le format with the .3gp file extension (shari ng quality ). See "Video settings," p. 38 . You can send images and vi deo clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta chment, or by using othe r connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or wireless L AN connection. You ca n also upload them to a co mpatib le onli ne al bum. See "Share i mages a nd vide os online ," p. 46 . Image capture To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the c amera activation switch. To activ ate the ma in camera when the lens cove r is already open, press and hold t he capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfind er displays the following: 28 Camera
1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during image capture. See "Act ive toolbar," p. 29 . 3 â Battery cha rge level indica tor 4 â Image resolution indicator, which indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 5M - Large , Print 3M - Mediu m , Print 2M - Med ium , E- mail 0.8M - Med. , or MMS 0.3M - Small . The quality of a digitally zoom ed picture is lower th an that of an unzoomed picture . 5 â Image counter, whic h displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the curren t image quality setting an d memory in use. The counter is not displa yed during image capture. 6 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are saved 7 â Xenon flash indicator, which is shown blinki ng only when the xenon fl ash is charging Active toolbar The activ e toolbar prov ides you w ith shortcu ts to different items and sett ings before and after taking a picture or recording a vide o. S crol l to i tems , an d select them by pressing th e scroll key. You can also define when t he active too lbar is visible on the displa y. The settings in th e active toolbar retu rn to the default settings afte r you close the camera. To view th e active toolbar before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Option s > Show icon s . To view the act ive toolbar on ly when you need it, select Options > Hide i cons . Only the capture mode and battery level indicators are shown on the display. To ac tivate the ac tive too lbar, press the scroll key. The toolbar is visi ble for 5 seconds. Before takin g a picture or recording a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following: to switch between th e video and image modes to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (images onl y) See "You in the pictu reâÂÂself-t imer," p. 33 . to activate t he sequence mode (images on ly) See "Take pi ctures in a sequence," p. 32 . 29 Camera
to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposu re compensation (images only) to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons change to reflec t the current status of the setting. The available options va ry depending on the capture mode and view you are in. See "After taking a pictur e," p. 31 . See "After recording a video," p. 36 . The active to olbar in Gallery has different options. See "Act ive toolbar," p. 41 . Take pictures Before taking a picture , note the following: â You cannot take pictures until the xenon flash is fully charged, unless you have set the flash to Off . When the flash is charging, blinks on the display. Charging th e xenon flash usually ta kes a couple of seconds. â To make l ighting and colour adjustment s, use the scroll ke y to scroll through the active toolba r. See "Setup settingsâÂÂadjust colour and lighting," p. 37 . Saving th e captured image may take longer if you ch ange the zoom , lighting, or colour settings. â To free memory for new pictures, transfer file s to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and delete the files from your device . The devi ce inform s you when the memory is full, and asks whether y ou want to change the mem ory in use . When taking a pictu re, note the following: â Use both hand s to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoome d picture. â The camera goes int o the battery sav ing mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue ta king pictures, press the capture key. To take a picture , do the follo wing: 1. If the camera is in th e video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 30 Camera
2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key hal fway down ( main camer a only, not available in landscape and sports scenes). The green locked fo cus indicat or appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red focus indi cator appears. Release the capture key , and press it halfway down again. You can, however, take the picture without locking the foc us. 3. To take a picture, pre ss the captu re key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. To zoom in or out when taking a picture, use the zoom key in your dev ice. Tip: To open Gallery and view the pictur es you have taken, press on the side of your device twice. To activate the front ca mera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To ta ke a picture, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. To leave t he camera open in the bac kground and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and ho ld the cap ture key. After taking a picture Select the followin g from th e active tool bar (available only if you select Show capture d image > On in t he sti ll im age came ra set tings) : â If you do not wan t to keep t he image, select Delete ( ). â To send the image usin g a multimedia message, e-mail, or other conn ec tion methods, such as Bluetooth conne ctivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and se nd messages," p. 102 . This option is not available during an active call. You can also send t he image to a call recip ient during an active call. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during an active call). â To tag images to the print basket for later printing, sele ct Add to Prin t basket ( ). â To send the image to a compatible online album, select (available only if you have set up an accoun t for a compat ible online album ). See "Share images and videos online," p. 46 . To zoom in an image after taking it, press to open the im age in Gallery, and selec t the zoomin g option from the opt ions list. To use the image as wallpaper in th e active standby , select Options > Set as wallp aper . 31 Camera
To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Options > Set as contac t call img. > Assign to contact . To return to the vi ewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available only in th e main camera. Keep a safe distance wh en using the flash . Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover t he flash while taki ng a picture. The camera of your device has a xenon flash for lo w light conditions. The xenon flash is not availabl e in the sports scene and se quence mode. You cannot take pict ures if the xenon flas h is not fully charged, unless you have set the flash to Off . When the flash is charging, b l i n k s o n t h e d i s p l a y . Charging the xenon flash usua lly takes a couple of seconds. The following flash modes ar e available for the still image camera: Automati c ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Off ( ). To change the flash mode, in t he active toolb ar, select the desi red flash mode. Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene he lps you t o find the ri ght col our and lighting settings for the current environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environme nt. The default scene in t he image mode is Auto , a nd in the video mode Automati c (both indicated with ). To change the sc ene, in the act ive toolbar, select Scene modes and a scene. To make your o wn scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . In the u ser defined scene you can adjust different lig hting and colour settings. To c o p y t h e s e t t i n g s o f another scene, selec t Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, sc roll to User defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To set the camera to take six pictures or the desired number of pictures in sequence (if enough memory is available), in the active tool bar, select Sequen ce mode . To take six pictures, select Burst . To ca pture the pictures, press t he capture ke y. 32 Camera
To take two or more pict ures in a sequence, select the desired time in terval. To capture pictures usi ng the selected time interval , press the capture ke y. To stop taking pict ures, select Cancel . The number of pictures taken depe nds on the available memory. After you take the p ictures in t he burst mode, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press the scroll key to open it. If you used a time interval, only the last taken picture is shown on the display. You can view th e other pictures in Im ages & videos in Galler y. You can also use the seque nce mode with the self- timer. To return to th e sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. To switch off the sequen ce mode, in the acti ve toolbar, select Sequence mode > Single shot . You in th e pictureâÂÂs elf-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer t o delay the capture so t hat you can incl ude yours elf in the pic ture. To set the self-timer d elay, in the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-time r, select Acti vate . The device beeps when the ti mer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the image captu re. The camera take s the pictu re after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip: In the ac tive toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand st eady when taking a picture . Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the app ropriate pic ture qualit y. The camera ha s several picture q uality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality availa ble. Note however, that better picture quality requires more storage space . For multimedia message (MMS) and e-ma il attachments it may be necessary to use the smallest picture quality mode op timised for MMS sendin g. You can define the qua lity in the camera settings. See "Still image camera settings," p. 36 . Background Use a simple backgrou nd. For portraits and other pictures with pe ople, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttere d, comple x background that may distract at tention from th e subject. Move the camera, or th e subject, when these co nditions 33 Camera
cannot be met. Mo ve the camera c loser to t he object to take clearer portraits. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your p ictures by placing objects in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close t o the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting cond itions Changing the source, amoun t , and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical ligh ting condit ions: â Light source behind the subject. Av oid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind th e subject or visib le in the display, the resultin g picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted li ght effec ts. â Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dra matic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. â Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause th e subjects to squint the ir eyes. The contrast may also be too high. â Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the c amera activation switch. To activ ate the ma in camera when the lens cove r is already open, press and hold t he capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Audio mute on indicator 3 â Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during recording. See "Act ive toolbar," p. 29 . 4 â The battery charge level indicator 5 â Video quality indicato r that indicates whether the quality of the vide o is TV high quality , TV 34 Camera
normal quality , E-mail high quality , E- mail norm. quality , or Sharing quality 6 â The video clip file t ype 7 â Total available v ideo recording ti me. When you are re cordi ng, t he curre nt video length indicat or also shows the elapsed ti me and time remaining. 8 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators that show where videos are saved 9 â The video stabilisation is turned on ( ). See "Vid eo settin gs," p. 38 . To display all viewfind er indicators, sele ct Option s > Show icons . Select Hide icons to display o nly the vi deo stat us indicators, and during the recording, the available record time, zoom bar when zooming, and the select ion keys. Record vide os Before recording a vide o, note the following: â To make lighting and co lour adjustments, scroll through the active toolbar. See "Setup settin gsâ adjust colour and lighting," p. 37 . See "Scene s," p. 32 . â To free memory for new video clips, transfer files to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and remov e the files from your devic e. The de vice inform s you when the memory is full, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. To record a video, do the following: 1. If the camera is in the image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2. To start recording, press th e capture key. The re d record icon ( ) is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has st arted. 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Video recording automatica lly stops if recording is set to pause and t here are no keypresses within a minute. Sel ect Contin ue to resume recording. To zoom i n or out of the subject, use t he zoom key in your device . 4. To stop record ing, select Stop . The video cl ip is automatically saved to the Images & videos folder of Gallery. T he maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To activate the front c amera, select Options > Use second ary came ra . To start recording a video, press the scroll key. T o zoom in or out, scroll up or down . 35 Camera
After record ing a video After you record a video cl ip, select the fo llowing from the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video sett ings): â To immediately play the video cl ip you just recorded, select Play ( ). â If you do not w ant to ke ep the v ideo, select Delete ( ). â To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e-mail, or other connection methods, such as Blue tooth connectivity, press the call key, or select Send ( ). See "Write and send messages," p. 102 . See "S end data using Bluetooth conne ctivity," p. 72 . This option is not available during an active call. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during an active call). â To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select (only availa ble if you have set u p an account for a compat ible online album). See "Share images and videos online," p. 46 . â To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the captur e key. Camera settings There are two kinds o f settings for th e camera: setup settings and main se ttin gs. The setup settings return to the def ault settings afte r you close t he camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them agai n. To adjust the setup settings, use the opt ions in the active toolbar. See "Setup settings âÂÂadju st colou r and lighting," p. 37 . To chan ge the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options > Settings . Still image ca mera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select Options > Se tti ngs and from the following: â Image quality â Select Print 5M - Large (2592x1944 resol ution), Print 3M - Medium (2048x1536 resol ution), Print 2M - Medium (1600x1200 resol ution), E-mail 0.8M - Med. (1024x768 reso lution), or MMS 0.3M - Small (640x480 resolution). The better the image quality, the more memory the imag e consumes. If you want to prin t the image, select Print 5M - Large , Print 3M - Medi um , or Print 2M - Medium . If you want to send it using e-mail, select E-mail 0.8M - Med. . To send the image using a multimedia message, select MMS 0.3M - Small . 36 Camera
These resolutions are only available in the main camera. â Add to album â Select whether you want to save t he image to a cer tain albu m in Gall ery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. â Show captured image â Select On if y ou wa nt to see the capt ured image af ter it is taken or Off if you want to continu e taking pictures immediately. â Default image name â Define the default name for the ca ptured images . â Extended digital zoom (main camera only) â On (con tinuous) allows the zoom incremen ts to be smooth and contin uous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom incremen ts to pause at the digit al and extended digital step poin t, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolut ion. â Capture tone â Se lect the t one you want to hear when you take a picture . â Memory i n use â Select where you want to store your images. â Rotate image â Select whether you want images that are captured w hen the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Gallery. â Restore came ra settings â S e l e c t Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. Setup s ettingsâÂÂa djust colo ur and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colours and lighting more accurately or to add effects to your pictures or v ideos, scroll through the activ e toolbar, and select from t h e following options: â Flash mode ( ) (images only) â Select the desired flash mode. â Colour tone ( ) â Select a colo ur effect from the list. â White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting conditi on from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Exposure co mpensation ( ) (images only) â If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to c ompensate the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. â Sharpn ess ( ) (images only) â Adjust the sharpness of the image. â Cont rast ( ) (images only) â Adju st the difference betwee n the lightest and darkest parts of the image. â Light se nsitivity ( ) (images only) â Increase the light sensitivity in low light con ditions to decrease the risk of images that are too dark. 37 Camera
The screen display change s to match any setting s you make so that you see how the ch ange affects the pictures or videos. The available settings vary dependin g on the selected camera. The setup settings are ca mera specific; if you change the settings in the secondary ca mera, the settings in the main camera do not chang e. The setup settings are also shooting mode specific; if you change the settings in the image mode, the settings in the video mode do not change. Switching be tween the m odes does not reset the defined setup settings. The setu p settings ret urn to the defaul t settings when you cl ose the came ra. If you sele ct a new scene, the colou r and lighting settings are replaced by the selected sc ene. You can change the setup settings after sel ecting a scene if needed. Video setting s To change the main sett ings, in the video mode, select Options > Se tti ngs and from the following: â Video quality â S et the quality of the video clip to TV high quality , TV normal quality, E-mail high quality , E-mail norm. qua lity (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing quality . If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select TV high quality or TV normal quality , which have VGA resolution (640x480) and the .mp4 file format. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a mul timedia message. To send the video clip using a multimedia message, select Sharing quality , which has QCIF resolution and the .3gp file format. â Video stabilisation â Select On to reduce camera shaking when recording the video. â Audio recording â Select Mute if you do not want to record sound. â Add to a lbum â Select whethe r you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery. Select Yes to open a list of available albums. â Show captured video â Select whether you want the first frame of the recorded video clip to be displayed after the recording stops. Select Play from the active to olbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the video clip. â Default video na me â Define the default name for the captured video clips. â Memory in use â Select where you want to store your videos. â Restore cam era settings â Select Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. 38 Camera
Gallery To store and organise yo ur images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) devices through wireless LAN (WLAN), press , and select Galler y . Tip: If you are in another application, to view the last saved picture in Gallery , press on the side of your devi ce. To enter t he Images & vide os f o l d e r m a i n v i e w , p r e s s t h e review key again. View and organise f iles Press , an d sele ct Gallery . In Gallery, select Images & videos , Tracks , Sound clips , Streaming links , Presentations , or All files , and press the scroll key to open it. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You can also create albums and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See "Albums," p. 41 . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, press th e scroll key. Video clips, .ra m files, and streaming links open and play in RealPlayer, and music and sound clips in Music player. See "RealPlayer ," p. 90 . See "Music player," p. 79 . To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Option s > Move and copy > Copy to memory card or Move to memory card , or Copy to phon e mem. or Move to phone mem. . 39 Gallery
Images and video clips View images and videos To view your images and vide o clips, press , and select Gallery > Images & videos . Pictures taken and video clips recorded with t he camera of your device are store d in Images & videos . Images and video clips can al so be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachmen t, or through Bluetoot h connectivity. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Galler y or in the R ealPlaye r, you must fi rst save it. The video clips saved in No kia Video Centre are n ot shown in Images & videos in Gallery. See "Nokia Video Centre," p. 76 . The images and video clip files in Images & vide os are in a loop and ordered by date and t ime. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or do wn. To open a file, press the sc roll key. When an image is opened, to z oom in the image, pr ess the zoom key on the side of y our device. The zooming ratio is not stored perman ently. If you want the display to be automatically rotated based on the orie ntation of th e device, set the display rotation on in the settings. See "Personalisation settings," p. 140 . To edit a video clip or a photo, select Op tions > Edit . See "Edit images," p. 42 . To print your images on a compatible printer, or to store them on a compatible memory card (if inserted) for printing, select Option s > Print . See "Image p rint," p. 45 . You can also tag images for later printing to the print basket in Galle ry. See "Print b a sket," p. 42 . Organise images and videos To add an image or a video clip to an album in Gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . See "Albums," p. 41 . To tag an image for later printing , selec t the imag e and Add to Print bas ket from th e active tool bar. See "Print bask et," p. 42 . To use the picture as a back ground image, select the picture and Op tions > Use image > Set as wallpap er . To delete an image or video clip, select Options > Delete . 40 Gallery
Some of the options may al so be available through the active toolba r (available whe n you open an image or a video clip). See "Active toolbar," p. 41 . Active toolbar In the Images & vide os folder, you can use the active toolbar as a shortcut to different tasks. The active toolbar is availa ble only wh en you h ave selected an image or a video clip. In the activ e toolbar, scro ll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. The settings in the active toolbar return to the default settings afte r you close the camera. If you want the ac tive toolbar to alw ays be visible on the display, select Options > Show icon s . To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the activ e toolbar, press the scroll key. Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the sele cted image or vide o clip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (o nly available if you have set up an account for a co mpatible online album). See "Share images and videos online," p. 46 . or t o a d d o r r em o ve a n im a ge fr om t he pr in t bask et. See "Print basket," p. 42 . to print the view ed image to start a slide show of your images to delete the selec ted image or vi deo clip The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Albums With albums, you can convenient ly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list in Gallery, select Image s & videos > Options > Albums > View albums . To create a new album, in the albums list view, select Options > New album . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in Gallery, scroll to a pictur e or v ideo clip, and select Option s > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the alb um to which y ou want to add the picture or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Images & videos in Gallery. To remove a file from an album, open the album, scroll to the file, and press C . The file is not deleted from Images & videos in Gallery. 41 Gallery
Print b asket You can tag images to the print basket, and print them later with a compat ible printer or in a compatible printing kiosk, if available. See "Image print," p. 45 . The tagged images are indicated with in Images & videos a nd albums. To tag an image for later printing, select an image, and Add to Print bas ket from the active too lbar. To view the images in the print b asket, select from Images & videos (available on ly when you have added pictures to the prin t basket), or Options > Print > View Print basket . To remove an image from the print basket, select an image in Images & videos or in an album, and Options > Remo ve from basket . Slide show To view your images as a slide show, select an image in Gallery, and Start slide show ( ) in the active toolbar. The slide show starts from th e selected file. To view only the select ed images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images, and Options > Slide show > Start to start the slide show. Select from the following: â Pause â to pause the slide show â Continue â to resume the slide show, if paused â End â to clo se the slide show To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting the slide show, adjust th e slide show settings. Select Opt ions > Sl ide sho w > Settings , and from t he following: â Music â to add sound to the slide show. Select On or Off . â Song â to select a musi c file from the list â Delay between slides â to adjust the tempo of the slide show â Zoom and pan â to make th e slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let Gallery randomly zoo m in and out in the images To decrease or increase the volume during the slide show, use the volume key in your device. Edit images Image edit or To edit the pict ures after taking them or th e ones alread y saved in Gallery, se lect Options > Edit . The image editor opens. Select Options > Apply eff e ct to open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons. You can crop and rotate 42 Gallery
the image; adjust th e brigh tness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effect s, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop , and a predefi ned aspect ratio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appear s in the upper left corner of t h e image. Use t he scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Anothe r cross appears in the lo wer right corner. Again select the a r e a t o b e c r o p p e d . T o a d j u s t t h e f i r s t s e l e c t e d a r e a , select Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefin ed aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press the scro ll ke y. T o move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-ey e in an image, select Op tions > Apply e ffect > Red eye r eduction . Move the cro ss onto the ey e, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the e ye, use the sc roll key. To reduce the redness, press the scro ll key. When you finish editing the image, press Do ne . To save the changes, and return to Images & videos , press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the followi ng shortcuts when editing images: â To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, p ress * again. â To rota te an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . â To zoom in or out , press 5 or 0 . â To move on a zoomed image, scroll up , down, left, or right. Edit videos To edit video clips in Gall ery, scroll t o a video clip, and select Options > Edit and an editing option. The video edit or supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not ne ce ssarily support all fea tures of a file format or all the variations of file format s. 43 Gallery
TV-out mode To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivi ty Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure th e TV-out setti ngs for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See "Enhancement settings," p. 141 . To watch images and video clips on TV, do the following: 1. Connect a Nokia Video Conn ectivity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2. Connect t he other en d of the Nok ia Video Connectivity Cable t o the Nokia AV Connec tor of your device. 3. You may ne ed to select th e cable mode. 4. Press , and select Ga llery > Images & videos and the f ile you want to view. The images are shown in the image vi ewer, and t he vide o clips are played in RealPlayer. All audio, includin g the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed t o the TV w hen the No kia Video Connectivity Cable is connecte d to the device. You can use th e device microphone normally. For all applications other than the Images & videos folder in Gallery and RealPlayer, the TV screen displays what i s displayed on th e screen of your device. The opened image is displayed in full- screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on th e TV, zooming in is not availa ble. When you open a highl ighted video clip, RealPla yer starts playing the video clip on the device display and the TV screen. See "RealPlayer , " p. 90 . You can view images as a slide show on T V. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full-scree n while th e selected m usic plays. See "Slide show ," p. 42 . Presentations With pres entations, y ou can view SVG (scalable vector gr aphics) file s, such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain th eir appearanc e when printed or viewed with different screen siz es and resolutions. To view SVG files, press , and select Gallery > Presentations . Scroll to an image, and select 44 Gallery
Option s > Play . To pause playing, select Option s > Paus e . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, pr ess 7 or 9 . To switch between full an d normal screen, press * . Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to pr int, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivity. You ca n also print images usin g wireless LAN. If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compatible printer. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures t aken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, o r image vi ewer. When you use Image print fo r the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you select the image. Selec t a printer. The printer is set as the default printe r. To print to a printer comp atible with PictBridge, connect t he comp atible data cable before you select the print option, and ch eck that the data c able mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See "USB," p. 74 . The printer is automatically displayed when you select the print option. If the default pr inter is not available , a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change th e default printer , select Options > Setti ngs > Default printer . Print preview After you selec t the printer, th e selected images are displayed usin g predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the selec t ed printer. If the images do not fit o n a single page, scroll up or down to di splay the additional pag es. 45 Gallery
Print settings The available options va ry depending on the capabilities of the printing de vice you selected. To set a defa ult printer, sele ct Options > Default printer . To select the pa per size, select Paper size , th e siz e of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the pr evious view. Print on line With Print online , you can order prints of images o n l i n e d i r e c t l y t o y o u r h o m e o r t o a s t o r e w h e r e y o u can pick them up. You can also orde r different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online, you mu st have at least one printing service configuration file instal led. The files can be obtained from printing service providers that support Print online . For more information on the application, see the guides available at the No kia pro duct support pages or your local N okia websit e. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing service s on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the cont ent of the albums. The supported co ntent types may vary depending on the service provider. Before sharing images and videos online, you must subscribe to the service with an onlin e image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usual ly subscribe to th e service on the web page of the service p rovid er. Contact your service provider for details on su bscribing to the service. To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, press , and s elect Gallery > Images & videos . Scroll to the de sire d file, and select Options > Send > Post to web , or select the file and from the active toolbar. For more information on the application and compatible service provid ers, see the Nokia product support pag es or your lo cal Nokia websit e. 46 Gallery
Home network About home network Your device is compatib le with Uni versal Plug and Play architecture (UPnP). Usin g a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router, you can creat e a home network and connec t compat ible UPnP devices th at support WLAN to t he network, such as your device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or TV, or a sound system or TV equi pped with a compatible wireless multimed ia receiver . To use the W LAN function of your de vice in a home network, you mu st have a working WLAN home connection set up and have other UPnP enabled home devices to connect to th e same home network. See "Wireless LAN, " p. 68 . The home ne twork uses t he security sett ings of the WLAN connection . Use the home ne twork feature in a WLAN infrastructure networ k with a WLAN ac cess point device and encryption enabled. You can share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices using th e home network. To manage your home netw ork settin gs, pres s , and select Tools > Connectivit y > Home media . You can also u se the home ne twork to view, play , copy , or pr int c ompatible medi a file s from Gallery. See "View and share media files," p. 49 . Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection request from another compatible device, o r in Ga llery, sele ct the option to view, pla y, print, or co py media files on your device or search for other devi ces in the Home network folder. Important security information When you configure you r WLAN home network, enable an encryption meth od on yo ur access point device, then on the othe r de vices you intend to connect to your home ne twork. Refer to the documentatio n of the device s. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. You can view or change th e settings of the WLAN internet access poin t in your device. See "Acc ess points," p. 148 . If you use the ad hoc operati ng mode to create a home network with a co mpatible device, enable one of the encryption met hods in WLAN security mode when you c onfigure the internet access point. See "Conne ction settin gs," p. 147 . This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party join ing the ad hoc network. Your device noti fies you if another device a ttempts to connect t o it and the home network. Do n ot accept connection requests from an unknown device . 47 Gallery
If you use WLAN in a network that does not have encryption, switch off sha r ing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See "Settings for home network," p. 48 . Settings for home network To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through WLAN, you must create and configure your WLAN home interne t access point, then configure the settings for home network in the Home media application. See "WLAN interne t access poi nts," p. 69 . See "Connection sett ings," p. 147 . The options related t o home network ar e not available in applica tions before the settings in the Home media appl ication have been configured. When you ac cess the Home media application for the first ti me, the setu p wizard open s and helps you define the home network se ttings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the Home media main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a c ompatible PC to the home netwo rk, on the PC, you must instal l th e related sof tware. You get the software from the CD- ROM or DV D-ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device support pages on the Nokia websit e. Config ure s etting s To configure the settings for hom e network, select Tools > Co nnectivity > Home media > Settings and from the following: â Home access point â Sele ct Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access po int every time y ou connect to the home netw ork, Create new to define a new ac cess point that is used automatically w hen you use the h ome network, or None . If your home network does not have WLAN security se ttings enab led, you ge t a security warning. You can continu e and switch the WLAN security on late r; or cancel defining th e access point and first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points," p. 14 8 . â Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to th e other com p atible devices in the home netw ork. â Copy to â Select the memory where y ou want to save copied media files. Set sharing on and define content Select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Share content and from the following: â Content sh aring â Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devi ces. Do not set content sharing on before yo u have configu red all the other settings. If you set content sharing on , the 48 Gallery
other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view and cop y your fil es you have selected for sharing in the Images & videos folder. If you do not want the othe r devices to access your files, set content sharing off. â Images & video â Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status of images and videos. To up date the conten t of the folder, sele ct Option s > Refre sh cont ent . â Music â Sel ect playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing content of playlists. To update the content of the folder, sele ct Options > Refresh co ntent . View and share media files To share your media files with other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set content sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content, " p. 48 . If content sha ring is off in you r device, you can st ill view and copy the media files stored in anothe r home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show med ia files s tored in you r device To show your images, videos, and sound clips in another home network de vice, such as a compa tible TV, do the fo llowing: 1. In Gallery, select an imag e, video clip, or sound clip, and Options > Show via ho me network . 2. Select a compatibl e device in whi ch the medi a file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your device, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other devic e. 3. To stop sharing, select Opt ions > Stop showing . Show media fi les store d in the ot her device To show media files that are stored on another home network device in your device (or in a compatible TV, for example), do the following: 1. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Browse hom e . Your device starts the search of other compatible devices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a device from the list. 3. Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of t he other device. To search files with di fferent criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > Sort by . 4. Select the media file or folder you want to view. 49 Gallery
5. Press the scroll key, and select Play or Show , and On device or Via home ne twork . 6. Select the device in which the fil e is shown. T o a d j u s t t h e v o l u m e w h e n playing a video or sound clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Stop (available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print images sa ved in Gallery through a home network with a UPnP compatible printer. See "Imag e print, " p. 45 . Content sharing doe s not have to be switched on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your dev ice to anothe r compati ble de vice, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options > Move and co py > Copy to home ne twork or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on . To copy or transfer files from the other device to your devi ce, select a file in the other device and the desired copying option from the op tions list. Content sharin g does not have to be swit ched on. 50 Gallery
Positioning (GPS) About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that includes 24 satellites and their ground stations that monitor the operation of the satellit es. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio sig nals from the satellites an d measures th e travel time of the signal s. From the trav el time, the GPS receive r can calcula te its location to the accura cy of me ters. The coordinate s in the GPS are exp ressed in degree s and decima l degre es format u sing the inte rnationa l WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positi oning Syst em (GPS) is operated by the governme nt of the U nited States, whi ch is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affec ted by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United St ates Department o f Defense civ il GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be a ffec ted by you r lo cation, buildings, natural obstacles, and we ather con ditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoo rs to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise loc ation measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the G PS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigat ion. Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS). Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is us ed to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection, which assists in calculating t he coordinat es of your curre nt location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. A-GPS is a network service. Your device is preconfigu re d to use the Noki a A-GPS service, if no service prov ider specific A-GPS settings are available. The assi stance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service serv er only when needed. You must have a packet data internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS servic e. To define an access point for A-GPS , press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > General > Positioning > Positio ning ser ver > Access point . A wireless LAN 51 Positioning (GPS)
access point cannot be used for this service. The packet data internet acc e ss point is asked wh en GPS is used for the first time in your devic e. To enable or disable diffe rent positioning methods, such as Bl uetooth GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Positi oning > Position ing meth ods . GPS receiver The GPS receiv er is located in th e top of the devic e. When using th e receiver, fr om an upright position, move the device to an angle of ab out 45 degrees, with an unobstru cted view of the sky. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minut es. Establishing a GPS connection in the car may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. About satellite signals If your device cannot find the satel lite signal, consider the following: â If you are indoors, go outdoors to receiv e a better signal. â If you are outdoors, move to a more op en space. â Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. See "GPS receiver," p. 52 . â If the weather conditions are bad, the sign al strength may be affected. â If the power saver turns on while the device is attempting to esta blish a GPS connec tion, the attempt is interrupted. â Establishing a GPS connectio n may take f rom a couple of seconds to several minutes. Satellite status To check how many sate llit es your devi ce has found, and whether your de vice is receiving sa tellite signals, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS data > Position > 52 Positioning (GPS)
Option s > Satellite status . Or, in the Maps application, select Options > Map options > Satellite info . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the sate llite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calculate th e coordina tes of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. Wh en the init ial calcul ation has been made, it may be possible to continue ca lculating the coordinates of y our location wit h three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive y our position information. Service providers may offe r information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your device. When you receiv e a position request , a message is displayed showing the service that is making th e request. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Rej ect to deny the request. Maps About Maps Press , an d sel ect Maps . With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for diffe rent cities and coun tries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one location t o another, and save locations as landmarks and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides and a turn-by-tu rn navigation serv ice with voic e guidance. Maps uses GPS. You can define the positioning methods used with your device in th e device 53 Positioning (GPS)
settings. See "Positioning settings," p. 144 . For the most accurate location inform ation, use either th e internal GPS or a compatib le external GPS receiver. When you use Maps for the first time , you may need to define an internet access point for down loading map information for your current l ocation. To change the default acce ss point later, select Options > Settings > Network > Default access point . Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography provided fo r use in this device. Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Tip: You can al so download m aps by us ing a wireless LAN connecti on or through the internet using Nok ia Map Loader PC software. See "Download maps," p. 55 . To receiv e a note wh en yo ur device registers to a network out side your h ome cellular network, select Options > Settings > Network > Roa ming warni ng > On . Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. Browse maps The map coverage varies by country. When you open t h e Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location tha t was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application zooms in to the capital city of the country you ar e in based on the information the device re ceives from the cel lular network. At the same t i me, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not b een downloaded during previous sessions. To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select Opti ons > Find place > GPS position [ 0 ] , or press 0 A GPS indicator is shown on the display when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connec tion, the c ircles are ye llow. When the devic e receives enou gh data fro m the satellites to calculate the coordinates of you r current location, the circle s turn green. To view information about satellit es when you are using Ma ps, sele ct Op tions > Map options > Satellite in fo . Your current lo cation is indicated on the map with . 54 Positioning (GPS)
To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. To zoom in or out, press * or # . To switch be tween the 2D and 3D views, select Option s > Map option s > 2D/3D . To find a location, select Option s > Find place . You can choose to go to your GPS position, find an address, find a point of interest by entering a key w ord, find locations nearby, or browse a guide (extra service). To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to plan a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and se lect the desired option. When you browse t he map on the display, for example, move to an other country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service prov ider's network . For more information on data transm ission ch arges, contact your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). To define what kinds of po ints of interest are shown on the ma p, select Options > Map option s > Categories a nd the desired categories. To save a loca tion as a landmark, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select Save > As landmark , enter a name for the landmark, and select th e categories you wan t to includ e it in. To take a screen shot of your location, select Save > As image . The screen shot is saved in Gallery. To send the screen shot, in Gallery, selec t the screen shot, and from the active t oolbar. To view saved landmarks, select Option s > Find place > Landmark . To send a landmark to a compatible dev ice, in the landmarks view, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you send th e landmark in a text message , the information i s converted to plain te xt. To adjust the ne twork, routing, an d general settings, select Option s > Settings . Download maps When you browse t he map on the display, for example, move to anot her country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded 55 Positioning (GPS)
maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve transmission of large amounts of data through your service prov ider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your serv ice provider. You can view the amou nt of transferred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or search for locations online. To prevent the device from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for example, when you are outside your home cellular network, select Options > Settings > Network > Use network > Never . To define how much memory card space yo u want to use for saving maps or voice guidance files, select Options > Settings > Network > Max. memory card use (%) . This option is av ailabl e only when a compatible memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the oldest map data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC softw are. Nokia Map Loader N o k i a M a p L o a d e r i s P C s o f t w a r e t h a t y o u c a n u s e t o download and install maps for different countries from the internet t o your device or a compatible memory card (if inserted). You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn n avigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from the inte rnet at www.nokia.com/map s. Follow the instructio ns on the screen . You must use th e Maps application before using Nokia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history information to ch eck the v ersion of map data to be dow nloade d. After you have inst alled the PC softw are to your PC, to download maps, do the following: 1. Connect your device to the PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Data transfer as the USB conn ection mode. 2. Open Nokia Map Lo ade r your PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the v ersion of map data to be downloaded. 3. Selec t the m aps or v oice guidance files you want, and download and install them to your dev ice. Find a place To view p oints of interest near your current location or other locat ions on the map, select Options > Find place > N earby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select Options > Find place > Keyword search or start 56 Positioning (GPS) on
entering th e first letters o f the name, and select Find . To search for a location by address, select Option s > Find place > By a ddress . You mus t enter the city and country. To use an a ddress you have saved to a conta ct card in Contacts, select Option s > Find place > By address > Opti ons > Select from contacts . To view a search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map . To return to the results list, select Back . To view a list of your previous locations, select Option s > Find place > Recent . Plan a route To plan a route from one location to anothe r (for example, from your home to your office), do the following: 1. Scroll to a point on the map, press the scro ll key, and select Route from . 2. Scroll to From , and selec t Option s > Select and the desired opt ion. To adjust the routing settings, such as the mode of transportation, sele ct Options > Settings > Routing . 3. To select the destin atio n, sc roll to To , and select Option s > Select and the desired option. 4. To view the route it inerary, selec t Options > Show route . The route is calcul ated using the selected routing settings. To view the itin erary route on th e map, selec t Option s > Show on map . To run a simul ation of the route, select Options > Start s imul ation . Tip: You can also use a compatible GPS receiver with Bl uetooth connecti vity with Maps. For example, in a car, an external GPS receiver can b e position ed so that it has a clear view of the sky. E nable the use of an external GPS receiver in positioning settings. See "Positioning settings," p. 144 . Extra services for Maps You can purchase and download different kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for d ifferent cities to your device . You can also purchase a turn- by-turn navigation service with voice guidance to use it in Maps. The downloaded gu ides are automaticall y saved to your devi ce. The licence you p urchase for a guide or navigation is device-specific and cannot be transferred from your devi ce to an other devi ce. 57 Positioning (GPS)
Naviga tion To purchase a navi gation service with voice guidance to use in Maps, sel ect Options > Extra services > Add navigatio n . After purchasing the navig ation upgrade, the service is available through Maps. After creating a route in Maps, to st art navigation to the desired destination with GPS using voice guidance, s elect Options > Start navigation . See "Plan a route," p. 57 . You can also start navigat ion by selecting any location on the map or in a results list, and Navigate to . When you use naviga tion for the first time, you are prompted to select t he language of the voice guidance and download the voice guidance files of the selected lang uage. You can also download v oice guidance files using Nokia Map Loader. See "Download maps," p. 55 . To change the language later, in the Maps main view, select Opti ons > Settings > Gene ral > Voice guidance and a language, and download the voice guidance files for the sel ected language . To discard the c reated route and use anothe r route, select Options > Alternati ve route . To view only the n ext turns and hide the map, select Options > Map options > Ar row mode . To stop navigation, select Option s > Stop navigation . Guides To purchase and downlo ad different kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for different cities to your de vice, se lect Opti ons > Extra services > Guid es . The guides provide inform ation about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and othe r points of interest. The guides must be downloaded and purchased before use. To browse a downloaded guide, on the My guides tab in Guides, select a guide and a subcategory (if availa ble). To download a new guide to your device, in Guides, scroll right to the Nearest guides or All guides tab, select the desired guide, and press Yes . The purchase process starts automatically. Yo u can pay for the guides through a c redit card or have the amount charge d to your ph one bill (if supported by your cellular network service provider). To confirm the purchase, select OK twice. To receive a confirmation of the purchase through e -mail, enter your name and e-ma il address, and select OK . 58 Positioning (GPS)
Landmarks Press , an d sele ct Tools > Connectivity > Landmarks . With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of spec ific locations in your device. You can sort the saved lo cations into differen t categories, such as business, and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved l andmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data and Maps . GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format u sing the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To crea te a new landm ark, select Options > New landmark . To make a positioning request for your current location, se lect C urre nt posit ion . To enter the position informat ion manually, select Enter manually . To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select Options > Edit . Scroll to the d esired field, and enter the information. To view th e landmark on t he map, selec t Options > Show on map . To create a route to t he location, select Options > Navigate using map . You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select Options > Edit c ategories . To add a landmark to a category , scroll to the landmark in La ndmarks, and selec t Option s > Add to categor y . Scroll to each category to which you want to ad d the landmark, an d select it. To send one or several landmarks to a compatible device, select Op tions > Send . Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidan ce information to a selected destina tion, position information about your current location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destin ation and approximate duration of travel. Press , and selec t Tools > Connectivity > GPS data . The coordinate s in the GPS are exp ressed in degre e s and deci mal degre es format using the inte rnational WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS da ta, the GPS receiver o f your device must initially receive posi tion information from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinates of your location. When th e initial calculation has b een 59 Positioning (GPS)
made, it may be possible to continu e calculating the coordinates of your locati on with three satellit es. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Route guidance Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS data > Navigation . Start the route gu idance o u tdoors. If started indoors, the GPS rec eiver may not receive the necessary information from the satell ites. Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approx imate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is desi gned to show the straightest route and the shortest dist ance to th e destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. Difference s in altitude are not taken into account when calculatin g the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your tri p de stination, select Options > Set destinat ion and a landmark as the destination, or enter the l atitude and l on gitude coordinates. Se lect Stop navigat ion to clear the destination se t for your trip. Retrieve position information Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Position . In the posit ion view, you c a n view th e posit ion information of your current location. An estimat e of the accura cy of the lo cation is displa yed. To save your current lo ca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save position . Landmarks are saved locations with more information, and they can be used in other compatib le applica tions and transferred between c o mpatible devices. Trip meter Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Trip distance . Select Options > Start to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Select Reset to set the tri p distance and ti me and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calcul ation. Sel ect Rest art to se t the odomete r and total time to zero. The trip meter has limite d accuracy, an d rounding errors may oc cur. Accura cy can also b e affecte d by availability and quality of GPS signals. 60 Positioning (GPS)
Web browser With the We b browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML ) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hy pertext marku p language (XH TML), or the wireless markup lang uage (WML). If the web page is unreada ble or not supported and garbage code is found w hile browsing, you can try to press , and select Web > Optio ns > Settings > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. To browse the web , you need to have an int e rnet access point configured in your device. Browse the web Press , an d sele ct Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the standby mode. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To browse a web page, in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter t he address in the field ( ), and press the scroll key. Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a pag e, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . To enter a new web page a ddress you want to visi t, select Options > Go to web addr ess . Tip: To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while browsing, p ress 1 , and select a bookmark. 61 Web browser
To retrieve the latest content of t h e page fro m the server, select Option s > Navigation options > Reload . To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select Option s > Save as bookm ark . To use visual hi story to view sna pshots of the pages you have visite d during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History list is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not the first page you vi sit). To go to a prev iously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Option s > Tools > Save page . You can save pages and browse them later when offline. You can also group these saved pages into folders. To access the page s you ha ve save d, sele ct Options > Bo okmar ks > Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or ac tions for the page that is open, select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). To allow or prevent t he automatic ope n ing of multiple windows, select Options > Window > Block pop- ups or Allow pop-up s . Shortcuts while bro wsing â Press 1 to open your bookmarks. â Press 2 to search for keyw ords in the current page. â Press 3 to return to the previous page. â Press 5 to list all ope n windows. â Press 8 to show the page o verview of the c urrent page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. â Press 9 to enter a new web address. â Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings). â Press * and # to zoom in or out on t he page. Tip: To return to the stan dby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return t o the browser, press and hold , and select the browser from the list. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps you select frequent ly used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, pr ess and hold th e scroll key on an empty spot on a web pa ge. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To sele ct a feature, press the scroll key. In the toolbar, select from the followin g: â Frequently used links â V i e w a l i st o f t h e w e b addresses you visit frequently. 62 Web browser
â Page overview â See an overview of the current web page. â Find â Search for keyword s within the current page. â Reload â Refre sh the page. â Subscribe to web feeds (if a vaila ble) â View a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Navigate p ages Mini Map and pag e overview help you na vigate web pages that contain a large amount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the we b page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location, stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and le aves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of informat ion, you can also use Page over view to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press 8 . To find the desired sp ot on the page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 a g a i n t o z o o m i n a n d view the desire d section of th e page. Web feeds and blo gs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are used by the weblog communit y and news organisati ons to share the latest headlines or text, for example, news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and Atom t echnologies. It is common to find web feed s on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a w eb feed, select Option s > Subscr ibe . To view the web feeds to which you have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it and Options > Refresh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Option s > Settings > Web f eeds . 63 Web browser
Content search To search for keywords, phone numbe rs, or e-mail addresses within the cu rrent web page, select Options > Find and the desired optio n. To go to the previous matc h, scroll up. To go to the next match, scroll down. Tip: To sea rch fo r keyw ords w ithin t he pag e, press 2 . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items c an be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective appl icat ions in your device, for example, a downloaded photo or an . mp3 file can be saved in Gallery. Importan t: Only install and use appl ications and other software from trusted sources, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To download an item, do the following: 1. Select the link . 2. Select t he appropriat e option to pu rchase the item (for example, "Buy"). 3. Carefully read all the information provided. 4. To continue or cancel the download, select the appropriate option (for example, "A ccept" or "Cancel"). When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Do wnloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Opti ons to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open t he Web applica tion. You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookma rks in the Auto. bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ). indicates the starting page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the intern et. You can also save addresses received in me ssages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. 64 Web browser
To open the bo okmarks view wh ile browsing, pre ss 1 , or select Options > Bookmarks . To edit the details of a bookmark, such as the tit le, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also ope n other browser folders. The Web application allow s you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content o f the pages you have saved off line. Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. book marks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web feeds , you can vi ew saved lin ks to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organisation web pages, personal weblogs, onli ne communities t hat offer th e la test headlines, and article summaries. W eb feeds use RSS an d Atom technolo gies. Empty the cache The information or servic es you have a ccessed are stored in the cach e memory of the device . A cache is a memory location that is used to store data tem porarily. I f you have tried to a ccess or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after e ach use. Th e information or services you have accessed are stored in the cac he. To empty the c ache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . End the connection To end the conne ction and view t he browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; o r to end the connec tion and close the browser, select Option s > Exit . To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. To delete the in formation th e network serv er collects a bout your vi sits to various web page s, select Options > Clear privacy data > Delete cookie s . Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connecti on, the da ta transmission bet ween the device and the intern et gate way or se rver is encrypted. The security icon does not indic ate that th e data transmission be tween the gateway an d the conten t server (or place where t he requested re source is 65 Web browser
stored) is secure. The serv ice provider secures the data transmission between t he gateway and th e content server. Securi ty certi ficates m a y be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notifi ed if the identit y of the serve r is not authen tic or if you do not have the correct se curity certi ficate in your device. For more informatio n, contact your service provider. Web settings Press , and select Web . Select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: General settings â Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. â Homepage â Define the home page. â Mini map â Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages," p. 63 . â History list â Whi le browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on. â Security warnings â Hide or show security notificatio ns. â Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page sett ings â Load content â Select wh ether you want to load im ages and oth er objects whi le browsing. I f you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, sel ect Options > Tools > Load i mage s . â Screen size â Sele ct betw een full screen and the normal view with the opt ions list. â Default encoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to language for the current page. â Block po p-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop- ups while browsing. â Automatic reload â If you want the web pages to be refreshed automa tically whi le browsing, select On . â Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy se ttings â Auto. bookmarks â Enable or disable automatic bookmark col lecting. If you want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Auto. b ookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmark s view, select Hide folder . â Form data saving â If you do not want the dat a you enter to different fo rms on a web page to be 66 Web browser
saved and used the ne xt time you op en the page , select Off . â Cookies â Enable or disabl e t he receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed se ttings â Automatic upda tes â Define whet her you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often y ou want to update them. Setting t he application to retrieve web feeds automatical ly may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data through your servi ce provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. â Acc. point for auto-upd ate â Select the desired access point for up dating. This option is only available when Automatic updates is on. 67 Web browser
Connections Your device offe rs several options to conn ect to the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (WLAN). With W LAN, you can connect your device to the internet and c ompatible devices that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN . Check w ith your local authorit ies for more in formation. Features that use WLAN, or that ar e allowed t o run in the backg round while usin g other feature s, increase the d emand on battery power and re duce the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard â Operation at 2.4 GHz â Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys u p to 128 bits, W i-Fi pr otected acce ss (WPA), and 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. WLAN connections To use WLAN, you must c reate an int ernet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN. Use the access point for applicat ions that need to co nnect to the internet. See "WLA N interne t access points," p. 69 . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption meth ods to increase the security of your wirele ss LAN connection. Using encryption reduc e s the risk of unauthorized access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection u sing a WLAN internet access point. Th e active WLAN connection ends when you end the data con nection. You can use WL AN during a voice cal l or when packet data is active. You can only be connecte d to one 68 Connections
WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the sa me internet access point. When the device is in th e o ffline profile, you can st ill use WLAN (if av ailable). Remember to comply with any applicable safety re quirements wh en establishing and usi ng a WLAN connection. Tip: To c heck the unique med ia access cont rol (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard he lps you t o connect t o a WLAN and manage your WLAN connecti ons. The WLAN wizard sh ows th e status of your WLAN connections in the active stand by mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displa yed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start Web browsing . If you select a secured WL AN network, you are ask ed to enter the re levant p asscodes. To c onnect to a hidden network, you mu st enter the correct network name (serv ice set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . If you are connec ted to a WLAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing . To end the conn ection in th e WLAN, select t he status and Disconnect WLAN . If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN , WLAN scanni ng off is displayed. To set scanning on and search for availabl e WLANs, select the status and press the scrol l key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, select the st atus and select WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard application in the menu, press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. . WLAN internet access points Press , an d sel ect Tools > WLAN wiz. Select Option s and from the following: â Filter WLAN netw orks â Filter out W LANs in the list of found networks. The select ed networks are filtered out the next time the app lication searches for WLANs. 69 Connections
â Details â View the d etails of a network show n in the list. If you select an act ive connection, the connection details are displayed. â Define access point â Create an internet access point (IA P) in a WLAN. â Edit access point â Edit the details of an existing IAP. You can also us e connection manager to create internet access p oints. See "Active data connections," p. 70 . Operating modes There are two operating mode s in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devi ces are connected to each other through a WLAN access point device, or wireless de vic es are connecte d to a wired LAN through a WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc ope rating mode , device s can send and receive data directly with each other. Connection manager Active data connections Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > A ctive data connections . In the active data connections vie w, you can see the open data conne ctions: data calls packet data connections WLAN connections Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, roun ding off for bil ling, and so forth. To end a connection , select Options > Disconn ect . To c l ose all open connections, sele ct Options > Disco nnect all . To view th e details of a conne ction, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connec tion type. Available WLAN networks Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. > Available WLAN net works . The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their networ k mod e (infrastructure or ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with enc ryption, an d if your devic e has an active connec tion in the netw ork. To view th e details of a network, sel ect Option s > Details . 70 Connections
To create an internet acc ess point in a network, select Options > Define access point . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity You can make a wirel ess connection to other compatible devices w ith Blue tooth conn ectivity. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enh ancements su ch as headsets and car kits. You can use Bl uetooth connectivi ty to send images, video clips, mu sic and sound clips, and notes; make a wireless connection to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer file s); and connect t o a compatib le printer to print images with Image print. Since devices with Bluet ooth wireless technology communicate using radio wave s, they do not need to be in di re c t l in e- of -s ig h t. Ho we ve r , t he y m us t b e within 10 m etres (33 fee t ) of each ot her, although the conn ection may be subject to i nterferen ce from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is c ompliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following p rofiles: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Ba sic Ima ging Profile, Basic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface Device Prof ile, Object Push Profil e, SIM Access Profile, and Synchronization Profi le. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetoot h technology, use Nokia approved en hancements f or this model. Ch eck wi th the manufacturers of ot her devices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restri ctions on using Bluetooth t e c h n o l o g y i n s o m e l o c a t i o n s . C h e c k w i t h y o u r l o c a l authorities or service provider. Features us ing Bluetooth t echnology, or allo wing such features t o run in the background wh ile using other features, increase the deman d on battery power and reduce the batter y life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetoot h connecti vity. See "Phone and SIM," p. 142 . Setting s Press , an d sel ect Tools > Blueto oth . When you open the applicatio n for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your dev i ce. You can change th e name later on. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â To make a wir eles s conn ectio n to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a con nection. To switch off Bluetoot h connectivi ty, select Off . 71 Connections
â My phon e's vis ibili ty â To allow your d evice to be found by other de vices w ith Blue tooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time after w hich the visibili ty is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . To hide yo ur device from othe r devices, select Hidden . â My phon e's name â Edit the name show n to other devices wi th Bluetooth wirele ss technology. â Remote SIM mode â To enable another d e vice, such as a compatible car kit enhancement, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, s elect On . See "Remote S IM mode," p. 74 . Security tips Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When you are no t using Bluetooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetoot h > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair wit h or accept connection re quests from an unknow n device. This pr otec ts your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Blue tooth connections can be act ive at a time. For e xample, if yo u are connecte d to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to anothe r compati ble d evi ce at the same time. 1. Open the ap plication where t he item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery. 2. Select t he item and Options > Send > Via Bluetoot h . Devices with Bluetooth wireless techn ology that are within range are displayed. Device icon s are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3. Select the de vice with which you w ant to connect. 4. If the other device requ ires pairing before data can be transmitted, a to ne sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices," p. 73 . 72 Connections
When the conne ction is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique addr ess (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the sta ndby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create yo ur own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair wit h a device , select Options > New paired devi ce . Devices that are with in range are displa yed. 2. Select the device , and enter the passc ode. The same passcode must be entered on th e other device as well. 3. Some audio e nhancements conn ect automatically to your devic e after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancemen t, and select Option s > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, scroll to the devic e, and select from the follo wing option s: â Set as authorised â Connections betw een your device and the auth orised dev ice can be made without your know ledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your comp atible head set or P C or de vice s that bel ong to someone you trust. indicates auth orised devices in the paired devices view. â Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separate ly every time. To cancel a pairing, scro ll to the device, and select Option s > Delete . If you want to cancel all pa irings, select Option s > Delete all . Receive data using Blueto oth connectivit y When you receive data th rough Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages received 73 Connections
through Bluetoot h connectivity are indicated by . Remote SIM mode Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and the pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the othe r device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compa tibl e car kit enhancem ent, activate B luetooth connectivit y, and enable th e use of the remo te SIM mode with your device. Activate th e remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection t o the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area, and you cannot use SIM card services or features requiring cellul ar network coverage. When the wireless devic e is in the remote SI M mode, you can only use a compatible connecte d enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode , except to the emergenc y numbers programmed into y our device. To make calls from your device, you must leave the rem ote SIM mode. If the device is lo cked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SI M mode, press the power key, and se lect Exi t remote SIM mo de . USB Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > USB . To have the devic e ask the purp ose of the connection each time a c ompatible dat a cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an acti ve connection, select USB mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Nseries PC suite, Nokia Lifeblog, and Nokia Software Updater. â Data transfer â Tr ansfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Use this mode also for downloading maps with the Nokia Map Loader PC application. â Image print â Print images on a compatible printe r. â Media player â Synchronise music with Windows Media Player. 74 Connections
PC connections You can use your device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, tr ansfer images be tween your de vice and a compatible PC. Always create th e connection from the PC to synch ronise wi th your device. 75 Connections
Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet vide o servic es usin g packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video cl ips from a compa tible PC t o your devic e and vi ew them in Video Centre. Video Centre supports the same file formats as RealPlayer. All videos are played in the landscape mode by default. Your devic e may have predefined services. Service provid ers may provide free con tent or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service prov ider. Find and view videos 1. Press , and select Video centre . 2. To connect to a service, scroll left or right, and select the desired video service. The device upda tes and displays the content available in the service. 3. To view videos b y catego ries (if availabl e), scroll left or right to view the ot her tabs. 4. To view informatio n about a video, select Options > Video deta ils . 5. Some video clips c an be stream ed over the air, but others must be fi rst downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . To stream a video clip or view a downloaded clip, select Options > Play . 76 Nokia Video Centre
6. When the clip is playing, use th e scroll key an d the selection keys to cont rol the player. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downl oaded videos are saved in Video centre > My videos . To conne ct to the inte rnet to bro wse available services that y ou can ad d to the main view , select Add new serv ices . Internet videos Internet vid eos are video clips distributed in the internet using RSS -based feeds. You can add new feeds to Internet videos in the settings. You can view your fe eds in the Internet videos folder in Video Centre. To add or delete feeds, selec t Options > Feed subscrip tions . To view the vi deos available in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information about a video, select Option s > Video details . To download a video, scroll to it, and select Option s > Download . To play the downloaded vi deo, press the scroll key. Play downl oaded videos The downloaded videos are saved in Video centre > My v ideos . To play a downlo aded video, p ress the sc roll key. To play a downloaded vi deo in the home network, select Options > Show v ia home network . Home network mu st be configured first. See "About home network, " p. 47 . When the clip is playin g, use the scr oll key and the selection keys to control the player . If there is not en ough free space in the device memory and compatible memory card, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest videos when new videos are downloaded. indicates videos that may soon be deleted. To prevent a video from being automatically dele ted ( ), select Option s > Prot ect . Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own vi deos to Video Cent re from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. To transfer videos from a compatible PC to the memory card in your device, do the following: 77 Nokia Video Centre
1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device ( E:\ ) where you ca n transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable . 2. Select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. S e l e c t t h e v i d e o s y o u w a n t t o c o p y f r o m y o u r P C . 4. Transfer the vi deos to E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred vide os appear in the My videos folder in Video Centre. Video files in other folder s of your de vice are no t displayed . Settings In the Video Centre main view, sele ct Option s > Settings and from the following: â Video service selection â Select the video services you w ant to in the main view of the application . You can also view the details of a video service. Some services require a user name and a password that you receive from the service provider. â Defaul t access po ints â Select the access points used for the dat a connection. Using packet data access points to downlo ad files may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider fo r information about data transmission charges. â Parental control â Activate the parental lock for video services. â Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatib le memory card. If the selected memory becomes full, the device saves the content in the othe r memory, if available . If there is not enough spac e in th e other memo ry, the application automatically dele tes some of the oldest videos. â Thumbnai ls â Select whether to view thumbnail images in video lists. 78 Nokia Video Centre display
Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposu re to high volume may damage your hearin g. Do not hold th e device near your ear when t he loudspeaker is in use, b e cause the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or al l the variations of file format s. You can also use Music play er to listen to podcast episodes. Podca sting is the metho d for delivering audio or video content ov er the internet using either RSS or Atom technolo gies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music to your device," p. 82 . Play a song or a podcast epis ode You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have up dated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all available items to the library, in the Music player main view, selec t Option s > Refresh . To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following: 1. Press , and select Mu sic > Music player . 2. Select Music or Podcas ts . 3. Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast ep isode you want to hear. 4. To play the selected fi les, press the scroll key. To pause pla yback, press th e scroll k ey; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down . To fast forward or rewind , press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to th e next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again 79 Music folder
within 2 seconds after a so ng or podcast has starte d. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuf fle . To repeat the current item ( ), all i tems ( ), or to switch repeat off, select Options > Rep eat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switc h ed off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance bass, select Opti ons > Audio settings . To view a visualisation during playback, select Options > Show visualisation . To return to t he standby mode and le ave the p layer playing in the backgro u nd, pres s the end key, or t o switch to another ope n ap plication, press an d hold . To close the player, select Options > Exit . Music menu Press , and select Music > Music p layer > Music . The music menu shows the availabl e music. Select the desired option in th e music menu to view all songs, sorted songs, or playlists. When the Music player is playing in th e background, to open the Now playing v iew in th e multimedia menu, press the multimedia key. Playl ists Press , and select Music > Music player > Music . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlist detail s . Create a playlis t 1. Selec t Options > Create playlist . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list unde r an artist title, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5. When you ha ve made your selection s, select Done . 80 Music folder
If a compatible memory card is inser ted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs later, wh en viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Optio ns > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Option s > Remove . This does not delete the so ng from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playli st, scroll to the song you want to move, and se lect Options > Reorde r list . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. Podcasts Press , an d sele ct Music > Music player > Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played , partially played, and completely played. If an episode is part ially played, it plays from the last playback position th e next time it is p layed. If an episode i s never playe d or completel y played, it plays from the beginning. Home network with music pla yer You can play content stor ed in your Nokia device remotely on compatible de vices in a home network. You can also copy files fr om your No kia de vice to other devices that are connected to th e home network. Home network must be configure d first. See "About home network," p. 47 . Play a song or a podcast remotely 1. Press , and select Mu sic > Music player . 2. Select Music or Podcas ts . 3. Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast ep isode you want to hear. 4. Select the desired song or podcast and Options > Play > Via home network . 5. Select the devi ce in wh ich the fi le is played. Copy so ngs or podca sts wirelessly To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible devi ce in a home network, select a file and Options > Move and cop y > Co py to home netw ork or Move to hom e net. . Conten t sharing does not have to be switched on in the home network settings. See "Set sharing on and defin e conte nt," p. 48 . 81 Music folder
Transfer music to your device You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other com patible de vices using a compatible US B data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. PC requirements for music transfer: â Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) â A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your de vice's product pages on the Nokia website. â Nokia Nseries PC Suite 1.6 or later Windows Media Player 10 may cause playback delays to WMDRM technolo gy prot ected file s after they have been t ransferre d to your device. Check Microsoft support websit e for a hotfix to Windows Media Player 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Player. Transfer music from PC You can use three diff erent methods to transfer music: â To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where y ou can transfer an y data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. If you are using the USB cable, sele ct Data transf er as the connection mode. A compat ible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. â To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB dat a cable and select Media player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. â To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite, connect the compat ible USB data cable and select PC Suite as the conn ection mode. Use Data transf er and Media player modes to transfer files to a compatible memory card. To change the de fault USB co nnection mode, press , and sele ct Tools > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimised to transfer music files. For information about transferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see th e help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit the Nokia su pport pages. Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. 82 Music folder
Manual synchron isation With manual synchronisation, you can select the songs and playlists that yo u want t o move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is conn ected with Windows Media Player, select your d evice in the navigation pane on the right, if more than one device is conn ected. 2. In the l eft naviga tion pane, bro wse the music files on y our PC wh ich you w ant to s ynchr onise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the righ t. You can see the amou nt of available memory in your devic e above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums , select an item in the Sync List , right-click, and select Remo ve f rom list . 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync . Automati c synchro nisatio n 1. To activate the automatic synchronisat ion function in Window s Media Player, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handse t > Set Up Sync... , and check the Sync this device automati cally check box. 2. Select the playlists yo u want to syn chroni se automatically in the Availa ble playlists pane, and click Add . The selected items are transfe rred to the Playlists to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisation, click Finish . When the Sync this device automatic ally check box is checked and you connect you r device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the pl aylists you select for synch ronisatio n in Window s Media Play er. If no playlists have been selected, the whol e PC music library is selected for synchr onisation. If there is not enough free memory in your device, Windows Media Player selects ma nual synchro n isation automatically. To stop automatic sync hronisation, click the Sync tab, and select St op Syn c to 'No kia Han dset' . Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (network serv ice) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purch ase music, you first need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visi t music.n okia.com. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. 83 Music folder
To open Nokia Music Store, press , and select Music > Music sto re . To find more music in different c a tegories of the music menu, select Option s > Find in M usic store . Nokia Music St ore settings The availability and appear an ce of the music st ore settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and no t editable. If the settings are no t predefined, you m ay be asked to select the access point to use when connect ing to the music store. To select the access point, select Default a cc. pt. . In the music store, you ma y be able to edit the settings by selecting Opti ons > Settings . Radio You can use the radio as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and save d stations or with parallel visual informat ion related to the radio programme on the display if you tune to statio ns that offer Visual Radio service. The Visual Radio service uses packet data (n etwork service). Warning : Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. Do not hold the de vice near your ear when the loud speaker is in use, because the vo lume ma y be ext remel y loud. When you open the radio for the first time, a wizard helps you to save local radio stations (network service). If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stati ons in your area may not support V isual Radio. Listen to the radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible headset or enhancement ne eds to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function prop erly. Press , and select Music > Radio . Note that the qu ality of th e radio broadc ast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can normally make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an activ e call. To start a statio n search, select or . To change the freq uency manually, select Options > Manual tunin g . If you have previously save d radio stations, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . 84 Music folder
To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activa te louds peaker . To view available stations based on location, select Option s > Station directory (network service). To save the curre nt tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save station . To op en the l ist of your saved stat ions, select Options > Sta tions . To return to the standby mode and allow the FM radio to play in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs and to subscribe to the service , contact yo u r service provider. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select or Option s > Start visual service . If the visual service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or se lect Retriev e to search for it in the station directory (n etwork service). When the c onnection to the v isual service is established, the current visual content is displayed. Saved stations To open the list of yo ur sa ved stations, select Option s > Stations . To listen to a save d station, select Options > Statio n > Listen . To view availa ble visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Option s > Station > Sta r t visual service . To change station details, select Options > Statio n > Edit . Setting s Press , an d sel ect Music > Radio . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Start-up tone â Select whether a t one is played when the applicat ion is start ed. â Auto-start service â To start Visual Radio autom aticall y when yo u select a saved station that offers Visual Ra dio service, select Yes . â Access point â S e lect the acc ess point used for the data connectio n. You do not need an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. â Current region â S e l e c t t h e r e g i o n i n w h i c h y o u are currently located. Th is setting is displayed only if there is no n etwork co verage when t he applica tion is started. Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcas ti ng application (network service), you can search, di scover, subscribe to, and 85 Music folder
download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Warning : Listen to music at a moderate level. Continu ous exposure to high volume ma y damage your hearing. Do not hold the de vice near your ear when the loudsp eaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Settings Before using Nokia Podcastin g, set your conn ection and download settings. The recommended connection me thod is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before usin g other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow la rge data transfers for one mon thly fee. Connection settings To edit the conn ection settin gs, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Opti ons > Settings > Connection . Def ine the following: â Default access point â Select the access point to define your c onnection to the int ernet. â Search service URL â Define the po dcast sea rch service to be u sed in search es. Download settings To edit the download settings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Opt ions > Settings > Download . Define the following: â Save to â Define the location where you wan t to save your podc asts. â Update interval â Define how often podcasts are updated. â Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic update . â Next update time â Define the time of next automatic update . Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, the automatic updates are not activated. â Download limit (%) â Define the size of the memory that is used for podcast downloads. â If limit exceeds â Define what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the applicatio n to retrieve po dcasts automatically may involve the transmissio n of large amounts of data through your servic e providerâ s network. Co ntact your service provider for information about data transmission charge s. To restore the defaul t settings, select Op tions > Restore d efault in the settings view. 86 Music folder
Search Search helps you to find podca sts by keyword or title. The search engine uses t he podcast search service you set up in Po dcasting > Options > Settings > Connecti on > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, press , select Music > Podcasting > Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast titl es and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General t o pics, such as foot ball or hip-hop, u sually give be tter results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to marked c hannels and add th em to your podc asts, sel ect Opti ons > Subscribe . You can also add a podcast by selecting one. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the web site of the podcast, sel ect Options > Open web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, select Op tions > Descriptio n . To send selected podcas ts to another compa tible device, select Optio ns > Send . Directories Directories help you t o find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. To open directories, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Dire ctories . Contents of the directori es change. S elect t he desired directory folder to update it (net work service). When the colour of th e folder chan ges, press the scroll key again to open it. Directories can include top podcasts listed by popularity or themed fol ders. To open the desired folder topic, press the scroll key. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title, and press the scroll key. After yo u have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in the po dcasts menu. To add a new director y or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Fo lder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline pr ocessor ma rkup language) file, and Done . To edit the selec ted folder, web link , or web directory, sele ct Option s > Edit . To import an .opml file st ored on your device, select Option s > Import OPML file . Select the locat ion of the file, an d import it. 87 Music folder
To send a directory f older as a multimedia message or using Blueto oth connect ivity, select the fol der and Option s > Send . When you receiv e a message with an .opml file using Bl uetooth connectiv ity, open the file to save the file into the Received f o l d e r i n d i r e c t o r i e s . O p e n the folder to subscribe to any o f the links to add to your podcasts. Down load s After you have subscribed to a podca st, from directories, search, or by entering a URL, you can manage, download, and play episodes i n Podcasts . To see the podcasts you ha ve subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcas ts . To see individual episode titles (an episode is a particular media file of a pod cast), select the podcast title. To start a download, selec t the ep isode title. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episo des, select Options > Download or Continue do wnload . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading , select the podcast and Options > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown until the library is refreshe d. Play and manag e podcasts To display the available episodes from th e selected podcast, select Optio ns > Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of th e file, and time of th e upload. When the podc ast is fully downloaded, to play the full episode, select Podcasts > Options > Play , or press and select Music > Mu sic player > Podcasts . To update the selected podcast or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Opt ions > Update . To stop th e updating, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering the UR L of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of t he selected p odcast, sele ct Options > Edit . To delete a downloaded podcast or marked podcasts from your device , select Options > Delete . 88 Music folder
To send the sele cted podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and se nd a group of selected podcasts at once, se lect Options > Mark/ Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Option s to choose the desired action. To open th e websit e of the p odcast (network service), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts pro vide the opportu nity to intera ct with the cr eators by comment ing and voting . To connect to the inte rnet to do this, select Options > View comments . 89 Music folder
Media folder RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pl ay video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files wi th extensions such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlay er does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play v ideo clip s Press , and select Application s > Media > RealPlayer . 1. To play a saved media file, select Options > Open and from the following: â Most recent clips â Play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer. â Saved clip â Play a file saved in Gallery. 2. Scroll to a file, and press the sc roll key to play the file. To adjust the volume, u se the volume key. Stream content over the air Many service pr oviders require you to use an internet access point (IAP ) for your default acc e ss point. Other service prov iders allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, yo u can on ly open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer pla ys a .ram file if you open an http link to it in a browser. To stream content ov er the air (network se rvice), select a streaming link sa ved in G allery, on a web page, or received in a te xt message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device con nects to the site and starts loading the content. The content i s not saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special message from the service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: 90 Media folder
â Video â Select whether video clips are automatically repeate d after they finish p laying. â Streaming â Select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range use d when connecting. Contact your serv ice provider for the correct settings. Adobe Flash Player Press , an d sele ct Applications > Media > Flash Player . Use Adobe Flash Player to view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices. To open a flash fi le, scro ll to it, and sel ect it. Nokia Lifeblog Nokia Lifeblog keeps a multimedia diary of the items that you collect with your d e vice. Lifeblog organises your photos, videos, sounds, text messages, multimedia messages, and weblog posts into a chronology that you can browse , search, share, publish, and back up. Lifeblog mobile automati c ally keeps track of your multimedia items. Use Lifeblo g on your device to browse your items, send them to others, or publish them on the we b. For safekeeping, you can back up your Nokia Lifeblog database using the hard disk of your compatible PC or compat ible CDs, DVDs, removable drive, or netw ork dri ve. Addi tionally , you can p ost items to your compat ible webl og (blog). For more information on we blog services and their compatibility with Nokia Lifeblog, visit www.nokia.com/lifeblog. Press , and selec t Applications > Media > Lifeblog . The time line view opens and shows your multimedia items. To open your saved favourites, select Option s > View Favou rites . Activation key s To view digital rights activation keys, press , and select Applications > Media > Actv. keys . Digital rights management Content owners may use diffe rent types of digit a l rights management (DRM) tech nologies to protect their intel lectual pro perty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-pr otected con tent. With this d evice you can access cont ent prote cted with WMDR M 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and O MA DRM 2.0. If cert ain DRM software fails to protect the con tent, content own ers may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM- 91 Media folder
protected cont ent be revoked. Re vocation may also prevent rene wal of such DR M-protected content alrea dy in your de vice. Revocati on of su ch DRM software does no t affect t he use of content protected with other ty pes of DRM or the use of no n- DRM-pr otected con tent. Digital rights manag ement (DRM) pro tected conte nt comes with an associat ed activation key that defines your ri ghts to use the content. If your device has OMA DR M protected cont ent, to back up both the activati on keys and the conte nt, use the backup featu re of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activation k e y s w h i c h n e e d t o b e r e s t o r e d w i t h t h e c o n t e n t f o r you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected con tent after the de vice memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activa tion keys in case the f iles on your device ge t corrupted. If your device has WMDR M protec ted cont ent, both the activation keys and the c ontent will be lo st if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and th e content in case the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losin g the activation keys or the c ontent may limit yo ur ability to use the same content on your device again. For more informat ion, con tact y our serv ice provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protec ted content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main view, select from the following: â Valid keys â View keys that are connected to media files or whose validity period has not begun. â Invalid keys â V i e w k e y s t h a t a r e n o t v a l i d ; t h e time period for usin g the media file is exc e eded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connec ted activation key . â Not in use â V i e w k e y s t h a t h a v e n o m e d i a f i l e s connected to them in th e device. To buy more usage time fo r a media file, select an invalid activation key and Optio ns > Get new key (web service messages must be enabled). See "Web service message settings," p. 111 . To view detailed information, such as the validity status and ability to send the file, scroll to an activation key, and press the scroll key. Recorder Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. 92 Media folder
To record a telephone c onversation, open Re corder during a voice call. Both pa rti es hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. 93 Media folder
Personalise your device You can personalise your device by changing the standby mode, main menu, to nes, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing th e font size, can be a ccessed through the device settings. See "Persona lisation settings," p. 140 . Themes Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Per sonalisation > Themes . You can change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and ic ons. To change the theme that is used for all the applica tions in yo ur device , select General . To preview a theme be fore activatin g it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memo ry card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in th e device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory c ard without the memory card, save the themes in the devic e memory first. T o c h a n g e t h e l a y o u t o f t h e m a i n m e n u , s e l e c t Menu view . To open a browser conne ction and download more themes, in General or Menu vi ew , select Download themes (network service). Important: Use only serv ices that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmf ul software. To edit the wal lpaper and pow er saver of the current them e that appe ar in the standby mode, select Wallpaper to change the background image or Power saver to change the power saver. ProfilesâÂÂset tones Press , and select Tools > Profiles . You can se t and customise t he ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environment s, or caller grou ps. 94 Personalise your device
To change the p rofile, select a prof ile, and Option s > Activ ate . To also change the profile, press the pow er key in the standby mode. Sc roll to the profile you want to activa te, and select OK . Tip: To switch between the ge neral and silent profiles in the standb y mode, press and hold # . To modify a profile, scroll to the profile, and sele ct Option s > Perso nalise . Scroll to the se tting you want to change, and press th e scroll key to o pen the choices. Tones stored on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are i ndicated with . In the tones list, select Download sound s (network service) to open a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start conn ection to a web page to download more tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken when your devi ce rings, sel ect Options > Personalis e , and set Say caller's name to On . The ca llerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts. To crea te a new p rofile, select Options > Create new . 3-D tones Press , sel ect Tools > Utilitie s > 3-D tones . With 3-D tones, you can enabl e three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To enable the 3 -D effects, select 3- D ringing ton e effects > On . To change th e ringing tone, s elect Ringing ton e and the desired ringing tone. To change the 3-D effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the eff ect, select from the following settings: â Trajectory speed â S cr ol l le ft or ri g ht to ad ju s t the speed at which so und moves from one direction to anot her. This setting is not available for all ringing tones. â Reverberatio n â Select the type of echo. â Doppler eff ect â Select On to have the ri nging tone sound louder wh en you are closer to your device, and softer when you are farther away. When you get closer to the device, the ringing tone appears to become louder, and soft er when you move away from it . This setting is not available for all ringing tones. To listen t o the ringin g tone with th e 3-D effect , select Options > Play tone . If you enable t he 3-D tones but do not select any 3-D effe ct, stereo widening is appli ed to the ringing tone. 95 Personalise your device
To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profi les > Option s > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify the standby mode To switch the ac tive st andby on or off, press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalis ation > Standby mode > Active standby . The active stan dby display shows applica tion shortcuts, and events from applications such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select Tools > Settings > General > Personalis ation > Standby mode . Some shortcuts may be fi xed, and you cannot change them. To change the clock show n in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Cloc k > Options > Settings > Clock type . You can also change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver. See "Themes, " p. 94 . Modify the main menu To change the main menu view, in the main menu, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid or List . To rearrange the main me nu, in th e main me nu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used app lications into folders and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. To use animated icons in your device, in the main menu, select Option s > Icon animation > On . 96 Personalise your device
Time management Clock Alarm clock Press , and select Applications > Cloc k . To set a new quick alarm, select Options > New quick alarm . Quick alarms are set for the next 24 hours and t hey cannot be repeated. To view your active a nd in active alarms, scroll right to the alarm tab. To set a new alarm, select Option s > New alarm . Define the repe tition, if needed. When an alarm is active, is shown. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is re ached while the device is switched of f, the device sw itches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Sto p , th e device asks whether you want to activa te the device for calls. Select No to switch off the dev ice or Yes to make and receive call s. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause int erference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time , date, and clock t ype settings, select Options > Settings . To allow the mob i le phone network to up date the time, date, and t ime zone informa tion to your device (network service) , in the settings, select Network operato r time > Auto-update . World clock Press , an d sel ect Applications > Clock . To open the w orld clock vie w, scroll right to the world clock tab. In the world clock view, yo u can view the time in dif ferent ci ties. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add cit y . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city , scroll to a city, and select Option s > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, an d the time in your d evice is changed according to the city selected. Ensure that the time is correc t and matches yo ur time zon e. 97 Time man ageme nt
Calendar Create a calendar entry Press , and select Application s > Calendar . 1. To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, and select Options > New entry and one of the following: â Meeting â to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time â Memo â to write a general entry for a day â Anniversary â to remind you of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated annually) â To-do â t o r e m i n d y o u o f a t a s k t h a t m u s t b e done by a specific date 2. Fi l l i n th e fi el d s. T o s e t a n a la r m , s el e c t Alarm > On , and enter the alarm time and date. To add a description for an entry, select Options > Add description . 3. To save the entry, se lect Done . Tip: In the day, we ek, or month calend ar view, press any key ( 1 -0 ). An appointment entry opens, and the c h aracters you ente r are adde d to the s ubjec t fiel d. In t he to-do view, a to-do note entry open s. When the calendar alarm soun ds for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text stays on the screen. To stop the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . Calendar views To change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar, sele ct Options > Settings . To go to a certain da te, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press # . To switch betw een the mo nth view, week view, day view, and to-do v iew, press * . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compa tible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly . 98 Time man ageme nt
To modif y the calen dar, sele ct Options > Settings > Calendar ala rm tone , Default view , Week starts on , or Week view title . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, go to the month view, an d select Options > Dele te en try > Before date or All entrie s . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-d o view, a nd sele ct Options > Mark as done . You can synchronise your calenda r with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a c alendar e ntry, set th e desired synchronisatio n option. 99 Time man ageme nt
Messaging Only d evi ces th at hav e compati ble fe atures can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. Messaging main view Press , and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Messaging contains the followin g folders: â Inbox â Received message s, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use te xts in the Templates folder in My folders . You can al so create and save your own templ ates. â Mailbo x â Connec t to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. â Draf ts â Draft messages that have no t been sent are stored here. â Sent â The last messa ges that have been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivit y, are stored here. You can change the number of messages to save in this folder. â Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outsid e network coverage. â Reports â You can request th e networ k to send you a delivery repo rt of the text message s and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send servic e requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network servic es, to your service provider, select Options > Service comm and in the Messaging main view. Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topi cs, such as weather or t raffic co nditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the Messaging main view, select Opti ons > Cell broadcast . 100 Messaging
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packe t data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Write text Your device supports tradit ional text input an d predictive tex t input. With predicti ve text, you c an enter any letter with a single keypre ss. Predictive text input is based on a bu i lt-in dictionary to which you can add new words. When you w rite text, is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when us ing pr edicti ve text input . Traditional text input Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) rep eatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on th e key. If the next letter is loca ted on the same key as the present on e, wait un til the cursor appears (or scrol l right to end the t ime-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three times. Predictive text input With predictive in put, you c an enter any letter w ith a single keypress. Predicti ve text input is b ased on a built-in dictionary to which you c an add new words. 1. To turn pred ictive text i nput on or of f in the general settings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Langu age > Predictive text . 2. To write the desired word, press the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only onc e for one lett er. For example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, press 6 for N, 6 for o, 5 for k, 4 for i, and 2 for a. The word suggest ion changes after eac h keypress. 3. When you finish writin g the word correctly, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words th e dictionary h as found one by one. If the ? character is shown after the word, the word is not in the dictionary . To add a word to the dictio nary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text in put, and sele ct OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 101 Messaging
4. Start writing the next word. Tips on text input To insert a number in the lett er mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch betw een the different character modes, press # . To delete a ch aracter, press C . T o de lete m ore than one character, press and hold C . The most common punctuat ion marks are available under 1 . To scroll th em through one b y one, press 1 , and then * repeatedly. To open a list of specia l characters, press and hold * . Tip: To select several special characters from the special characters list, press 5 after each highlighted cha racter. Change the writing language When you are writing text, you can change the writing languag e. For example, if you are writing text using a non-La tin alph abet and want to write Latin characters, such as e-mail or web addresses, you may need to change the writing language. To change the writing lang uage, select Opt ions > Writing language and a writing language tha t uses Latin characters. After changing the writin g language, for example, if you press 6 repeatedly to reach a specific charac ter, c hangin g the wr iting l anguage gives you access to char acters in a differen t order. Edit text and lists To copy and past e text, wh ile pressin g and holding # , scroll l eft or right to hi ghlight text. To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding # , select Copy . To insert the text in to a document, press and hold # , and sel ect Paste . To mark an item in a list , scroll to it, and press # . To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold # while you scroll up or do wn. To end the selection , stop scrolling, and release # . Write and send messa ges Press , and select Messaging . Before yo u can create a mult imedia message or write an e- mail, yo u must have the co rrect connection settin gs in plac e. See "Define the e- mail settings," p. 105 . 102 Messaging
The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If th e inserted picture exceeds this limit, t h e d e v i c e m a y m a k e i t s m a l l e r s o t h a t i t c a n b e s e n t by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you at tempt to sen d an e-mail message that exc eeds the size limit of the e- mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempt s to resend it p eriodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous att em p s to resend the e-mail ma y increase yo ur phone bill. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Draft s folder. 1. Select New m essage > Te xt message to send a text message, Multimedia message to send a multimedia message (MMS ), Audio message to send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one soun d clip), or E-mail to send an e-mail. 2. In the To fiel d, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâ s phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press * . You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the Subje ct field, ente r the subject of the multimedia messag e or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4. In the message field, wri te the message. To insert a templ ate, select Options > In sert or Insert o bject > Template . 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Inser t object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . 6. To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video cl ip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . 103 Messaging t
To see what the mu ltimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Vid eo clip , Note , or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8. To send the message, select Opt ions > Send , or press the call key. Note : Your device may indicate that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Your device may not indicate wh ether the me ssa ge is received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, contac t your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the charac ter limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Cha racters th at use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the numbe r of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video cl ips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exce ed the siz e limit of the wireless network in a multime dia message. Tip: You can c ombine images, vi deo, soun d, and text to a p resentation and se nd it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia message, and select Options > Create presen tation . The option is shown only if MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free. See "Multimedia message settings," p. 108 . Messaging inbox Receive messages Press , and select Messaging > Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetoot h connectivity. When you re ceive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Sho w . To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and pre ss the scroll key. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia m essages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may 104 Messaging
contain mal icious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a pack et data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the v ideo, select the indicator. To see the media objects t hat have be en included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message in cludes a multimedia presentation, i s d i s p l ay e d . To p l a y th e p r e se n t a t io n , s e le c t t h e indicator. Data, settings, and web se rvice messag es Your devi ce can recei ve many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, ca lendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may al so receive setti ngs from your service provider or company information management department in a co nfiguration message. To save the data from the message, select Option s and the correspo nding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, ne ws headlines) a nd may contain a text message or a link. For avai lability and subscription, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: Use Settings wizard to define yo ur mailbox settings. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Sett. wiza rd . To use e-mail, you must hav e a valid internet acc ess point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly . See "Access points," p. 14 8 . See "E-mail settings," p. 109 . You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Mailb ox in the Messaging main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating t he e-mail settings with the mai lbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox rep laces Mail box in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. 105 Messaging
Open the mailbox Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, the d evice asks if you want to co nnect to the mailbo x ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbo x and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuousl y connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previous ly retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the Messa ging main view or Options > Create mess age > E-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages," p. 102 . Retrieve e-mail messages Press , and select Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Op tions > Connect to start a connection to th e remote mailbox. Importan t: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious so f t w a re o r o t h er w i s e be h a rm f u l t o y o u r de v i c e o r PC. 1. When you have an op en connection to a remote mailbox, select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only the messages that have been marked, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2. To close the c onnection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you a re asked if you want to retrieve thi s message from the ma ilbox. To view e-mail attachmen ts, open the message, and select the attachmen t field indicated by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it ha s not been retrieve d to the device ; select Opt ions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messa ges automatically, select Options > E-m ail setting s > Automatic retrieval . See "Automatic retrieval settings," p. 111 . Setting the device to retrieve e-mail auto matically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provide r's network. Contact y our service p rovid er for information about data transmission charges. 106 Messaging
Delete e-mail messages Press , an d sele ct Messaging and a mai lbox. To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still re taining it in the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete . In Delete message from: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail heading s in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, th e e-mail heading stays in your dev ice. If you want to remove the heading as well , you must first delete t he e-mail message fro m your remote mailbox, then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the st atus. To delete an e-mail from th e device and th e remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e -mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection , and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, t o end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . View messag es on a SIM c ard Press , an d sel ect Messaging . Before you c an view S IM messages, you must copy them to a fo lder in yo ur device. 1. In the Messaging ma in view, selec t Options > SIM messages . 2. Select Options > Mark/Un mark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3. Select Options > Cop y . A list of folders opens. 4. To start copying, select a folder and OK . T o view the messages, op en the f older. Messaging settings The settings may be precon figured in your device, or you may receiv e them in a message. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message cent res or access points may be preset for yo ur device by you r servic e provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings Press , an d sel ect Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Text message . 107 Messaging
Select from the following: â Message cen tres â V iew a list of all text message cent res that hav e been defined. â Message cen tre in use â Select which message centre to use to de liver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding syst em when available, select Reduced support . â Receive report â Select whether the netw ork sends delivery reports on your messages (network service). â Message validity â Select how long the message centre re sends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent withi n the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. â Message sent as â Contact your service provider to learn if your message centre is able to convert t ext messages into these other formats. â Preferred connection â S elect the connecti on to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message ce ntre number (network service). Multimedia m essage settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia messa ge . Select from the following: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mo de â I f y o u s e l e c t Guided , the device info rms you if yo u try to send a message that may not be supported by the reci pient. If you select Restricted , the de vice prevents you from sending messages that ma y not be supported. To include conten t in your messages with out notifications, select Free . â Access poin t in use â Select which access point is used as the pre ferred connec tion. â Multimedia retrieval â Se lect how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular network, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home cellular network, you receive a notification tha t there is a message to re trieve in the multimedia message centre. Outside your home cellula r network, sending and receiving multimedia messa ges may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your de vice automatically makes an active pa cket da ta connect ion to retrieve the 108 Messaging
message both in and outside your home cellular network. â Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to reject messages from an an onymous sender. â Receive adverts â D efine wh ether y ou want t o receive multimedia message advertisements. â Receive report â Sele ct whether you wa nt the status of the sent message t o b e s h o w n i n t h e l o g (network servic e). â Deny repo rt sendin g â Select whether you want to deny your devi ce sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message vali dity â Select how long the message centre resends yo ur message if the fi rst attempt fails ( network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail setti ngs Manage mailboxes Press , an d sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > E-ma il . To select which mailbox you w ant to use to send e- mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox . To remove a mailbox an d its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C . To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes , sele ct Option s > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mail box replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settin gs, user settings, retriev a l settings, and aut omatic retrieval sett ings. Connection settings Press , an d sel ect Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection se ttings . To edit the sett ings for the e-mai l you rece ive, selec t Incoming e-mail , and from the following: â User name â Enter yo ur user name given to you by your service provider. â Passwo rd â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to c o nnect to you r remote mailbox. â Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address o r h o s t n a m e o f t h e m a i l s e r v e r t h a t r e c e i v e s y o u r e-mail. â Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). See "Access points," p. 148 . â Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. â Mailbox type â Defines t he e-mail protoco l that your remote mailbox service prov ider 109 Messaging
recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. â Security (ports) â Sele ct the security option used to secure t he connec tion to th e remote mailbox. â Port â Define a port for the connection. â APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 proto col to encrypt th e sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, se lect Outgoing e-mail and from the following: â My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your serv ice provider. â Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e- mail. You may only be able to use t he outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. The settings for User name , Password, Access point in us e , Security (ports) , and Po rt are similar to the on es in Incoming e-mail . User settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select from the following: â My name â Enter your own name . Your name replaces your e-mail address in t he recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs dev ice supports this function. â Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Sele ct Immediately for the d evice to connec t to the ma ilbox when you sel ect Send message . If you se lect During next conn. , e - mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. â Send copy to self â Sel ect whether you want t o s e n d a c o p y o f t h e e - m a i l t o y o u r o w n m a i l b o x . â Include sign ature â Select whethe r you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. â New e-mail alerts â Select whe ther you want to receive t he new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . Select from the following: â E-mail to retrieve â Define which parts of the e-mail are retrieve d: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs . (POP3). â Retrieval amount â Define how man y new e- mail messages are retrieved to the mail box. 110 Messaging
â IMAP4 folder path (f or IMAP4 only) â De fine the folder path for folder s to be subscribed. â Folder sub scriptions (for IMAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve co ntent from those fo lders. Automatic retrieval settin gs Press , an d sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > E-ma il > Mailbox e s , a mailbox, and Automat ic retri eval . Select from the following: â E-mail notifications â To automatically retrie ve the hea dings to your devi ce when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-u pdate or Only in ho me netw. . â E-mail retrieval â To aut omatically retrieve t he headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at de fined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw . . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retr ieve e-mail automatically may involve the tra nsmissi on of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provid er for information about data transmission charges. Web service m essage setting s Press , an d sel ect Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Service message . Select wh ether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network co nnecti on to retriev e content when you receive a service message, select Downl oad messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and selec t Messaging > Options > Setti ngs > Cell broadcast . Select from the following: â Reception â Se lect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. â Language â Select the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . â Topic detection â Selec t whether the device automatically search es for new topic numbers, and saves the new n umbers withou t a name to the topic list. 111 Messaging
Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: â Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you sen d to the Sent folder. â Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. â Memory in us e â Select the memory w here you want to save your messag es. 112 Messaging
Make calls Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, e nter the ph one number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international calls, press * twice fo r the character (rep laces th e international access code), and enter the country code, area c ode (omit the l eading z ero if n ecessary ), and ph one number. 2. Press the call key to call the nu mber. 3. Press the end key t o end the ca ll (or to canc el the call attem pt). Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another applica tion is active. To make a call from Contacts, press , and sele ct Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the se arch field. Matc hing contacts are listed. To call, press the call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list. Options during a call To adjust the v olume during a call, use the volume key on the side of you r device. You can also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute fi rst. To send an image or a vi deo clip in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Option s > Send MMS (in UMTS networks onl y). You can edit the messag e and change the re cipient before sending. Press the ca ll key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on h old while answering another inco ming call, select Op tions > Hold . To switch bet ween the ac tive and the held call, sel ect Option s > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Option s > Send D TMF . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pa use character (p), press * repeatedly . To send the ton e, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the p hone number or D TMF fields in a contact card. 113 Make calls
Tip: Wh en you h ave onl y one acti ve voice call, to put the call o n hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press t he call key again. During an active call , to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Option s > Activ ate loud speaker . If you have attached a compatible headset with B luetooth co nnectivity , to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activa te hands free . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Activate handset . To end an active call and repl ace it by answering the waiting call, select Opt ions > Replace . If you have several calls active, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or v ideo mailbox (ne twork services, video mailbox av ailable only in the UMTS network), press and hold 1 in the st andby mode, and se lect Voice m ailbox or Video m ailbox . To change the phone num ber of your voice or video mailbox, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Call mail box , a mailbox, and Optio ns > Change number . Ente r the number (obtained from your network service provider), and se lect OK . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. T o m u t e t h e r i n g i n g t o n e o f a n i n c o m i n g c a l l , s e l e c t Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Ca ll divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone sett ings to divert calls, declining an incomi ng call also diverts the call. When you s elect Silence to mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informing the cal ler that you canno t answer the call. Select Option s > Send text message . To set up thi s option and write a standard text message, select Tools > Sett ing s > Phone > Call > Reject call with SMS . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to th e first part icipant. 2. To make a call to anot her participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3. When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conference call, sel ect Options > Conf erence . 114 Make calls
To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conferen ce > Add to confere nce . Yo ur device supports conf erence calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a par ticip ant, and sele ct Private . The conferen ce call is put on hold on your device. The othe r participants can still continue t he confere nce call. Af ter you finish the private conv ersation, select Options > Conferen ce to re turn to the co nference cal l. To drop a participant, select Options > Conferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4. To end th e active c onference c all, press th e end key. Speed dial a phone number To activate the featur e, press , a nd select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number keys (2-9), press , and selec t Tools > Util ities > Speed dial . Scroll t o the key to wh ich you want to assign the phone num ber, and select Options > Assign . 1 i s reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the sta ndby mode, press the assigned key and the call key. Call waiting You can answe r a call whil e you have anot her call in progress if you have ac tivated call wai ting in Setti ngs > Phon e > Call > Call waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call , press the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch b etween t h e two calls, select Swap . T o connect an incoming call or a call on hold w ith an active call and to disconne ct yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end th e activ e call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports e nhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not depende nt on the speakerâÂÂs voic e, so the user d oes not record voice tag s in advance. In stead, the dev ice creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compares the spok en voice ta g to it . The voice recognition in 115 Make calls
the device adapts to t h e main userâÂÂs voice to recognise the voice commands bett er. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on t he contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, op en a contact card, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note : Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should n ot rely solely upon voi ce dial ing in all circumstances. When you use voice dia lling, the loudspeak er is in u se . H o l d t h e d e vi c e a t a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice diall ing, in the standby mode, press and hold the righ t selection key. If a compatible headset with the head set key is attached, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone is played, and Spea k now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3. The device plays a synthesised voice tag for the recognise d contact in the selecte d device language, and displ ays the name and number. After a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device di als the number. If th e recognised cont act was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialling. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number in a c ontact card . Make a video call When you make a v i deo call (network service), you can see a real-time, tw o-way vi deo between you and the recip ient of the call. The live video image, or video image capt ured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your ne twork service provider. A video call ca n only be made between two parties. The v ideo c all can be ma de to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, v i deo, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied vide o sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Tools > 116 Make calls
Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied vi deo sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video c all, enter the p hone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Select Options > Call > Vid eo ca ll . The second ary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. St arting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through th e loudspeaker. The call rec ipient may deny video sending ( ), in whic h case you only hear th e sound and may see a still image or a grey backgro und graphic. 3. To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Options during a video call To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Options > Enabl e , or Disable and the desired option. To zoom your image in or out, sc roll up or down. To route the aud i o to a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity atta ched to your device, select Opti ons > Activate ha ndsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Option s > Activ ate h andse t . To adjust the volume duri ng a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. To use the main camera to send video, select Option s > Use main camera . To switch back to the secon dary cam era, select Options > Use second ary came ra . Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow vi d eo i ma ge t o be se n t t o ca ll e r? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not a ctivate the video ca ll, video sending is not activated, a nd you only h ear the sound of the 117 Make calls
caller. A grey screen rep laces the video image. To replace the grey scre en with a still image captured by the camera in yo ur device, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . To end the video call, p ress the en d key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from y our mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is act ive when y ou activate V i deo sharing. If you do not want to use the loudspea ker for the voice call while you share video, y ou can also use a compatible headset. Requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availability of the UMTS network. Contact your service provider for more information on the service and ne twork ava ilabi lity and fees associated with using this service. To use video sharing you must do the following: â Ensure that your devi ce is set up for person-to- person connections. â Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMT S network co verage. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a hand ove r to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continue s. You cannot start video sharing if you are not within UMTS network coverage. â Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS n etwork. If you in vite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage, does not have video sharing installed, or person- to-person conn ections set u p, the recipi ent does not know tha t you are sending an invitation. You receive a n error message tha t indicates that the recipient c annot accep t the invi tation. Settings To set up v ideo sharing, you need person -to-person and UMTS connection settings. Person -to-pers on connection se ttings A person-to-person connect ion is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile sett ings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save th em in your device. Your service provider may send you 118 Make calls
the settings over the air or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a contact card, do the following: 1. Press , and select Co ntacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail or Share view . 4. Enter the SIP address in th e format username@domainname (you ca n use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use t he phone nu mber of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connectio n settings To set up y our UMTS con nection, do the follo wing: â Contact your service provid er to establish an agreement for you to use t he UMTS network. â Ensure that your device UMTS access point connection settings are configured p roperly. Share live video or video clips 1. When a voice call is ac tive, select Options > Share vi deo > Live video . To share a video clip, select Option s > Share vide o > Recorded clip . A list of video clips saved on the device memory or compatible memory card opens. Select a clip you want to share. To preview t he clip, select Options > Play . 2. If you sha re live video, your dev ice sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recip ient. If you share a video clip, select Opt ions > Invite . You may need to c onvert the video clip into a suitable format to b e ab l e t o sh a r e it . Clip must be conver ted for sharing. Co ntinue? appears. Sele ct OK . If the contact info rmation of the recip ient is saved in Contacts, and the contact has several SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the SIP address or the phon e number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the in vitation. 3. Sharin g begins automa tically when the r ecipie n t accepts th e invita tion. 4. To pause the sharing session, select Pause . To resume sharing, select Continue . T o fast forward or rewind the vi deo clip, scroll up or down. To play the clip again, press the end key. 119 Make calls
5. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, p ress the end key. Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. To save t he live vi deo yo u shared, sel ect Save to accept the Save shared video clip? query . The shared video is saved in the Images & videos folder in Gallery . If you access other appl ications whil e you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view and continue sharing, in the active standby mode, select Options > Continue . Accept an invi tation When someone sends you a video sharing invitation, the invitat ion message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it rings when you receive an in vitation. If someone sends you a share invitation a nd you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you re ceived an invitation. When you receiv e an invitation, select from the following: â Accept â Activates the sharing session. â Reject â Declines the invitat ion. The se nder receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can also press th e end key to decline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. When you receive a vi deo clip, to mu te the sound of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Internet calls With the internet call service (netwo rk service), you can make and receiv e calls over the internet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobi le phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive an internet ca ll, your device must be connected to an internet call service. To connect to an internet ca ll service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection ne twork, such as a WLAN access point. Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your dev ice attempts emergency calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cell ular network s is not successful, your device atte mpts an e mergency cal l through your net call provider. Due to the establish ed nature of cellular telephony, you shou ld use cellular ne tworks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage availabl e, ma ke su re th at yo ur 120 Make calls
cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emergen cy call. The capability for an emergency ca ll using internet telephony depends on the availability of a WLAN network and you r net call provider's implementati on of emerge ncy call capabiliti es. Contact your ne t call provider to check t he internet telephony emergency call capability. Create an internet call profile Before you can make i nternet calls, you m ust creat e an internet call profile. 1. Press , select Tools > Settin gs > Connect ion > SIP settings > Options > New SIP pr ofile , and enter the required information. Ensure that Regis tration is set to Always on . Contact you r internet c all provider fo r the corre ct settings. 2. Select Proxy server > Transport type > Auto . 3. Select Back until you retu rn to the main view of connection settings. 4. Select Internet tel. > Options > New profile . Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To use the c reated profile for connecting to th e internet call service automatically, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel. > Preferred profile . To log in to the intern et call service manually, select Registratio n > When needed , and Transport type > UDP or TCP in the S IP set tings when creating an int e rnet call profile. Connect to th e internet ca ll service T o m a k e o r r e c e i v e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l , y o u r d e v i c e m u s t be connected t o an internet call service. If you have selected auto matic login, your device automatically connects to the interne t ca ll service. If you log in to the service manually, sele ct an available network from the list and Select . When you are conn ected to an inte rnet call service, is shown in th e standby mode. The list of network s is refreshed automa tically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select Option s > Refresh . Use this option if y our WLAN access point is not shown. To select an internet call service for outgoing calls if the device is c o nnected to more than one service , select Options > Chan ge service . To configure new services, select Options > Configure ser vice . This option is shown only if there are servic es that have not been conf igured. 121 Make calls
To save the network to wh ich you are c urrently connected, select Optio ns > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star in the list of networks. To connect to an internet call servi ce using a hidden WLAN, select Option s > Use hidden network . To end the connection to an internet call service, select Options > Disconnect from serv. . Make internet calls When you ha ve activat ed the int ernet call feat ure, you can make an internet call from a ll applications where you can make a regular voic e call. For example, in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and se lect Call > Options > Internet call . T o m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l i n t h e s t a n d b y m o d e , e n t e r the phone number or internet address, an d press the call key. T o m a k e a n i n t e r n e t c a l l t o an address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # fo r a few seconds to clear the displ ay and to switch the device from the numb er mode to the let ter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To make an internet ca ll from Contacts, press , select Contacts , scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Internet call . To make an internet ca ll from the log, press , select Tools > Log and the log typ e, scroll to the desired contact, and select Opt ions > Internet call . Service settings Press , select Tools > Connectivity > Interne t tel. > Options > Settings , and select the default settings or service-specific settings. To set internet call as th e preferred c all type for all outgoing calls, select Default call type > Interne t call . When your device is connected to an internet call service, al l calls are made as in ternet calls. To log in automatically to the internet call service, select Login type > Aut omatic . If you use the automatic login type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for WLANs, which increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To log in manually to the inte rnet call s ervice, s elect Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the internet cal l service and th e networks detected by the internet call servic e, select Saved conn. network s . To define the serv ice-sp ecific settings, select Edit service set tings . This option is only available if a 122 Make calls
service-specific software plug-in has been in stalled in the device. Log The log stores informa tion about th e communication history of the de vice. The device registers missed and receiv ed calls only if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on, and within the network serv ice area. Recent calls Press , an d sele ct Tools > Log . To monitor the ph one number s of missed, received, and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls onl y if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on, and within the network serv ice area. To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the rece nt calls mai n view. To cl ear one of the call registers, open the register you w ant to erase, and select Option s > Clea r list . To clear an individual event, op en a register, sc roll to the event, an d press C . Call duration Press , and select Tools > Log . To monitor the approximate du ration of your incoming and ou tgoing cal ls, select Call dura tion . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration ti mers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you n eed the lo ck code. Packet data Press , an d sel ect Tools > Log . To check the amount of dat a sent and rec e ived during packet data c onnections, select Packet data . For example, you may b e charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Press , an d sel ect Tools > Log > Re cent ca lls . Icons in the log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed communicat ion events 123 Make calls
To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and WLAN connections registered by the device, scroll righ t. Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connection s, are logged as one communication even t. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or web pages are shown as pack et data conn ections. To add an un known phone numbe r from the log to your contacts, select Opti ons > Save to Co ntacts . To filter the log, select Op tions > Filt er and a filter. To erase the conten ts of the log, re cent ca lls register, and messaging delivery reports permanent ly, selec t Options > Clea r log . Select Yes to confirm. To remove a single event f rom one of the recent calls logs, press C . To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, rece nt calls registe r, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip: In the details view , you can copy a ph one number to the c lipboard, and paste it into a text message, for exa mple. Se lect Options > Copy nu mber . To view from the pa cket data c ounter how much data is transferred and how long a certai n packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event ind icated by Pack. , and select Options > View details . 124 Make calls
Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can sa ve and update contact information, such as ph one numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your con tacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Yo u can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same t ime. Save and edit name s and numbers 1. Press , and select Cont acts > Optio ns > New c ont act . 2. Fill i n the fiel ds that you want , and select Done . To edit co ntact card s, scroll to the contact card you want to edit, and select Opti ons > Edit . You can also search for the desire d contact by entering the first letters of the name to th e search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on t he display. Tip: To add and edit contact cards, you can also use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia Nseries PC S uite. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open th e contact card, and sel ect Options > Edit > Option s > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail im a ge is shown when th e contact ca lls. Manage names and numbers To ad d a cont act to a g roup, s elect Options > Add to group (shown only i f you hav e created a group) . To check to which groups a cont act belong s, sele ct the conta ct and Option s > Belongs t o groups . To delete a c ontact card, sele ct a card, and press C . To delete several contact cards at the same time, select Options > Ma rk/Unmar k to mark the desired contact cards, and press C to delete. To send con tact info rmatio n, select the card you want to send, Option s > Send , and the desired option . To listen to the voice ta g assigned to the contact, select a co ntact card an d Options > Play voice tag . 125 Contacts (phonebook)
Default numbers and addresses Press , and select Contacts . You can assign defa ult numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily cal l or send a message to the co ntact to a certain number or address. The d efault number is also used in v oice dialling. 1. In the contacts list , select a contact. 2. Select Option s > Defaults . 3. Select a defaul t to which y ou want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an a ddress you want to set as a default. The default number or addre ss is underlined in the contact card. Add ringing tones for contacts Press , and select Contacts . To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following: 1. Press the scroll key to op en a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2. Selec t Option s > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3. Select the rin ging tone yo u want to use for the individual contac t or the members of the selected group. When a contact or group member calls you, the device pl ays the chose n ringing t one (if the ca llerâÂÂs telephon e number is sent with t he call and your device recognises it). To remove the rin ging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts To copy names and number s from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Con tacts > Opt ions > SIM contacts > SIM directo ry , the names you want to copy, and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contacts, select the names yo u want to cop y and Op tions > Copy to SIM directory , or Options > Copy > To SI M directory . Only the cont act card fiel ds supporte d by your SIM card are cop ied. 126 Contacts (phonebook)
SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service p rovider or other v e ndor. To see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card, select Op tions > SIM contacts > SIM directory . In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Option s > SIM contacts > Fixed dia l contacts . This setting is only shown if supp orted by your SIM card. To restrict calls from your devi ce to se lecte d phon e numbers, select Options > Activate fi xed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Co ntact your service provi der if you do not have the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Option s > New S IM c ont act . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use fixed dialling, packe t data connections are not possibl e, except wh en sending text messages over a packet data connection . In this case, the message centre number and the recipientâ s phone number mu st be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixed dialling is activated, calls may be possible to the offici al emergency nu mber programmed into your device. Manage contac t groups Create co ntact groups 1. In Contacts, scroll right to open the grou ps list. 2. Select Options > Ne w gr oup . 3. Write a name for the grou p or use the default name, and s elect OK . 4. Select the group and Option s > Add members . 5. Scroll to a con tact, and press the scroll key to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the cont acts you want to add. 6. To add the co ntacts to the group, select OK . To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the n ew name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1. In the grou ps list, sele ct th e group yo u want to modify. 2. Scroll to the c ontact, and select Options > Remove from group . 127 Contacts (phonebook)
3. To remove the contact f rom the group , select Yes . 128 Contacts (phonebook)
Office folder Quickoffice With Quickoffice, y ou can view .doc, .xls, .ppt, and .txt documents. All file formats or features are not supported. Apple Macintosh is not supported. To use the Quickoffice applications, press , and select Ap plicati ons > Office > Quick office . A li st of available files in the .doc, . xls, .ppt, and .txt file formats opens. To open Quickword, Qu icksheet, Quickpoint, or Quickm anager, use the scroll key to scroll to th e tabs. If you experience problems wi th Quick word, Quicksheet, Q uickpoint, or Quickmanager, visit www.quickoffice.com for more information. Support is also available by sending an e-mail to supportS60@quickoffice .com. Quickword With Quickword, you can view na tive Microsoft Word do cument s with yo ur dev ice. Quickword supports the viewin g of documents saved in .doc and .txt form ats created wit h Microsoft Word 97, 2000, XP, an d 2003. Not all va riations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quic kword that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Option s > Upgrade t o edit . The upgrade is chargeable. Quicksheet With Qui ckshee t, you can view nativ e Micros oft Excel files with your devic e. Quickshe et supports the viewing of spreadshee t files saved in .xls format created with Microsoft Excel 97, 2000 , XP, or 2003. No t all variations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quicksheet that suppo rts editing, when you have a file open, select Option s > Upgrade t o edit . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickpoint With Qui ckpoin t, you can v iew native Micros oft PowerPoint presentations with your device. 129 Office folder
Quickpoi nt supports th e viewing of presentati ons saved in .ppt format created with Microsoft PowerPoint 2000, XP, and 2003. Not all variations or features of the mentioned file forma ts are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickpoint that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Up grade to edit . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickmanager With Quickmanager, you can download software, including updates, u pgrades, and othe r useful applica tions. You ca n pay for the downloads by phone bill or credit card. Notes Press , and select Application s > Office > Notes . To write a note, start entering the text. The n ote editor opens automatically. To o pe n a n ot e , s cr ol l to it, and press the scroll key. To send a note to other compatible device s, select Options > Send . To delete a no te, press C . Tip: To delete severa l notes, select Options > Mark/Unm ark and the notes, and press C . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchroni sation . Se lect Start to start synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the n ote. Adobe PDF reader Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Adobe PDF . With the PD F reader you can re ad PDF documents on the display of your device; searc h for text in the documents; modify settings , such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Converter Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Converter . With Converter, you can convert me asures from one unit to another. The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1. In the Ty pe field, select th e measure you w ant to use. 130 Office folder
2. In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. 3. I n t h e n e x t U n i t f i e l d , s e l e c t t h e u n i t t o w h i c h y o u want to convert. 4. In the first Amount field, en ter the value you want to convert. The other Amount fiel d changes automatically to show the co nverted value. Set base currency and exchange rates Select Type > Cu rrency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make currency convers ions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change ba se currency, yo u must enter new exchan ge rate s because a ll previously se t exchange rate s are cleared. Zip manager Press , and select Applications > Of fice > Zip . With Zip manag er, you can c reate new archive file s to store compressed .zip file s; add single or multiple compressed files or director ies to an archive; set, clear, o r change the archive p assword for p rotected archives; and cha nge settings, such as compression level and file name encoding. Barcode reader Press , an d sel ect Applications > Office > Barcode . Use the Barc ode reader app lication to dec ode different types of codes (such as codes in magazines). The codes may contain information such as URL links, e-mail addresses, and phone numbers. To scan a code, activate the main camera and Scan code . Set the code between the red lines on the display. The application attempts to scan and deco de the code, and th e decoded information appears on the display. To save the scanned data, select Options > Save . The data is saved in .bcr format. To view previously saved, decoded inform ation in the main vi ew, selec t Saved data . To open a code, press the scroll key. When viewing the decoded information, the different links, U RL links, phone nu mbers, and e- mail addresses are indicated by icons on the top of the display in the direct ion t hey ap pear i n the decode d inform ation. In the Saved data view, select Opti ons to scan new codes or use the decoded information. 131 Office folder
The device reverts to th e standby mode to save battery power if the barcode reader cannot be activa ted or if no keys are pre ssed for 1 minute . To continue scanning or viewing saved informati on, press the scroll key. 132 Office folder
Applications folder Calculator Press , an d sele ct Applications > Calculator . Note: This calculat or has limited accura cy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, ente r the first number of t he calculation. Select a funct i on such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the ca lcul atio n, and sel ect = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered . The result of the calculation remains in the ed itor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. To save the results of a calculation, select Opti ons > Memory > Sa ve . The saved result replaces the previously st ored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a calcul ation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved result, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the de vice does not clear the memory . You can recall the last save d result the next time you open the Calculator application. Application manager With Application manager, you can see th e software packages installed in yo ur device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. Press , and selec t Applications > App. mgr. . You can install two type s of applications and software to your device: â J2ME applications based on Java technology with the extension . jad or .jar â Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the extension .sis or .sisx Only install software spec ificall y desig ned f or you r device: Nokia N82. Softwa re provider s will often refer to the official mode l number of this product: Nokia N82-1. 133 Applications fol der
Install applicatio ns and software Installation files may be transferred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to yo u in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachment or using other connectivity methods, suc h as Bluetoot h connect ivity. Yo u can use Nokia Application Inst aller in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an applicat ion to your device. If y ou use Microsoft Windows Expl orer to transfer a file, save the file to a co mpatib le memory car d (loca l disk). indicates a .sis or .sisx application, a Java applica tion, that the application is not fully installed, and that the applicat ion is installed on the memory card. Importan t: Only install and use appl ications and other software from trusted sources, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sig ned or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. Before installation , note the following: â To view the applicatio n type, versi on number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View det ails . To display the security ce rtificate deta ils of the application, in Detai ls: , scroll to Certif icates , and select View deta ils . See "Certificate management," p. 143 . â If you install a file that contains an up date or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original appl ication if you have the original installati on file or a full backup copy of the removed software pa ckage. To restore the original application , remo ve the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup c opy. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When y ou are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an a pplication or software, do the following: 1. To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a compatible memory card (if inserted) in File manager, or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installati on file. 2. In Application manager, select Options > Install . In other applica tions, scroll to the installation file, and sel ect it to start the installation. 134 Applications fol der
You cannot cancel the installation after you have started it. During installation, th e device shows information about the progress of t he installation. If you in stal l an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continu e installation only if you are sure of the orig in and contents of th e application. To start an installed applic ation, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applicati ons folder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installed or removed and wh en, se lect Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and oper ation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation fi les (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient me mory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up i nstallation fil es to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files f r o m t h e d e v i c e m e m o r y . I f t h e . s i s f i l e i s a m e s s a g e attachment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox. See "File manager," p. 137 . Remove applications and software Press , an d sel ect Applications > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Option s > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, yo u can only reinstall it if you ha ve the original software package or a f ull backup of the r emove d softw are pac kage. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents crea ted with that softw are. If another software pa ckage depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the document ation of th e install ed software p a ckage for details. Setting s Press , an d sel ect Applications > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Software installation â S elect whethe r Symbian software that has n o verified digital signature can be installe d. 135 Applications fol der
â Online certificate check â Select to check the online certificates before insta lling an application. â Default we b address â Set the default address used when checking on line certificat es. Some Java application s may require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. In the Ap plication manager main view, scroll to an a pplication , and select Options > Open to change settings re lated to that specific applica tion. 136 Applications fol der
Tools folder File manager To browse files and folders in the memory, press , and select Tools > File mgr. . When you open File man ager, the de vice memory view ( ) opens. S croll right to o pen the memo ry card view ( ), if available. To see how much memo ry different data t ypes use, select Options > Memory details . To find a file, select Opt i ons > Find and the memory from which to se arch. Enter a search text that matches the file name. To mark files, select Options > Ma rk/Unmar k > Mark or Mark all . To move or copy the files, select Option s > Move to fol der or Copy to folder . Memory card tool A compatible memory card may already be inserted in your device. Press , and s elect Tools > Utilitie s > Memory . To see how much memo ry different data t ypes use, select Options > Memo ry details . To back up information fr om the device memory to a compatible memory card, select Options > Back up phon e memory . The device notifies you if there is not enough free space to create a back up. To restore informatio n from the compa tible memory card to the device memory, selec t Option s > Restore from card . When a memory card is reformatted, all data on the card is permanently lost . Some memory cards are supplied pref ormatted and othe rs require formatting; consult your retailer. The memory card supplied with your de vice does not need to be formatted. To format a memo ry card, select Options > Format memory card and Yes to confirm. Voice commands Press , an d sel ect Tools > Utilities > Voice comm. . You can use enhance d voic e commands to control your devi ce. See "Voice dialling," p. 115 . 137 Tools folder
To activate enhanced voic e commands to start application s and profiles, you must open the Voice commands application and its Profiles folder; the device creates voice tags for the applications and profiles . To use enh anced voice commands, press and hold the right select ion key in the standby mode, and speak a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, in the Voice commands main view, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To change voi ce comman d sett ings, se lect Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags and commands in the selected de vice language, select Synthesise r > Off . To reset voice reco g nition learning, for example, when the main use r of the device ha s changed, select Rem ove voice adapts. . Sync Press , and select Tools > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text me ssages, or contacts with various compatible applic ations on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisation settings in a special message. In the Sync main vie w, you can see the different synchronisation profiles. A synchroni sation profile contains the necessary set tings to synchronise data in your device with a remote database on a server or compatible dev ice. To synchronise data, sele ct Options > Synchro nise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Device manager Press , and select Tools > Utilit ies > Device mgr. . Use Devi ce manager t o connect t o a server and receive configuration sett ings for your device, to create new server pr ofiles, or to view and manage existing server profiles. You may receive serv er profiles and different configuration setting s from your service providers and company information managemen t department. These configurat ion settings may 138 Tools folder
include connec tion and other settin gs used by different applications in your devic e. Scroll to a server profile, and select Optio ns and from the following: â Start configuration â Co nnect to th e server and receive con figuration settings for your device. â New server prof ile â Create a server profile. To delete a server profil e, scroll to it, and press C . 139 Tools folder
Settings Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General settings In general settin gs, you can edit the g eneral settings of your devic e or restore the device to original default settin gs. You can adjust time and date settings also in th e clock. See "Clock ," p. 97 . Personalisation settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Per sonalisation . You can edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functi ons of your device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. See "Themes," p. 94 . Voice comms. opens the settings for the Voice commands application. See "Voice commands," p. 137 . Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clock, and currently active profile. Display â Light sensor â Scroll left or right to adjust the light sensor that observes the lighting conditio ns and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor may cause the display to flicker in low ligh t. â Font size â Adjust the size of the text a nd icons on the display. â Power saver time -out â Select the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. â Welcome note / logo â The welc ome note or logo is displayed briefly each ti me you switch on the device. Se lect Defa ult to us e the defau lt image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery. â Light time-out â Select a time-out after which the backlight of the display is switch ed off. â Rotate screen â Change the setting for automatic display rotation . In most applications, the display rotates automatically between portrait and landscape modes based on the orientation of the de vice. To ensure that the automatic display rotation works, ho ld the 140 Settings
device in an upright position. Automatic rotation is not functioning, if you change the display rotation setting manual ly in an application. When you e xit th e ap plication, automatic rotation is activated again. Standby mode â Active standby â Activate shortcuts to application s in the standby mode. â Shortcuts â Assign a shortcut to the selection keys in the standby mode. If the active standby is se t off, you can also assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key. â Active standby apps. â If the active standby is set on, select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the ac tive standby. â Operator logo â This setting is only available if you ha ve receive d and saved a n operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Changing the settings for the phone lang uage or writing language af fects every application in your device, and th e change remains eff ective unti l you change these settings a gain. â Phone langu age â Change the language of the display text in your device. This also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in c alculations. Automatic selects the language according to the informat ion on y our SI M card. Af ter you change the display text langu age, the device restarts. â Writing language â Change the writing language. This affects the characters availa ble when writing te xt and the predictive text dictionary used. â Predi ctive text â Set predictive text in put on or off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary i s not available for a ll languages. Enhanceme nt setting s Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > General > Enhancement . Some enhan cement conne ctors indicate w hich type of enhancem ent is connecte d to the device. See "Display indi cators," p. 21 . The avai lable settings depend on the type of enhancement. S elect an enhancement and from the following: â Default pr ofile â Set the profile th at you want activated each time y ou connect a ce rtain compatible enhancemen t to your device. â Automatic answer â Sel ect whether you want the device to answer an incoming call automat ically afte r 5 seconds. If the ring ing type 141 Settings
is set to Beep once or Silent, automatic answer is disabled. â Lights â Set whe ther lights remai n on or are switched off after the time-ou t. This setting is not available for all enhancement s. TV-out settings To change th e settin gs for a TV-out connection, select TV-Out and from the follo w ing: â Default prof ile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connec t a Nokia Vide o Connectivity Cable to your device. â TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs. â TV system â Select the analogue video signal system that is compat ible with your TV. â Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flic ker on all TV screens. Security settings Phone and SIM Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card . â PIN code request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivati ng the PIN code request m a y not be allowed by some SIM cards. â PIN code , PIN2 code , and Loc k code â You can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 c ode. These codes can on ly includ e the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forg et the PIN or the PIN2 code, co ntact your service pr ovider. If you forget the lock code, contac t a Nok ia Care point or you r service provider. See "Access codes," p. 16 . Avoid using access codes similar to th e emergency n umbers to pr event acc i dental dialling of the emergency number. â Keypad aut olock period â Select whether the keypad is lock ed when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left sele ction key, th en * . â Phone autolock peri od â To avoid unauthorised use, you can se t a time-out after which the d evice aut omatical ly locks. A loc ked device cannot be used until th e correct lock code is entered. To turn off the aut olock period , select None . Tip: To lock th e device ma nually, pr ess the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phon e . â Lock if SIM card changed â You can se t the device to ask for the loc k code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device 142 Settings
maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. â Closed user group â You can spe cify a group of people to w hom you can call and who can call you (network service). â Confirm SIM services â You can se t the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certificate management Press , an d sele ct Tools > Settings > General > Security > Certificate managemen t . Digital certificate s do not guarantee safe ty; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate manage ment main view, you can see a list of authority certificates that are stored in your devi ce. Scroll rig ht to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that invol ve transferring confidential information. They should al so be used if you want to reduce t he risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when down loading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remot e connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The ex istence of a certificate does not offer any prote ction by itself; t he certif icate manager mu st contain corre ct, authentic, o r trusted ce rtificates fo r increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid ye t" is shown even if the certific ate should be valid, c heck that th e current date a nd ti me in y our de vice a re co rrect. Before ch anging an y cert ificate settings, you must make sure that y ou really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to the listed owner. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authe nticity You can only be sure of the correct ide ntity of a server when the signatu re and the period of validity of a server ce rtificate have be en checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is n ot authentic or if you do not hav e the correct se curity certif icate in your d evice. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Cer tificate detail s . When you open certificate de tails, the validi ty of the certific ate is checked, and one o f the following notes may be displayed: 143 Settings
â Certificate not trusted â You have not set any application to us e the cer tificate. â Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the select ed certificate. â Certificate not valid yet â The period of validit y has not ye t begun for th e selected certi ficate. â Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Cont act the certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owne r of the certificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an au thority certificate, and select Options > Trus t settings . De pending o n the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certific ate is shown. For example: â Symbian installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Interne t : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. â App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new J ava⢠application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to c h ange th e value. Security modu le Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Security module . T o v i e w o r e d i t a s e c u r i t y module (if availabl e), scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view deta iled info rmation abou t a security module, scroll to it, and sele ct Options > Se curity details . Restore original settin gs Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Factory s ettings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do th is, you need the lock code. After resetting , the device may take a longer time to power on. Document s an d files are unaffected. Positi oning sett ings Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Posi tioning . Position ing meth ods â Integrate d GPS â Use the inte grated GPS receiver o f your devi ce. â Assisted GP S â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS). â Bluetoot h GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver wi th Bluet ooth co nnectivit y. 144 Settings
â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positio ning ser ver To define an access point, and positioni ng server for A-GPS, select Position ing ser ver . The positioning server may be prese t by your service prov ider, and you may not be able to edit the setting s. Phone settings In phone settings, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Phone > Call . â Send my caller ID â You can se t your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service prov ider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network servic e). â Call waiting â If you have act ivated call waiting (network se rvice), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Set the function on ( Activate) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the funct ion is activ a ted ( Check status ). â Internet call waiting â S e l e ct Act ivat ed to be notified of a n ew incoming internet call while you have a call in progre ss. â Internet call alert â S elect On to be alerted for incomin g internet cal ls. If you select Off , you are not alert ed, but a notification about missed calls appears. â Default call type â To set inter n et calls as the default c all type whe n making calls, select Internet call . If an internet ca ll service is not available, a regular voice call is started instead. â Reject call with SMS â To send a text message to a caller informing why you coul d not answer the call, select Yes . â Message te xt â W r i t e a t e x t t o b e s e n t i n a t e x t message whe n you reject a call. â Image in video call â If video is not se nt during a video call, yo u can sel ect a still imag e to be displayed instead. â Automatic redial â Select On , and y o ur device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful c all a ttem pt. T o st op automatic redialling, press th e end ke y. â Show call duration â Activate this setting if you want the leng th of a call to be displ ayed during the call. â Speed dial â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the number key s (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See "Speed dial a phone number ," p. 115 . 145 Settings
â Anykey answer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, e xcept th e left and ri ght se lection keys, th e power k ey, and the end key . â Line in use â This setting (network service) is shown only if the S IM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which p hone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answer ed i rresp ectiv e of t he selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this netw ork service, you are not able to mak e calls. Wh en line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip: To switch between th e phone lines, press and hold # in the standby mode. â Line change â To prevent lin e selectio n (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phon e > Call divert . Call divert al lows you to divert yo ur incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact y our service provider. Select which ca lls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. Set the option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is act ivated ( Check sta tus ). Several diverting op tions can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown i n the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be activ e at the same time. Call barri ng Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phon e > Call barring . Call barring (network servic e) allows you to restrict the calls that you m ake or receive with the devi ce. To change the se ttings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring and call diverting cannot be activ e at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergenc y numbers. Voice call barring Select the desired barrin g option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check stat us ). C all barring affects all calls, in cluding data calls. 146 Settings
Internet call barring To select whether anon ymou s calls are allowed from the internet, set Anon ymous call ba rring on or off. Network settings Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Phone > Network . Your device c an automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GS M network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . â Network mode â Sele ct which network to u se. If you select Dual mode , the devic e uses the GSM or UMTS network aut omatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between th e wireless service providers. Contact your network se rvice provide r for details and roaming costs. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. â Operator selection â Select Automati c to set the device to searc h for and select one of the availa ble net works, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e sele cted network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. A roaming agreement is an agreement be tween two or more service providers to enable th e users of one service prov ider to use the servic es of other service providers. â Cell info display â Select On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network ( MCN) technology and to act ivate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection setting s, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. You can also edit settings for Bl uetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth connectivity application. See "Settings," p. 71 . You can also edit se ttings for data cable connec tions in the USB application. See "USB," p. 74 . Data connections and access points Your device supp orts packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM n etwork. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be act i ve at the same time, and acce ss points can share a data 147 Settings
connection. In the UMTS network, data con nections remain active during voice calls. You can al so use a WLAN data conne ction. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several app lications can use the same internet access point. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define differe nt kinds of access points, such as the following : â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet access point (IAP ) to send and receive e- mail and connect to the internet Check the t ype of access poin t you need w ith your service provider for the se rvice you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contac t your service provider. Access points Create a new access point Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset fo r your device by your service provide r, and you m ay not be able to chan ge, create , edit, or remove th em. indicates a prot ecte d access point. indicates a packet data access point. indicates a WLAN access point. Tip: You can c reate internet acce ss points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new access point , select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an access point, select Options > Edit . Follow the instructions from your service provider. â Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. â Data be arer â Select the data connection type. Depending on th e data connecti on you select, only certain setting fields are av ailable. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be def ined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed ot herwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection , your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access poin ts > Option s > Edit or New access point . 148 Settings
Follow the instructions fr om your service pro vider. â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provi der. â User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. â Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . â Passwo rd â A password may b e needed to make a data connection a nd is usually provided by the service provider. â Authentication â S e l e c t Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. â Home page â Dependi ng on the acc ess po int you are sett ing up, ente r the web addre ss or the address of the multimedia messagin g centre. Select Op tions > Advanced settings to change the following settings: â Network type â Select t h e internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. Th e other settings depend on the selected network type. â Phone IP address (for IPV4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS address â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider . Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses. â Prox y server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port n umber of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points > Option s > Edit or New access point . Follow the instructions from the WLAN service provider. â WLAN network name â Sele ct Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing net work, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. â Network status â Define whe ther the network name is displayed. â WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc networ k and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN acc ess point devi ce is not need ed. In an ad hoc ne twork, all devices must use the same WLAN network name . â WLAN security mode â Select th e encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you sele ct Open ne twork , no 149 Settings
encryption is used. The WEP, 8 02.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. To enter the settings for t h e selected secu rity mode, select WLAN security settings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in use â Select the wired eq uivalent privacy (WEP) key n umber. You can crea te up to four WEP keys. The sa me settings must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â Authentication type â Select Open or Shared for the aut h entication typ e between your device and the WLA N access point device. â WEP key settings â Enter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hexadeci mal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the sele cted format). Security se ttings for 802.1 x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA2 â Select the means of authentication: EAP to use an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-in, or Pre- shared ke y to use a passwor d. Complete the appropriate settings: â EAP plug- in settings â Enter the settings as your service provider instru cts. â Pre-sh ared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled dev ices are allowed to establis h a connection in this mode. Advanced WLAN settings Select Option s > Advanced setti ngs and fro m the following: â IPv4 settings â En ter the IP address o f your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Contact your intern et service prov ider for these addresses. â IPv6 settings â D e f i n e t h e t y p e o f D N S a d d r e s s . â Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel n umber (1- 11) man ually, select User defined . â Proxy server addres s â Enter the a ddress for the proxy serv er. â Proxy port numbe r â Enter the p roxy port number. Packet data sett ings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data . The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection . â Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the de vice registers to the packet 150 Settings
data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e- mail) is quick er. If there is no packet data coverage, the devic e periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the devi ce uses a pack et data connection only if you start an application or action that need s it. â Access point â The access poin t name is neede d to use your device as a pac ket data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network service) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN settings Press , an d sele ct Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Wireless LA N . â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed in the standby mode when a wireless LAN is av ailable. â Scan for networ ks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select ho w often th e device searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, selec t Option s > Advanced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommende d. SIP settings Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > SIP settings . Session Initiation Proto col (SIP) settings are neede d for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Internet ca ll set tings Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Internet tel. . To crea te a n ew interne t call pro file, select Option s > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Opt ions > Edit . Configur ations Press , an d sel ect Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Configurations . You may receive trusted serve r settings from your service provider in a co nfigurat ion message. You can save view or delete these settings in configurations. 151 Settings
Access point name co ntrol Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access p oint name control service , you can restrict packet data co nnections and allow your device t o use o nly certain pack et data acce ss points. This setting is only available if your SIM card supports the access po int control service. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the correspo nding opti on. To ch ange the opti ons, you need your PIN2 code. Cont act your service provider for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of so me of the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . To edit the settings, you can also select Options > Settings in each application. 152 Settings
Troubleshooting Q: What is my pass word for the lock, PIN, or PUK code s? A: The defau lt lock cod e is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code , contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have no t received such a code, contact your netw ork service provider. For information about passwor ds, contact your access point provider, for example, a commerc ial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provi der. Q: How do I close an a pplication that is not responding? A: Press and hold . To close an application, scroll to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Mu sic player, se lect it fro m the list, and Options > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protect ion windows are clean. Q: Why do mis sing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the s creen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteri stic of this type of display. Some displays may contai n pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, no t a fault. Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS connec tion? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and loca tion information in th is user guide. See "Posi tioning (GPS)," p. 51 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my f riendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth conn ectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also th at the distance between the two de vices is not ov er 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the de vices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Blue tooth connection? A: If another de vice is connected to your device, you can eith er end the conn ection using the other device or by deactivati ng Bluetooth connecti vity. 153 Troubleshootin g
Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my device in the home ne twork? A: Make sure that you h ave configured the home network sett ings, conten t sharing is turned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my home network connection stops working? A: Switch off the wirele ss LAN (WLAN) connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does n ot help, restart y our compatible PC and your device. If the connec tion still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN setti ngs in both your compatible PC and dev ice. See "Wireless LAN," p. 68 . Se e "Conne ction settings," p. 147 . Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the hom e netwo rk? A: If you are using a firewall applica tion in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use t he external conn ection (y ou can add Home media server to the firewall application's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the firewall applicatio n allows traffic to the followin g ports: 1900, 49152, 49 153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devices have a built-in firewall. In such cases, check that the firewall in the access point device does not block t raffic to th e followin g ports: 1900, 49152, 49 153, and 49154. Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) ac cess point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SS ID if you know the correc t SSID, and have created a WLAN Internet access point for the network on you r Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your No kia dev ice switche s off when you are not trying to connect, not conn ected to another access po int, or not scanning for availab le networ ks. T o further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in th e background. WLAN switches off in betw een background scan s. To change the background scan settings: 1. Press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Wireless LAN . 2. To increase the background scan time interval, adjust the time in Sca n for network s . To stop 154 Troubleshootin g
background scans, select Show WLAN availabi lity > Never . 3. To save your changes, press Back . When Scan for networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN network s, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: How can I save my data before deleting it ? A: To save data, use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to make a back-up c opy of all data to a compatible co mputer; send images to your e-mail address, then save the images to your computer; or se nd data using Bluetoot h connect ivity to a compa tible device. Yo u can also store data on a compatible memory card. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not ha ve a phone number, an address, or an e-mail address. Press , select Contacts , and edit th e contact ca rd. Q: How can I en d the data connection when th e device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multim edia message centre. To stop the devi ce from making a data connection, press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Multim edia m e ssage > Mult imedia retrieval and Manual to have the multimedia messaging centre save me ssages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new mu ltimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any netw ork connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the d evice to use a packet data connec tion only if you st art an application or action that needs it, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, swit ch the device o ff, and switch it on again. Q: Why do I have pro blems conn ecting the device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have the latest version of Nokia Nseries PC Suite an d that it is insta lled and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use No kia Nseries PC Suite, se e the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or v isit the Nokia support page s. Q: Can I use my de vice as a fax modem with a compat ible P C? A: You cann ot use your de vice as a fax mode m. However, with call divert ing (network servi ce), you can divert i ncoming f ax calls to another pho ne number. 155 Troubleshootin g
Nokia original enhancements Warning : Use only batteries, chargers, and enhanceme nts approved by No kia for use with th is particular model. T h e use of any othe r types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. An extensive rang e of enhancements is available for your device. Please visit www.nokia-asia.com/ enhancements for more details. For availability of the e nhancements, please check with your local dealer. Enhancements Practical rul es about acce ssories and enhanceme nts â Keep all accessories and enhancemen ts out of the reach of small children. â When you disconnect th e power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. â Check regularly that enhancements instal led in a vehicle are mounted and are operating p roperly. â Installation of any comple x car enhancement s must be made by qual ified perso nnel only. Battery Type Talk tim e Standby BP-6MT Important: Battery talk and standby times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, network condi tions, feature s used, battery age and condition, temperatures to which battery is exposed, use in digita l mode, and many other f a c t o r s . T h e a m o u n t o f t i m e a d e v i c e i s u s e d f o r c a l l s will affect its standby ti me. Likewise, the amount of time that the device is t urned on and in the standby mode wil l affect its ta lk time. 156 Nokia or iginal enhan cements Up to minutes (WCDMA/GSM) 0 19 6 2 0 / Up to hours / 2 1 0 2 5 2 (WCDMA/GSM)
Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will event u ally wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, re place the batt ery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery onl y with Nokia approved cha rgers designated for this device. If a replacement bat t ery is being used for the first time or if the battery h as not been use d for a prolonged perio d, it may be necessary to connect the charger, the n discon nect and reconnect it t o begin charging the batt ery. Unplug the charger fr om the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connect ed to a charger, since ov ercharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged b a ttery w ill lose i ts cha rge over time. If the battery is completely disch arged, it may take several minutes before the charging indica tor appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpos e. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circu it the battery. A ccidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic ob ject such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) termi nals of the battery. (These look like metal st rips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pock et or purse. Short- circuiting the ter minals may damage the battery or the conn ecting ob ject. Leaving th e battery in hot or cold pl aces, such a s in a closed ca r in summer or winter co nditions, wil l reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always tr y to keep th e battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A de vice w ith a hot or co ld battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully ch arged. Battery perfo rmance is partic ularly limited in temper ature s well below freezing. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they may explode. Batt eries may also exp lode if damaged. Dispose of batteries accord ing to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. 157 Battery information
Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery le ak, do not allow the liqu id to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In th e event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immedi ately with water, or seek m e dical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nok ia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and inspect the ho logram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the auth enticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe t hat your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorised No kia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect th e battery for au thenticity. If authentici ty cannot be verified, return the battery to the p lace of purch ase. Authen ticate h ologram 1. When you look at the hologram on th e label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo w hen looking from another angle . 2. When you angle the hologram lef t, right, down and up, you shou ld see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authen tic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery wit h the hologram on th e labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery . Take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The us e of a battery that is not approv ed by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any appro val or warra nty applying to the device. 158 Battery information
To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery . 159 Battery information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of sup erior design and craftsmanship and shoul d be treated with care. The following sug gestions w ill help you protect your warranty coverage. â Keep th e device dry. Precipitatio n, humidity , and all types of liquids or moisture ca n contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely befo re replacing it. â Do not use or store th e device in dust y, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. â Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatu res can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store the de vice in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circui t boards. â Do not atte mpt to open the de vice other than as instructed in thi s guide. â Do not drop, knock, or shake the d evice. Rough handling can break int ernal circuit boards and fine mechanics. â Do not use harsh chemic als, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the d evice. â Do not paint the dev ice. Paint can clog the moving parts and p revent prop er operation. â Use a soft, clean, d ry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Use only the suppli ed or an appr oved replacement anten na. Un authorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. â Use chargers indoors. â A l w a y s c r e a t e a b a c k u p o f d a t a y o u w a n t t o k e e p , such as contacts and calendar notes. â To reset the devi ce from time to t i me for optimum performance, power off the device and remove th e battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any en hancement. If any de vice 160 Care a nd maintenance
is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service fa cility for service. 161 Care a nd maintenance
Additional safety information Small ch ildren Your device and its enha ncements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the n ormal use posit ion against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 centimeters (5/ 8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-w orn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body . To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the netw ork. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above sep arati on distance instructions are followed un til the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magn etic. Metallic mate rials may be attracted to the de vice. Do not place cred it cards or other magnetic storage me dia near the device, because infor mation stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wi reless phones, may inte rfere with the functionality of inad equately protected medical devices. Consu lt a phys ician or t he manufactu rer of the medical d evice to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your d e vice in health care faciliti es when any reg ulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities ma y be using e quipment th at could be sensitive t o external RF energy. Implanted m edical devic es Manufacturers of medica l devices recommend that a minimum separa tion of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches ) should be maint ained betwe en a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoi d potential int erferenc e with the medi cal device. Persons who have such devices should: 162 Additional safety information
â Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inc hes) from the med ical devi ce when the wireless dev ice is turned on. â Not carry th e wireless device in a breast po cket. â Hold the wirele ss device to the ea r opposite the medical devic e to mini mize the pote ntial for interfer ence. â Turn the wireless device off im mediately if ther e is any reason to suspec t that inter ferenc e is taking place. â Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their im planted medical device. If you ha ve any ques tions abo ut using yo ur wireless device with an implanted medical d evice, consult your hea lth care provider . Hearin g aids Some digital wireless de vices may interfere with some hearing aids. If inte rfere nce occurs, co nsult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded elect ronic syste ms in motor vehicles such as elec tronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electron ic speed contro l systems, and air bag systems. For more inform ation, check with the manufacturer, or its repres entativ e, of yo ur vehicle or any equipment th at has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the devi ce or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that al l wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operatin g properly. Do not store or carry flammable liqu ids, gases, or explosive materials in the same co mpartment as the device, its parts, or enhancemen ts. For vehi cles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place ob jects, including installed or portable wireless equipmen t in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wirele ss equipment is improperly inst alled and the air bag inflates, se rious i njury could result. Using your device while flying in ai rcraft is prohibited. Switch off your de vice be fore b oardi ng an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices i n an aircraft may be danger ous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt th e wireless tele phone netw ork, and may be illegal. 163 Additional safety information
Potentially explosive enviro nments Switch off your device wh en in any area with a potentially explosive at mosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would n o r m a l l y b e a d v i s e d t o t u r n o f f y o u r v e h i c l e e n g i n e . Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even dea th. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipm ent in fuel depo ts, storage, and distribution areas; chemical pl ants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosph ere are often, but not always, clea rly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where the air c o ntains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with th e manufacturers of v ehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if th is device can be safely used in th eir vicinity . Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including th is device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landli ne networks, and user- programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditi ons cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely sole ly on any wire less devi ce for essential communications li ke medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end ke y as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for c alls. 3. Enter the off i cial emerge ncy number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in u se, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If th e device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to activate the ph one function be fore you can make 164 Additional safety information
an emergency call . Consult this gui de or your service provider for more information. When making an emergen cy call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the sce ne of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to radio waves . Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidel ines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the p rotection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The expo sure guideline s for mobile de vices emplo y a unit of measureme n t known as the Spec ific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/k ilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the dev ice tr ansmit ting at its hi ghest certif ied power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the po wer required to reach th e network. That amount changes dependin g on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest S AR value under the ICNIRP guidelines f or use of the dev ice at the ear is 0.62 W / kg. Use of device acc essories and en hancements may result in diff erent SAR va lues. SAR va lues may va ry depend ing on nationa l repor ting and tes ting requirements and the netw ork band. Additional SAR information may be provided under produ ct information at www.nokia -asia.com. 165 Additional safety information
Index A access codes 16 access points 69, 148 accessories See enhancem ents activation keys 91 active standby mode 96, 141 active toolbar in camera 29 in galle ry 41 address book See contacts alarm clock 97 alarm, calendar note 98 albums, media 41 anniversary notes 98 answering calls 114 application manager 133 applications 133 attachment s 105, 106 audio messages 102 auto-update for time/ date 97 B backlight time-out 140 barcodes 13 1 battery power saver setting 140 saving power 17 birthda y notes 98 blogs 63, 91 Bluetooth conne ctivity device address 73 device visibility 72 pairing devices 73 receiving data 73 security 72 sending data 72 settings 71 switching on/off 71 bookmarks 64 brightness, di splay 140 browser bookmarks 64 browsing pages 6 1, 63 cache memory 65 downloads 64 security 65 settings 66 C cable connection 74 cache memory 65 calculator 133 calendar 98 call waiting 115 calls 113 answering 114 conference 114 duration of 123 internet calls 122 log for 123 options during 113 recording 92 rejecting 114 settings 145 camera colour 37 flash 32 image quality 36 imaging mode 30 lighting 37 scenes 32 self-timer 33 sequence mode 32 settings 36 166 Index
video mode 35 video quality 38 cell broa dcast messages 100 certificates 143 character encoding 102 charts, sprea dsheet 129 clipboard, copying to 102 clock 96, 97 comput er connections 75 See also data connections conference calls 114 configu ratio n See settings connection manager 70 contact information 15 contac ts copying 126 default information 126 deleting 125 editing 125 groups 127 images in 125 ringing tones 126 saving 125 sending 125 synchronising 138 voice tags 125 conver ter currenc y 130 copying text to clipboard 102 copyright prot ection 91 currency convert er 130 customer service 15 D data connections cable 74 device manager 138 PC connectivity 75 synchronisation 138 date and time 97 declining calls 114 device manager 138 dialled numbers 123 dismissing c alls 114 display settings 140 document applications 129 downloads 64 DRM (digital r ights management) 91 duration of ca lls 123 E e-mail messages 105 end al l calls opt ion 115 enhancements settings 141 Excel, Microsoft 129 F factory settings, restoring 144 feeds, news 63 Flash Player 91 FM radio 84 font settings 140 formatting memory cards 137 G gallery 39 general informati on 1 5 GPS (Glob al Positioning System) 51 grid view of menu s 9 6 H headset 25 help appl ication 15 home ne twork 47 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 22 I IAPs (internet access points) 69 imag es editing 42 printing 45, 46 167 Index
sharing online 46 inbox, message 104 indicato rs and icon s 21 inst allati on of applications 134 internet calls 120, 12 2 connecting 121 making 122 profiles 121, 151 settings 151 internet connecti on 61 See also browser J J2ME Java application support 133 Java script s/ applications 133 K keyguard 22, 142 keypad 22, 142 L landmarks 5 9 language settings 141 light settings 140 list view of menus 96 location information 51 lock co de 16 lockin g keypad 22, 142 loudspe aker 26 M mailbox e-mail 105 video 1 14 voice 114 main menu 96 Maps 53 media Flash Player 9 1 music player 79 radio 8 4 RealPlayer 90 streaming 9 0 voice reco rder 92 meeting notes 98 meetings, setting up 98 memo notes 98, 130 memory cleari ng 18 web cache 65 messages e-mail 105 folders for 100 icon for incoming 104 multimedia 104 settings 107 voice 114 Mini Map 63 MMS (multim edia message service) 102, 104 multimedia menu 23 multimedia messages 102, 104 music player 79 muting sound 114 my numbers 125 N navigation too ls 51 network settings 147 news feeds 63 Nokia contact informati on 15 Nokia Lifeblog 91 Nokia ori ginal enhancements 156 notes 130 O offline mode 26 operator logo 141 options menu for calls 113 outbox, message 100 168 Index
P packet data connection access point settings 148 counters 12 3 settings 150 page overview 63 PDF reader 130 person al certif icates 143 personalisation 94, 140 phonebo ok See contacts photographs See camera PictBridge 45 PIN code 16 PIN2 code 16 positionin g information 51 position ing set tings 144 power saver 140 PowerPoint, Micros oft 129 predictive text entry mode 101 presen tations, multimedia 44, 105, 129 printin g images 45 print baske t 42 product supp ort pages 15 profiles internet call profile 121, 151 offline restrictions 26 proxy setti ngs 149 PUK codes 16 punctuation, text entry 102 Q Quickmanager 130 Quickpoint 129 Quicksheet 129 Quickword 1 29 R radio 84 RealPlayer 90 recording calls 92 sounds 92 recording video clips 35 redial feature 145 rejecting calls 114 remote m ailbox 105 remote SIM mode 74 ringing tones 94, 95 roaming 147 S scenes , imag e and v ideo 32 screen sett ings 140 security certificates 143 web browser 65 WEP 150 WPA 150 security code 16 security module 144 self-timer, camer a 33 sent messages folder 100 service commands 100 service messa ges 105 setting wizard 19 settings access point name control 152 access points 148 applications 152 Bluetooth conne ctivity 7 1 call barring 146 call divert 146 calls 145 camera 36 certificates 143 configuration 151 display 140 enhancemen ts 141 home network 48 internet call 151 language 141 169 Index
network 147 packe t data 150 packe t data access points 148 personalisa tion 140 positioning 144 RealPlayer 90 shortcuts 141 SIP 151 standby 1 41 tv-out 142 Video Centre 78 video sharing 118 web browser 66 WLAN 150, 151 WLAN internet access points 149 shared video 118 shooting mode s, camera 32 shortcuts 141 signature, digital 143 SIM card contacts 127 messages 1 07 SIM card security 142 SIP 151 slide sho w 42 SMS (short message service) 102 software applications 133 software updat e 16 songs 79 speaker phone 26 special characters, text entry 102 speed dialli ng 11 5 standby mode 96, 141 streaming media 90 support 15 Symbian applications 133 synchronisatio n of data 138 T templates, message 103 text entry 101 text messages receiving and reading 104 replying to 104 sending 102 settings 107 SIM messages 107 themes 94 time and date 97 time zone settings 97 time-out for back light 140 tones ring settings 94, 95 settings 140 toolbar 29, 41 transferring data 19 transferr ing music 82 troubles hooting 153 trust settings 144 TV configuration 142 tv-out mode 44 U unlocking keypad 22, 14 2 UPIN code 16 UPnP (Universal Plug and Play architecture) 47 UPUK code 16 USB cable connection 74 V video calls 116, 1 17 options during 117 video clips shared 118 Visual Radio 84 voice ap plica tions 137 voice calls See calls voice commands 115, 137 voice over IP 122 voice over IP (VOIP) 12 0 voice recorder 92 VoIP 122 volume controls 26 170 Index
W wallpaper 94 web connection 61 web logs 63, 91 week settings , calendar 98 welcome 19 welcome note 140 WEP 150 wireless LAN (WLAN) 68 wireless LAN s ettings 151 Word, Microsof t 129 world clock 9 7 WPA 150 Z zip manager 131 zooming 31, 35 171 Index
Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care we b suppor t provid es you w ith mor e infor mation on our on line servic es. INTE RA CTIVE D EMONSTR ATI ONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time , and fin d out more about its feature s. Intera ctive Dem onstrations give step-by -step in structio ns on u sing yo ur phone. USERâ S GUID E The online Userâ s Guide c ontains deta iled informa tion on your ph one. Reme mber to che ck regularly for up dates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone wit h software fo r your ph one and PC. Nok ia PC Suite connects your ph one and PC s o you c an m anage your calen dar, co ntacts , music an d images, w hile other application s complement its use. SETTINGS Certain ph one fun ctions, such as mul timedia mes saging , mobile brow sing and email*, may requir e set tin gs befo re yo u ca n use th em. Have t hem sen t t o yo ur phone free of charge. *Not available on all phones . INTERACTIVE DEMONST RATIONS SOFTWARE USER âÂÂS GU ID E SETTINGS
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE? The Set U p secti on, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps yo u prepare your phone for use. Familiarise yourself with phon e functions and featu res by refer ring to the Guides and Demos s ection at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AN D PC? Connecting your phon e to a compatible PC with the requis ite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite le ts you sy nchr on ise yo ur cal enda r and c ont act s. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR M Y PHONE? Get mor e out of your phone with downloads fr om the Software section at www.nokia-as ia.c om/softwa re . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON QUESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on y our phone and other Nokia products and serv ic es. HOW DO I KEEP UP WIT H NOKIA NEW S? Subscribe online at www.nokia- asia.com/signup an d be the fir st to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connecti ons" to rec eive month ly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up fo r "Be The Fi rst To Know" to get exclus ive previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promo tional Communications" for upcoming events. Should you still require further assistance, please refer to www.nokia-as ia.co m/contactu s . For addition al inform ation on repair s ervices, please visi t ww w.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own coun try site for mor e details: Australia and New Zealand ww w.noki a.com. au/su pport Malay sia www.no kia.com .my/s upport Indi a ww w.nokia .co.in /suppor t Phili ppin es www.no kia.com .ph/s upport Indo nesi a ww w.nokia.co .id/su pport Sing ap or e www.no kia.com .sg/supp ort Jap an ww w.nokia.co .jp/su pport Thai lan d www.no kia.co.th /suppo rt If your countr y is not listed above, pleas e visit www.n okia-asia. com/s upport .